Project Manual For Project No. 31297-000 BYRD PARK ...€¦ · Project Manual For Project No....

95% Design – NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

Project Manual

For

Project No. 31297-000

BYRD PARK RESERVOIR

ZONE 1N SUPPLY MAIN AND INLET VALVE REPLACEMENT

Department of Public Utilities

City of Richmond, Virginia

Date: August 2019

Prepared By:

Hazen and Sawyer

1555 Roseneath Road

Richmond, VA 23230

Phone: (804) 266-1400

August 2019 00010-1 Byrd Park Reservoir Zone 1N Supply Main and Inlet Valve Replacement

SECTION 00010

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CITY OF RICHMOND, VIRGINIA

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC UTILITIES

BYRD PARK RESERVOIR ZONE 1N SUPPLY MAIN AND INLET VALVE REPLACEMENT

CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS:

Summary of Work 01110 Construction Manager and Engineer 01111 Change Order Procedure 01250 Measurement and Payment 01290 Coordination and Meetings 01310 Progress Schedule 01325 Submittals 01330 Limitations on Sequence of Construction 01335 References 01422 Quality Control 01450 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01500 Protection of Existing Facilities 01530 Site Access and Storage 01550 Materials and Equipment 01600 Starting and Placing Equipment 01655 Lines and Grades 01722 Cleaning 01740 Shutdowns and Tie-Ins 01745 Operations and Maintenance Manuals 01783 Contract Closeout 01789 Training 01820 Special Project Provisions 01900

Demolition 02050 Clearing, Grubbing, and Site Preparation 02100 Earthwork 02200 Aggregate Material 02207 Erosion and Sedimentation Control 02276 Surface Restoration Paving and Surfacing Utility Structures Final Grading and Landscaping Traffic Control

02500 02510 02604 02910 02960

Concrete Formwork Cast-in-Place Concrete

03100 03300


Concrete Curing Precast Concrete

03370 03400

Access Hatches Castings Painting

05531 05540

09900

Basic Mechanical Requirements 15000 Ductile Iron Pipe 15006 Pipe Supports 15020 Valves, General 15095 Valve Operators 15100 Butterfly Valves 15101 Check Valves 15105 Gate Valves 15108 Schedules 15390

August 2019 01110-1 Byrd Park Reservoir Zone 1N Supply

Main and Inlet Valve Replacement

SECTION 01110

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Definitions

B. Description of the Work

C. Plans and Specifications

D. Work Under Other Contracts

E. Contractor's Use of Site

F. Work Sequence

G. Owner Occupancy

H. Constraints

I. Time Provisions

J. Liquidated Damages

K. Protection

L. Boundaries

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. In addition to the definitions included in the General Conditions of the Contract, the

following words and terms, or pronouns used in their stead, shall, wherever they

appear in this Contract, be construed as follows, unless a different meaning is clear

from the context:

1. "Agents" shall mean an authorized representative of the City including but not

limited to the Engineer, Construction Manager, and other firms and their

partners, principals, members, and employees acting directly or through duly

authorized representatives.



2. "Contract Work" shall mean everything expressly or impliedly required to be

furnished and done by the Contractor by any one or more of the Contract parts

except Extra Work, as hereinafter defined; it being understood that, in case of

any inconsistency in or between any part or parts of this Contract, the

Construction Manager shall determine which shall prevail.

3. "Extra Work" shall mean work other than that required either expressly or

impliedly by the Contract in its present form.

4. "Specifications" shall mean all of the directions, requirements and standards of

performance applying to the work, as hereinafter detailed and designated as

such, or which may be issued in an addendum.

5. "Addendum" or "Addenda" shall mean the additional contract provisions issued

in writing by the Owner prior to the receipt of bids.

6. "Project" shall mean the entire improvement of which the work to be

constructed under this Contract forms a part.

7. "Site" shall mean the designated area upon or in which the Contractor's

operations are carried on and such other areas adjacent thereto as may be

required. "Site" areas may include lands owned by or leased by the Owner and

rights-of-way acquired for the construction of the project.

8. Whenever in the Contract the words "required", "permitted", "designated",

"prescribed", and words of like import are used, they shall imply the

requirement, permission, designation, or prescription of the Construction

Manager; and "approved", "acceptable", "satisfactory", "in the judgment of",

and words of like import shall mean approved by, or acceptable to, or

satisfactory to, or in the judgment of the Construction Manager.

9. “Date of substantial completion” shall be the date as certified by the

Construction Manager when the construction of the work or a specified part

thereof is sufficiently completed, in accordance with the Contract Documents,

so that the work or specified part may be beneficially occupied for the purposes

for which it was intended. Occupancy of individual structures, buildings,

facilities, or the like, being constructed under this contract, shall not constitute

Substantial Completion unless expressly provided for elsewhere in these

documents.

10. "Prevailing Standard Time" shall be construed as the time being observed in the

City of Richmond on the respective days bids are received or other documents

issued or signed, Eastern Standard Time in the winter and Eastern Daylight

Time in the summer.



11. "Final Completion": Date of final completion shall be the date as certified by

the Construction Manager when the construction of the work is complete in

accordance with the Contract Documents, such that no further work remains to

be done at the site or otherwise. The certification of final completion shall serve

as the date when the Contractor has fulfilled all requirements for final payment

as described in the General Conditions of the Contract.

12. “Change Order” is a document which is signed by Contractor and Owner and

authorizes an addition, deletion or revision in the Work and/or adjustment in

the Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued on or after the Effective Date of

the Agreement.

13. “Claim” is a demand or assertion by Contractor for a specific adjustment of

Contract Price or Contract Time or both or other relief with respect to the terms

of the Contract.

14. “Construction Manager” is a person or entity designated as a construction

manager by Owner who provides professional management services, which

contribute to the control of time and the cost and quality of a public

construction project, and who performs those services concurrent with

architectural and engineering services rendered during the design and

construction phase of the Project. This term shall apply to the Owner when the

Owner acts as its own Construction Manager.

15. “Contract Price” are the moneys payable by Owner to Contractor for

completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated

in the General Conditions.

16. “Contract Time” are the number of days or dates stated in Agreement to; (i)

achieve Milestones, if any, and (ii) achieve Substantial Completion.

17. “Drawings” are that part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by

Engineer which graphically shows the scope, extent, dimensions, location and

character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. Drawings may either be

bound in the same book as the balance of the Contract Documents or bound in

separate sets, and are a part of the Contract Documents, regardless of the

method of binding. Shop Drawings and other Contractor submittals are not

Drawings as so defined.

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK

A. General: The Work to be done under this Contract includes:

1. Construction of 20-inch through 36-inch diameter water transmission mains

2. Demolition of existing buried gate valves, valve vaults, and water mains

3. Construction of precast concrete valve vaults, check valves, and buried

isolation valves



4. Tie-ins to existing water mains and temporary support of existing utilities.

5. Installation of linestops on 20-inch through 36-inch diameter pipe and

installation of temporary bypass systems

6. Erosion and sediment control and traffic control

7. Tree protection and tree removal

8. Site restoration and pavement restoration

B. The Work includes:

1. Furnishing of all labor, material, superintendence, plant, power, light, heat,

fuel, water, tools, appliances, equipment, supplies, services and other means of

construction necessary or proper for the performance and completion of the

Work.

2. Sole responsibility for adequacy of plant and equipment.

3. Maintaining the Work area and site in a clean and acceptable manner.

4. Maintaining existing facilities in service at all times except where specifically

provided for otherwise herein.

5. Protection of finished and unfinished Work.

6. Repair and restoration of Work damaged during construction.

7. Furnishing as necessary proper equipment and machinery, of a sufficient

capacity, to facilitate the Work and to handle all emergencies normally

encountered in Work of this character.

8. Furnishing, installing, and protecting all necessary guides, track rails, bearing

plates, anchor and attachment bolts, and all other appurtenances needed for the

installation of the devices included in the equipment specified. Make anchor

bolts of appropriate size, strength and material for the purpose intended.

Furnish substantial templates and shop drawings for installation.

C. Implied and Normally Required Work: It is the intent of these Specifications to

provide the Owner with complete operable systems, subsystems and other items of

Work. Any part or item of Work which is reasonably implied or normally required to

make each installation satisfactorily and completely operable is deemed to be included

in the Work and the Contract Amount. All miscellaneous appurtenances and other

items of Work incidental to meeting the intent of these Specifications are included in

the Work and the Contract Amount even though these appurtenances may not be

specifically called for in these Specifications.



D. Quality of Work: Regard the apparent silence of the Contract Documents as to any

detail, or the apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any

Work to be done and materials to be furnished as meaning that only the best general

practice is to prevail and that only materials and workmanship of the best quality are

to be used. Interpretation of these specifications will be made upon this basis.

E. Compliance with Laws: Comply with all local, State and Federal laws, rules,

ordinances and regulations applicable to this Contract and to the work done

hereunder, Obtain all permits, licenses or other authorization necessary for the

prosecution of the work. The costs for all such permits shall be included in the

contract price and no separate payment will be made therefore, except for permit fees

paid by the City for this project as noted in Section 01900.

1.4 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Plans

1. The Plans for the work to be done under this Contract bear the general title:

Byrd Park Reservoir Zone 1N Supply Main and Inlet Valve Replacement.

2. When obtaining data and information from the Plans, use figures in preference

to scaled dimensions, and large scale plans in preference to small scale plans.

B. Supplementary Plans

1. When, in the opinion of the Engineer, it becomes necessary to explain more

fully the work to be done or to illustrate the work further or to show any

changes which may be required, plans known as Supplementary Plans, with

specifications pertaining thereto, will be prepared by the Engineer and given to

the Contractor.

2. The Supplementary Plans shall be binding upon the Contractor with the same

force as the Contract Plans. Where such Supplementary Plans require either

less or more than the estimated quantities of work, credit to the Owner or

compensation therefore to the Contractor shall be subject to the terms of the

Agreement.

C. Contractor to Check Contract Plans and Data

1. Verify all dimensions, quantities and details shown on the Plans,

Supplementary Plans, schedules, Specifications or other data received from the

Engineer, and notify him of all errors, omissions, conflicts, and discrepancies

found therein. Failure to discover or correct errors, conflicts or discrepancies

shall not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for unsatisfactory work,



faulty construction or improper operation resulting therefrom nor from

rectifying such conditions at his own expense.

2. The Contractor will not be allowed to take advantage of any errors or

omissions, as full instructions will be furnished by the Engineer, should such

errors or omissions be discovered.

3. All schedules are given for the convenience of the Engineer and the Contractor

and are not guaranteed to be complete. The Contractor shall assume all

responsibility for the making of estimates of the size, kind, and quality of

materials and equipment included in work to be done under the Contract.

D. Unforeseen Physical Conditions

1. Promptly notify the Owner and the Construction Manager in writing of any

subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site or in an existing structure

differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract

Documents. The Construction Manager will promptly review those conditions

and advise the Owner in writing if further investigation or tests are necessary.

Promptly thereafter, the Owner shall obtain the necessary additional

investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Construction Manager and the

Contractor.

2. If the Construction Manager finds that the results of such investigations or tests

indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions which differ

materially from those intended in the Contract Documents, and which could not

reasonably have been anticipated by the Contractor, a Change Order shall be

issued incorporating the necessary revisions.

E. Specifications

1. It is hereby agreed that failure by the Contractor to advise his subcontractors

and suppliers of the necessity to review the Specifications as a whole, and not

as individual sections, to determine the work required or to be supplied, shall

not constitute a basis for a claim for additional compensation or an extension to

the Contract completion time.

F. Intent

1. All work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not

shown on the Plans in their present form, or vice versa, shall be of like effect as

if shown or mentioned in both.

2. Work not specified in either the Plans or in the Specifications, but involved in

carrying out their intent or in the complete and proper execution of the work, is



required and shall be performed by the Contractor as though it were specifically

delineated or described.

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE

A. In addition to the requirements of the General Conditions, limit use of site and

premises for work and storage to allow for the following:

1. Owner occupancy and access to operate existing facilities.

2. Coordination of site use with Construction Manager.

3. Responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products under this Contract.

4. Providing additional off site storage at no additional cost to Owner as needed.

B. Noise: Contractor’s use of site shall limit noise levels to comply with current City

code requirements and any other specified requirement.

1.6 WORK SEQUENCE

A. Construct Work in stages to accommodate Owner's use of premises during

construction period and in accordance with the limitations on the sequence of

construction specified. Coordinate construction schedules and operations with

Construction Manager.

B. Coordinate Work of all subcontractors.

1.7 OWNER OCCUPANCY

A. Owner will occupy premises during entire period of construction in order to maintain

normal operations. Cooperate with Owner's representative in all construction

operations to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner usage.

B. Conduct operations to minimize inconvenience to the general public. Comply with

Owner’s request to minimize impacts to the general public.

1.8 CONSTRAINTS

A. The Contract Documents are intended to allow the Contractor flexibility in

construction of the Work; however, constraints described in the Drawings and

Specifications shall apply.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 TIME PROVISIONS

A. Starting Work: Start Work within 10 days following the date stated in the Notice to

Proceed and execute with such progress as may be required to prevent delay to other

contractors or to the general completion of the project.

B. Unless the contract completion date is modified pursuant to the provisions of the

General Conditions, complete the work covered by this Contract in the number of

consecutive calendar days set forth in the Invitation for Bid. At all times, schedule and

direct the Work so that it provides an orderly progression to Substantial Completion

within the specified time for completion.

C. Milestone Dates: Complete the work no later than the dates given.

1. All Work and Contract Completion: Unless the date of completion is modified

pursuant to the General Conditions, all Work must be completed within the

time period set forth in the Invitation for Bid.

3.2 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

A. It is agreed between the parties that time is of the essence of this Contract.

B. The amount per day set forth in the Invitation for Bid is hereby agreed upon as the

liquidated damages for each and every calendar day that the time consumed in

completing the work exceeds the time allowed in accordance with the following:

1. In the event that the date for Substantial Completion for all the work occurs

after the work as bid was to be complete or the date to which such date has

been modified by Change Order:

a. The Contractor agrees to pay the Owner liquidated damages, in the

amount per day set forth in the Invitation for Bid, for each calendar day

by which the Date of Substantial Completion exceeds the date work as

bid was to be complete or the date to which such date has been modified

by Change Order.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. During performance and until final acceptance, provide absolute protection of the

finished and unfinished work against any damage, loss, or injury. Take proper

precaution to protect the finished work from loss or damage, pending completion and

the final acceptance of all the work included in the entire Contract. Such precaution

shall not relieve the Contractor from any and all liability and responsibility for loss or

damage to the work occurring before certification of final completion by the Owner.



Such loss or damage shall be at the risk of and borne by the Contractor, whether

arising from acts or omissions of the Contractor or others. In the event of any such

loss or damage, repair, replace, and make good the work without extension of time

therefor, except as may be otherwise specified.

B. The provisions of this subsection shall not be deemed to create any new right of action

in favor of third parties against the Contractor or the Owner.

3.4 BOUNDARIES

A. Confine equipment, apparatus, storage of materials, supplies and apparatus of

workmen to the limits indicated by law, ordinances, permits, shown on the Plans,

specified or direction of the Owner.

END OF SECTION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK



SECTION 01111

CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AND ENGINEER

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Definitions

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Hazen and Sawyer, 1555 Roseneath Road, Richmond, Virginia, 23230, (804) 266-

1400 who is referred to in the Contract Documents as the Engineer, has prepared

the Contract Documents for this Project. Hazen and Sawyer shall have the duties

and responsibilities as set forth for the Engineer in the Contract Documents.

B. The Project will be administrated by Construction Manager (CM) that will be

assigned to this project by the City. The CM shall have the duties and

responsibilities as set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for the

Engineer. The CM will work with the Engineer to resolve engineering questions

concerning the project.

C. The word “Engineer” in the Specifications (Division 1 through Division 17) shall

be replaced with “Construction Manager” except as noted in the following

example. The substitution of the word “Engineer” with “Construction Manager” is

based upon the responsibilities of the “Engineer” in that particular use. As an

example, if the intent is for the Contractor to provide notice to, or submit

information to, or coordinate with Engineer, (i.e. contract administration type

issues) then “Engineer” is to be replaced with “Construction Manager.” If the

intent is for the Engineer to approve substitutions, etc. (engineering type decisions)

then the word “Engineer” shall remain as “Engineer.”

D. The printing of the word “Engineer”, or any similar term, and the substitution of

“Construction Manager” shall not serve as justification for the Contractor not

following his contractual obligations. If there is any question or confusion as to

whether “Engineer” or “Construction Manager” is appropriate, then the Contractor

shall request the Construction Manager to make a formal determination.



E. The Owner or Engineer will not normally have direct contact or communication

with the Contractor, his subcontractors or suppliers. All communication from the

Contractor to the Owner or Engineer shall be through the Construction Manager.

To assure continuity between all parties, any communication, oral or written,

between Contractor’s personnel and either the Owner’s operation or maintenance

personnel or Engineer’s technical staff shall be deemed unofficial and non-binding

unless such communication is directed through the Construction Manager.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 01250

CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE

PART 1

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Changes in Construction

B. Extra Work

C. Emergency Work

D. Omitted Work

E. Change Order Procedure

1.2 CHANGES IN CONSTRUCTION

A. Construction Change Orders can be made to the Contract as described in the

General Conditions of the Contract.

1.3 EXTRA WORK

A. The Owner may at any time by a written order and without notice to the sureties

require the performance of such extra work as it may find necessary or desirable.

B. An order for extra work shall be valid only if issued in writing and signed by the

Owner, and the work so ordered shall be performed by the Contractor.

1.4 EMERGENCY WORK

A. In emergencies affecting the safety of persons or the Work or property at the site or

adjacent thereto, the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from

the Owner is obligated to act at his discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury

or loss. He will give the Owner prompt written notice of any significant changes in

the Work or deviations from the Contract Documents caused thereby. If the

Contractor believes that additional work done by him in an emergency which arose

from causes beyond his control entitles him to an extension of the Contract

Completion Date or an increase in the Contract Price, he may make a claim

therefor as provided in the General Conditions of the Contract.



1.5 OMITTED WORK

A. The Owner may at any time by a written order and without notice to the sureties

require the omission of such Contract work as it may find necessary or desirable.

B. An order for omission of work shall be valid only if signed by the Owner and the

work so ordered must be omitted by the Contractor. The amount by which the

Contract price shall be reduced shall be determined as follows:

1. By such applicable unit prices, if any, as are set forth in the Contract; or

2. By the appropriate lump sum price set forth in the Contract; or

3. By the fair and reasonable estimated cost to the Owner, in accordance with

the requirements of the General Conditions Section 5.4.1, Schedule of

Values or other proper costs and price documentation for any Omitted Work

as mutually agreed to by the Contractor and Construction Manager and

approved by the Owner.

1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE

A. Initiation: Change order proposal

1. Initiated by Construction Manager or Owner: The Owner or the

Construction Manager may issue a Request for Proposal (RFP). The Request

will contain a description of the intended change with supplementary or

revised Drawings and Specifications as applicable and the projected time for

accomplishing the change.

2. Initiated by Contractor: The Contractor may propose a change in the work

by submittal of a Change Order Request (COR) to the Construction Manager

describing the proposed change with a statement of the reason for the

change and the effect on the contract time and price, along with supporting

documentation.

B. Execution of Change Order Proposal:

1. When a Proposal is requested for a change in the Work, the Contractor shall

submit his proposal within 14 days following receipt of the Request for

Proposal. The Proposal shall state the increase or decrease, if any, in the

Contract Period and/or Contract Sum.

2. The Contractor shall explain the proposal in as much detail as requested by

the Owner.



3. Any decrease in Contract Sum on account of omitted Work will include

appropriate amounts for profit and overhead.

4. The Owner and Construction Manager will review the Proposal and may

request additional information and documentation which the Contractor

shall provide promptly.

5. If the Owner decides to proceed with the change, it will issue a Change

Order for signature first by the Contractor and then by the Owner.

6. The Contractor will promptly complete the approved change in the Work on

receipt of the executed Change Order.

C. Costs: The cost of both additive and deductive changes in the Work shall be

determined, as follows:

1. Labor: Applied labor cost, crew foreman and general foreman performing

or directly supervising the Work on the Site. Also included are travel and

subsistence, but only in the extent incurred.

2. Insurance: Net premium for Worker's Compensation Insurance, taxes

pursuant to the Federal Social Security Act, payments required under State

and Federal unemployment laws.

3. Additional Materials: Necessary extra materials, delivered at the Site

including the actual cost of consumable supplies. Consumable supplies shall

not be determined by the percentage of cost basis.

4. Plant and Equipment: Rent for plant and equipment shall be at the rental

cost for rentals from an independent firm (i.e. a firm which is not owned in

whole or in part by the Contractor). If the equipment is owned by the

Contractor or rented from a firm in which the Contractor has an interest, the

rent shall be calculated in accordance with the applicable provisions and

terms of the current "Cost Reference Guide for Construction Equipment"

published by Dataquest based on the standard monthly rental rate.

5. Subcontractor Costs: Subcontractor's costs including subtier contractors

shall be determined by items 1 through 4 in the preceding subparagraphs.

Subcontractor overhead and profit shall be limited to the percentage

amounts stipulated in the bid regardless of the number of subtier

subcontractors.

6. Overhead and Profit: Plus percentage amounts stipulated in the bid.

7. During periods of downtime, the following conditions shall also apply:



a. Payment for equipment will be on the basis of a maximum 8-hour

period during each 24 hour period.

b. No overtime will be included.

c. No compensation for subsistence will be included.

d. The rate of overhead and profit will be 10 percent.

e. No compensation for equipment overhaul, field repair and fuel

expenses shall be included.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 01290

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Measurement Authority

B. Schedule of Values

C. Application for Payment

D. Unit Quantities Specified

E. Schedule of Contract Items

F. Payment

G. Defect Assessment

H. Non-Payment for Rejected Products

1.2 MEASUREMENT AUTHORITY

A. Measurement: The Construction Manager will take all measurements and compute

quantities accordingly.

B. Assistance: Assistance to the Construction Manager in the form of necessary

equipment, and qualified personnel shall be provided by the Contractor as required for

taking measurements.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Approval of Schedule: Submit for approval a schedule of values for all the work

consistent with and generated from the cost loaded CPM schedule as indicated in

Section 01325.

B. Revisions: With each Application for Payment revise schedule to list approved

Change Orders.



1.4 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. The Contractor shall submit to the Construction Manager an updated copy of the cost

loaded CPM schedule as a basis for monthly progress payments to the Contractor.

This updated schedule should be submitted to the Construction Manager on or before

the 25th day of each month.

B. When payment for stored materials is permitted, the Contractor shall submit with the

CPM schedule update a separate schedule for Materials Stored showing line item,

description, previous value received, value incorporated into the work and present

value. Accompanying paid invoices demonstrating proof of ownership shall be

provided in conjunction with any stored material for which the Contractor is

requesting payment.

C. The Construction Manager shall update the schedule based on the Contractor's status

provided in accordance with the schedule update requirements of Section 01325 and

prepare for the Contractor's signature a partial payment request consistent with the

earned value of work as determined by the monthly CPM schedule update.

D. The Contractor shall review and if acceptable execute the partial payment request by

signature of an authorized officer of the Contractor and return to the Construction

Manager for distribution to the Owner for payment. Should the Contractor disagree

with the partial payment request as presented by the Construction Manager, the

Contractor shall respond in writing giving reasons for the areas of disagreement.

E. Retainage from Partial Payments: Retainage in the amount of five (5) percent shall be

deducted from the partial payments as stipulated in the General Conditions of the

Contract and as shown on the Partial Payment Request form.

1.5 CONTRACT ITEMS SPECIFIED

A. The intention of the contract items is to provide a complete, functioning unit which

may include Work from several Specification Sections. All the Work which is

required or which can reasonably be inferred to be required to deliver a complete,

functioning unit shall be included.

1.6 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACT ITEMS

A. Contract Item A-1: Mobilization and Demobilization

1. Description:

a. Under the Contract Item for Mobilization and Demobilization, the

Contractor shall provide all labor, services, specialists, material and

equipment for preparatory work and operations, including but not

limited to those necessary for the mobilizing and furnishing site

equipment, materials, supplies and incidentals; for the establishment of



all offices, buildings and other temporary facilities necessary for work

on the project; cost for prepaid bonds and insurance; and for all other

work and operations to be performed or costs incurred to begin work on

the various Contract Items.

b. The City reserves the right in case the Contractor defaults on the

Contract, to retain the use, or have used, the Contractor's plant,

equipment, tools, materials and other property for, and until, completion

of the work, in accordance with Section 7 of the General Conditions of

the Contract.

c. The Contractor is cautioned that the amount to be bid under this Contract

Item shall be as shown in the Bid Form.

2. Payment:

a. Cost of pre-paid bonds and insurance required for the Contract may be

reimbursed under this Contract Item. Proof of payment by the Contractor

for such bonds and insurance costs will be required if reimbursement is

requested prior to having 2 percent of the original Contract amount, less

the allowances, earned. The amount reimbursed for prepaid bonds and

insurance costs will be included as part of any mobilization payments

stipulated under the below listed terms and there will be no extra or

separate payment for these items.

b. When the monthly progress payment estimate of the total amount

earned, not including the amount earned for mobilization, is 2 percent or

more of the original Contract amount, less the allowances, the total

amount earned for mobilization shall be 35 percent of the Contract Item

price for mobilization and this amount will be included in the monthly

estimate for payment.

c. When the monthly progress payment estimate of the total amount

earned, not including the amount earned for mobilization, is 5 percent or

more of the original Contract amount, less the allowances, the total




d. When the monthly progress payment estimate of the total amount

earned, not including the amount earned for mobilization, is 90 percent

or more of the original Contract amount, less the allowances, the total






B. Contract Item A-2: Byrd Park Reservoir Zone 1N Supply Main and Inlet Valve

Replacement Base Bid

1. Payment for construction the Byrd Park Reservoir Zone 1N Supply Main and

Inlet Valve Replacement Base Bid shall be made at the lump sum price bid to

perform the work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

2. Payment: Lump sum unit of measure and payment.

3. The lump sum bid price shall include all labor, materials, tools, equipment and

services for completing the Work, as shown and specified in the Contract

Documents and as summarized in Section 01110 – Summary of Work

including but not limited to:

a. Construction of 20-inch through 36-inch diameter water transmission

lines.

b. Demolition of existing buried valves, valve vaults and water mains.

c. Construction of precast concrete valve vaults, check valves and buried

isolation valves.

d. Tie-ins to existing water mains and temporary support of existing

utilities.

e. Installation of linestops and temporary bypass systems.

f. Traffic control and paving.

g. Tree protection and tree removal

h. Installation of erosion and sediment control measures

i. Site restoration.

C. Contract Item B-1: Allowance for Additional Work

1. Payment for performing Additional Work shall be in accordance with base bid

items to perform additional work as authorized by the CM in writing.

2. Measurement shall be made in accordance with the base bid item or as agreed

by Owner.

3. The allowance bid price shall include all labor, materials, tools, equipment and

services to perform Additional Work as authorized by the CM, including but

not limited to additional excavation and backfill of unsuitable material,



installation of additional piping or fittings, and installation of additional

linestops.

1.7 PAYMENT

A. Payment Includes: Full compensation for all required labor, products, tools,

equipment, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection or application of an

Item of the Works, overhead and profit.

B. Final Payment: Final Payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the

basis of the actual measurements and quantities accepted by the Construction

Manager multiplied by the unit price for the Work which is incorporated in or made

necessary by the Work. Final payment will not be made until submission of

Contractor’s as-built drawings, all training has been completed and other items

specified in Section 01789 have been completed.

1.8 DEFECT ASSESSMENT

A. Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to the specified

requirements.

B. If, in the opinion of the Construction Manager, it is not practical to remove and

replace the Work, the Construction Manager will direct that the defective Work may

remain or be partially replaced and the price will be adjusted to a new price at the

discretion of the Owner.

1.9 NON-PAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS

A. Payment will not be made for any of the following:

1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable.

2. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement.

3. Products not completely unloaded from the vehicle.

4. Products placed beyond the lines and grades of the required Work.

5. Contractor supplied products remaining on hand after completion of the Work.

6. Loading, hauling and disposing of rejected products.

B. Cost Loaded Schedule: No payment requests will be accepted until an approved Cost

Loaded Schedule of Values as described in Section 01325, 1.7 is received from the

Contractor. Payment requests will not be accepted until the Cost Loaded Schedule of

Values has been updated by the Contractor for work in place.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION



SECTION 01310

COORDINATION AND MEETINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Coordination

B. Preconstruction Conference

C. Progress Meetings

1.2 COORDINATION

A. The Contractor shall keep the Construction Manager and the Owner fully advised

as to his plans for carrying out the work and obtain the Construction Manager's

approval for all phases of his operations as hereinafter specified.

B. Coordinate scheduling and submittals to assure efficient and orderly sequence of

delivery of Contract work.

C. In accordance with the requirements of section Progress Schedule, the Contractor

shall prepare and submit a comprehensive schedule of his proposed sequence of

construction included under this contract for review by the Construction Manager.

D. The schedule shall be arranged to complete the work in phases and permit

operation by the Owner of completed phases or parts thereof.

E. The Contractor is cautioned that his schedule for certain areas of the work may be

affected by work included under other Contracts.

F. Work on this Contract shall be coordinated with the work of other contracts. The

Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager of the Contractor's planned

procedures for each specific alteration of work which may effect work under other

contracts before the alteration begins. The Contractor shall not begin any alteration

until specific permission has been granted by the Construction Manager in each

case and shall provide the Construction Manager with sufficient advance notice as

not to impact the Contractor's schedule or the work of the other contracts.

G. If it is necessary for the proper coordination and installation of work by Others, the

Contractor shall reschedule his operations so that his work will not conflict with

necessary operations of the other contracts. Such rescheduling shall not be cause



for a time extension except as provided for in the General Conditions of the

Contract.

H. The Construction Manager shall be the sole judge of when the Contractor's

operations are causing interference with, or delay to, the work or operations of

other contracts, and his orders and instructions shall be carried out without delay.

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. General: Prior to commencement of Work at the Site, a Preconstruction

Conference shall be required. The meeting date shall be determined by the

Construction Manager. The Construction Manager will notify the attendees of the

meeting date.

B. Attendance: The conference shall be attended by the following:

1. The Contractor

2. The representatives of principal suppliers and manufacturers as appropriate

3. The Construction Manager and his resident project representative

4. The Authorized Representatives of the Engineer

5. The Authorized Representatives of the Owner

6. Governmental representatives as appropriate

7. Others, as requested by the Contractor, the Owner, or the Construction

Manager

C. Delineation of Responsibilities: The purpose of the conference is to designate

responsible personnel, to establish a working relationship among the parties and to

identify the responsibilities of the Owner, Construction Manager and the

Contractor. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for

handling such matters, established. The agenda will include:

1. Start Work Date

2. Submittal Procedures

3. Partial Payment Procedures

4. Maintenance of Records

5. Contractor's Request for Clarification

6. Schedules, Sequences and Maintenance of Facility Operations

7. Safety and First Aid Responsibilities

8. Change Orders

9. Use of Site

10. Equipment Delivery

11. Site Access

12. Work Hours

13. Contractor Safety Plan

14. Discussion of Shop Testing, Factory Testing, Functional Testing, and

Performance Testing Requirements



D. Chair and Minutes: The preconstruction conference will be scheduled and chaired

by the Construction Manager who will also arrange for the keeping and

distribution of minutes to all attendees.

1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Meeting Frequency and Format: The Construction Manager shall schedule and

chair progress meetings. Progress Meetings shall be held once every two or four

weeks or more frequently as determined by the complexity of the Project at the

request of the Owner, Construction Manager, Engineer or Contractor. The

following topics will be reviewed at a minimum at each meeting: Distribution

Coordination, Shop Drawing Review, Requests for Clarification, Requests and

Proposals for Changes, Change Orders, Non-Conformance Notices, Progress and

Schedule, Quality Control, New Business, Shut Downs, Tie-ins and System

Impacts, Facility Outages, Permit and Inspection Status, Testing and Startup

Activities. The Contractor may invite suppliers and subcontractors as appropriate.

Minutes of the meeting will be maintained by the Construction Manager and

distributed to all parties. Draft meeting minutes shall be distributed to all parties

within seven calendar days after each meeting. The first Progress Meeting shall be

coordinated with all parties at the preconstruction conference.

B. Meeting Minutes Review: The Contractor shall review and approve or propose

additions or corrections to the draft meeting minutes within seven calendar days

after he receives the draft meeting notes. The Construction Manager shall then

proceed to finalize the meeting minutes and shall distribute them to all parties.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION



SECTION 01325

PROGRESS SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Form of Schedules

B. Working Hours

C. Scheduling Responsibilities

D. Submittals

E. Network Requirements

F. Cost Loading

G. Progress of the Work

H. Schedule Updates

I. Causes for Extensions of Time

J. Abnormal Weather

K. Approval Requests

L. Adjustment by Owner

M. Failure to Adhere to Schedule

1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES

A. Prepare schedules in the form of Critical Path Method (CPM) as described herein.

1. Provide separate CPM networks (subnetworks) of activities for each process

or facility.

2. Each subnetwork shall be assigned a code and separate activity numbering

series.



3. Interrelationships between subnetworks and any individual activities shall be

identified.

1.3 WORKING HOURS

A. Work Hours: Perform work between 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. on weekdays only,

except for specified after hours work. Do not perform work on Saturday, Sundays,

City holidays, or between 5:00 p.m. and 8:00 a.m. without written permission of

Owner. Extraordinary noise such as driving sheeting shall only be permitted

between 9:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. Comply with working hour restrictions required

by City traffic engineering department.

B. Holidays: The City observes a five-day work week and the following holidays:

New Year's Day; Martin Luther King's Birthday; Washington's Birthday; Good

Friday; Memorial Day; Independence Day; Labor Day; Veterans Day;

Thanksgiving Day; the Friday after Thanksgiving; Christmas Eve and Christmas

Day. The Contractor will not be permitted to work on these holidays unless

otherwise authorized by the Construction Manager.

C. Work After Hours: Night work may be established by Contractor as regular

procedure with written permission of Owner. Such permission, however, may be

revoked at any time by Owner if Contractor fails to maintain adequate equipment

and supervision for proper prosecution and control of work at night.

D. Written Requests for Work Outside of Normal Work Hours: Written requests for

work between 5:00 p.m. and 8:00 a.m. on weekdays, and for work on Saturday,

Sundays, and City holidays shall be made in writing at least two weeks prior to

needing the work outside of normal work hours. Written approval from the Owner

shall be obtained before any Work is conducted outside normal working hours.

E. The Owner will charge Contractor for costs of Owner’s, Construction Manager’s,

and Engineer’s personnel for work outside of normal work hours as described in

Paragraph D above. Costs will be charged as a Credit to the City on the next partial

payment credit. Cumulative costs will be included in a change order which will

show credit to the Owner. The Construction Manager will record Owner’s,

Construction Manager’s, and Engineer’s hours outside of normal work hours.

F. Byrd Park Activities: Byrd Park is a City-owned park with numerous events

scheduled throughout the year. Allow twelve calendar work days per year within

the CONTRACTOR’s schedule that the CONTRACTOR will not be allowed to

perform work at the construction site within Byrd Park (cease work days). The

cease work calendar days might not be consecutive. Requests for the

CONTRACTOR to cease work at the construction site within Byrd Park shall be

made in writing by the OWNER. The written requests will be submitted to the

CONTRACTOR at least two weeks prior to the requested cease work day. Prior to

the cease work day, the CONTRACTOR shall clean-up the construction site and



secure the entire site to ensure that park visitors will not intrude into the working

area.

G. Other Byrd Park Activities: In addition to the cease work days described in

Paragraph E above, there are numerous weekend and evening activities scheduled

for the Park. Obtain a list of park activities from the Park Manager for the

following month prior to each construction progress meeting. Submit list of park

activities to the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER at least 7 days prior to the

progress meetings. The activities will be reviewed as a standing agenda item. On

evenings or weekends with critical park activities as identified by the OWNER,

clean-up the construction site and secure the entire site to ensure that park visitors

will not intrude into the working area.

H. Emergencies: In case of an emergency which may require that work be done on

Saturdays, Sundays, holidays or longer than ten hours per day, the Contractor shall

request the permission of the Construction Manager to do so. If, in the opinion of

the Construction Manager, the emergency is bona fide, he will grant permission to

the Contractor to work such hours as may be necessary. Also, if in the opinion of

the Construction Manager, a bona fide emergency exists, he may direct the

Contractor to work such hours as may be necessary whether the Contractor

requests permission to do so or not.

1.4 SCHEDULING RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Critical Path Method type construction schedule will be used to monitor job

progress and as a means to make monthly payments to the Contractor except for

Stored Materials which will be made in accordance with Section 6 of the General

Conditions of the Contract. Be responsible for providing all information

concerning the sequencing, logic and durations of all activities as well as providing

the initial CPM logic network diagram and tabular report data. Once the initial

logic network diagram is accepted, be responsible for providing monthly update

information on logic changes, percent complete, actual start and finish dates, and

duration changes. The Contractor will not be required to produce the monthly

computerized printout of the schedule updates. The monthly updating and report

and plot generation will be performed by the Construction Manager using

information provided by the Contractor.

B. From the Contractor 's initial schedule submittal and from information received at

the monthly schedule update meetings, computerized and dated tabular schedule

reports, updated network diagrams, and bar charts will be produced which will be

reviewed by the Contractor for accuracy and integrity. It shall at all times remain

the Contractor's responsibility to schedule and direct his forces in a manner that

will allow for the completion of the work within the Contract Time.

C. It should be clearly understood that the initial schedule and all update information

must be provided by the Contractor, and that this information is a representation of



the best efforts of the Contractor and his subcontractors as to how they envision

the work to be accomplished. Similarly, all progress information to be provided by

and through the Contractor must be an accurate representation of his, or his

subcontractor's, or supplier's actual performance. The schedule shall at all times

remain an accurate reflection of the Contractor's actual or projected sequencing of

work. Once accepted, adherence to the established CPM schedule shall be

obligatory upon the Contractor, and his subcontractors for the work under this

Contract. The Construction Manager may require the Contractor to revise the

schedule if, in his judgment, the schedule does not accurately reflect the actual

execution of the work, or is in violation of any provision of the CPM scheduling

requirements; and the Contractor shall revise the schedule as often as is necessary

to bring the course of performance of the work without additional cost to the

Owner.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Provide all submittals, including the following, as specified in Division

1.

B. CPM Schedule:

1. Within fifteen (15) calendar days after Notice to Proceed, submit six (6)

prints of the proposed CPM network diagrams, tabular reports for the entire

Contract duration and include both procurement and construction activities.

Sort the tabular reports by total float and activity number. They shall also

contain a predecessor/successor resource loading report, and project

calendar. This logic diagram shall be drawn as described herein and will be

the subject of a schedule review meeting with the Contractor, the Owner,

and Owner's representatives within two (2) weeks of its submission.

2. Submit network diagrams and reports, Primavera schedules in digital format

on CD.

3. If a review of the submitted CPM Schedule indicates a work plan which will

not complete the work within the Contract Time stated in the Contract,

revise the CPM Schedule as required and resubmit it until it is acceptable.

Failure to submit an acceptable schedule may, at the Owner's sole discretion,

be cause for the withholding of any partial payment(s) otherwise due under

the Contract.

4. Acceptance of the schedule shall not constitute a representation by the

Owner or Construction Manager that the work can be completed as shown

on the schedule.

C. Submittals Schedule:



1. In addition to the above scheduling requirements, submit a complete and

detailed listing of anticipated submittals during the course of the Contract.

Coordinate submittals with those of subcontractors and suppliers, and

identify each submittal as specified. Indicated the anticipated submission

date for each submittal along with the date on which its return is anticipated.

Review time for submittal shall be as provided for in Section 01330 -

Submittals. Durations shown for review shall be to share available float for

that path. Submittals and the review time, of which are on the critical path,

shall be clearly marked in red with the words "Critical Path" by the

Contractor at the time of submission.

2. Submit the Submittal Schedule within fifteen (15) working days from the

Notice to Proceed. The Submittal Schedule will then be accepted or revised

as required, and the Contractor will incorporate the dates and review

durations into his CPM Schedule.

1.6 NETWORK REQUIREMENTS

A. The network diagram shall show the interdependence of activities, and the

sequence in which the work is to be accomplished as planned by the Contractor.

The basic concept of the network analysis diagram is to show how the start of a

given activity is dependent on the completion of preceding activities, and its

completion restricts the start of succeeding activities. A time scaled precedence

format will be followed. The detailed network diagram will be time scaled

showing a continuous flow from left to right.

B. The Schedule Activities shall be developed into three major groups:

1. Procurement Activities: Procurement Activities shall include at a minimum:

a. Permits

b. Easements

c. Program(s)

d. Submittal Items

e. Approval of Submittal Items

f. Fabrication and Delivery of Submittal Items

Permits, easements, and fabrication and delivery items shall be tied logically

to the correct construction activity in the overall CPM construction

schedule.

2. Construction Activities: Construction activities will be physical work

activities that describe how the job will be constructed.



3. Testing, Startup, Training and Close-out: CPM activities for this group shall

include all work required to satisfy to appropriate specification sections and

meet the requirements of substantial and final completion.

C. Break the work into activities, with durations of one to twenty (1 to 20) working

days each, except for non-construction activities (such as procurement of materials

and delivery of equipment), and other activities which may require longer

durations. To the extent feasible, activities related to a specific physical area of the

project shall be grouped on the network for ease of understanding and

simplification. The selection and number of activities shall be subject to the review

of the Construction Manager.

D. Each activity on the network shall have indicated for it the following:

1. A single duration, no longer than 20 days (i.e., the single best estimate of the

expected elapsed time considering the scope of work involved in the

activity) expressed in working days. City holidays and weather delays shall

be included. One critical path shall be shown for the schedule.

2. An activity I.D. number will be assigned to each activity. The I.D. number

will be numeric with a maximum of ten (10) digits.

3. A brief description of the activity will be included. If this description is not

definitive, a separate listing of each activity and a descriptive narrative may

be required.

4. Each activity (except for procurement activities) shall be cost loaded to

indicate the total estimated costs of the activity. No activity shall exceed

$60,000 except if an equipment item. Material costs shall be assigned to

delivery activities.

5. Each construction activity shall be man-hour loaded with the estimated man-

hours to be expended on each activity.

E. When preparing the CPM construction schedule, consider all construction

sequence and critical construction activities requirements.

F. Failure to include on a network any element of work required for the performance

of this Contract shall not excuse the Contractor from completing all work required

within the applicable Contract Time, notwithstanding Construction Manager's

network review.

G. A CPM schedule which shows a completion of any portion of the construction

work (not including testing and start-up) prior to the Contract Time dates may be

accepted but in no event shall be acceptable as a basis for a claim for delay against

the Owner by the Contractor.



H. The schedule calendar shall be a 5 day work week with holidays corresponding to

those observed by the City of Richmond's Department of Public Utilities.

1.7 COST LOADING

A. Schedule of Values:

1. Each activity for Work-in-Place on the construction schedule shall be

allocated a dollar value in accordance with paragraph 1.6.D.4 above. Each

activity's assigned cost shall consist of labor, equipment, and materials costs,

and a prorated contribution to overhead and profit. The sum of the activities

costs shall be equal to the total contract price. Activities not directly related

to Work-in-Place including Stored Materials, preparation and submittal of

Shop or Working Drawings, or other required submittal or equipment and

material procurement shall not be cost loaded. In submitting cost data the

Contractor certifies that they are not unbalanced, and that the value assigned

to each activity represents the Contractor's estimate of the actual costs of

performing that activity. The listing of cost loaded CPM activities will

become the Schedule of Values, and will serve as the basis for payments to

the Contractor.

2. The accepted schedule of values shall represent a fair, reasonable and

equitable dollar cost allocation for each activity on the Contractor's

construction schedule.

B. Documentation: If it is determined that the cost data do not meet the requirements

for a balanced bid breakdown, provide documentation substantiating any cost

allocation on the cost data. Cost allocations shall be considered unbalanced if an

activity on the construction schedule has been assigned a disproportionate

allocation of direct costs, overhead and profit.

1.8 PROGRESS OF THE WORK

A. The work shall be started on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed, and shall

be executed with such progress as may be required to prevent delay to other

contractors or to the general completion of the project. The work shall be executed

at such times and in or on such parts of the project, with such forces, material and

equipment, as to assure completion of the work in the time established by the

Contract. Additionally, schedule and direct the work so that it provides an orderly

progression of the work to completion within the specified Contract Time.

B. Whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly CPM Schedule update

that delays to the critical path have resulted; and these delays are through no fault

of the Owner, or Owner's representatives, and hence, that the Contract completion



date will not be met, or when so directed by the Construction Manager, take some

or all of the following actions at no additional cost to the Owner.

1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will

substantially eliminate the backlog of work.

2. Increase the number of working hours per shift; shifts per working day, or

days, per week; the amount of construction equipment; the forms for

concrete work; etc., or any combination of the foregoing to substantially

eliminate the backlog of work.

3. Schedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrence of

accomplishment of activities, and comply with the revised schedule.

C. Submit for review a written statement of the steps to be taken to remove, or arrest

the delay to the schedule. If the Contractor fails to submit a written statement of

the steps he intends to take or fails to take such steps as required by the Contract;

the Owner may direct the level of effort in manpower and trades, equipment, work

schedule and overtime to remove or arrest the delay to the critical path in the

accepted schedule, and the Contractor shall promptly provide such level of effort at

no additional cost to the Owner. In addition, should schedule delays persist, the

Contractor's bond agent will be asked to attend meetings to update the schedule.

D. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of this provision shall

subject him to, at the Owner's sole discretion, withholding, in partial or in total,

payments otherwise due the Contractor for work performed under this Contract.

The Contractor agrees that any withholding of moneys is not a penalty for

noncompliance, but is an assurance for the Owner that funds will be available to

implement these requirements should the Contractor fail to do so, since failure of

the Contractor to comply with these requirements shall mean that the Contractor

failed to execute the work with such diligence as to ensure its completion within

the time for completion.

1.9 SCHEDULE UPDATES

A. Monthly Meetings: A monthly Schedule Update Meeting will be held on the 25th

day of each month, or nearest day thereto, at the construction site to review and

update the CPM Schedule. The Schedule Update Meeting will be chaired by the

Construction Manager and attended by the Owner and the Contractor. Actual

progress of the previous month will be recorded and future activities will be

reviewed. The duration of activities and their logical connections may be revised

as needed. Decisions made at these meetings and agreed to by all parties are

binding with the exception that no contract completion dates will be modified

without formal written requests and acceptance as specified herein. In either case,

provide the following information for each update at a minimum:



1. Actual start and finished dates for all completed activities.

2. Actual start dates for all started but incomplete activities including

remaining durations and/or percent completes.

B. Withholding of Payments: Failure to provide specified updated information or

failure to attend progress meetings may result in the withholding of progress

payments.

1.10 CAUSES FOR EXTENSIONS OF TIME

A. The Contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified in this

Contract. In the event the Contractor requests an extension of any contract

completion date, he shall furnish justification and supporting evidence per the

General Conditions, and provide a detailed CPM Schedule delay analysis based on

the most current updated CPM Schedule. The Construction Manager will after

receipt of such justification and supporting evidence, make findings of fact and

will advise the Contractor in writing thereof. If the Construction Manager finds

that the Contractor is entitled to an extension of the Contract completion date

under the provisions of the Contract, the Construction Manager's determination as

to the total number of days extension shall be based upon the current accepted and

updated CPM schedule and on all data relevant to the extension. Such data shall be

included in the next monthly updating of the schedule. The Contractor

acknowledges and agrees that actual delays in activities, which according to the

CPM schedule, do not affect any contract completion date shown by the critical

path in the network, do not have any effect on the Contract completion date or

dates, and therefore will not be the basis for a change in Contract completion time.

1.11 ABNORMAL WEATHER

A. The Contract Period will be adjusted to account for unusually severe weather

conditions which prevent or inhibit the Contractor's performance of the Work and

lengthen the critical path indicated on the Schedule (such unusually severe weather

conditions referred to herein as "Inclement Weather"). It is the intent of this

provision to offset the impact of Inclement Weather with unusually favorable

weather conditions which immediately precede and/or follow the occurrence of

Inclement Weather.

B. The Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager in writing of the occurrence

of Inclement Weather within two days after the onset of such Inclement Weather

and shall describe in reasonable detail the type of Inclement Weather encountered

by the Contractor and the Work thereby interfered with or interrupted.

C. This provision specifies the procedure for the determination of time extensions for

unusually severe weather. In order for the Construction Manager to award a time

extension under this clause, the following conditions must be satisfied:



1. The weather experienced at the project site during the contract period must

be found to be unusually severe, that is, more severe than the adverse

weather anticipated for the project location during any given month.

2. The unusually severe weather must actually cause a delay to the completion

of the project. The delay must be beyond the control and without the fault or

negligence of the Contractor.

D. Schedule: The following Schedule of Monthly Anticipated Adverse Weather

Delays is based on National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) or

similar data for the project location and will constitute the base line for monthly

weather time evaluations. The Contractor's progress schedule must reflect these

anticipated adverse weather delays in all-weather dependent activities.

SCHEDULE OF MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER DELAYS

WORK DAYS BASED ON (5) DAY WORK WEEK

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

City of

Richmond 10 9 9 6 8 7 8 7 6 5 7 9

E. Records: Upon acknowledgement of the Notice to Proceed and continuing

throughout the contract, the Contractor will record daily, and submit to the

Construction Manager, the occurrence of adverse weather and resultant impact to

normally scheduled work. Actual adverse weather delay days must prevent work

on critical activities for 50 percent or more of the Contractor's scheduled work day.

F. Impacted Days: The number of actual adverse weather days shall include days

impacted by actual adverse weather (even if adverse weather occurred in previous

month), be calculated chronologically from the first to the last day in each month,

and be recorded as full days. If the number of actual adverse weather delay days

exceeds the number of days anticipated in the Schedule of Monthly Anticipated

Adverse Weather Delays, above, the Construction Manager will convert any

qualifying delays to calendar days, giving full consideration for equivalent fair

weather work days, and issue a modification in accordance with Section 01250 -

Change Order Procedure.



1.12 APPROVAL REQUESTS

A. From time to time, as the work progresses and in the sequence indicated by the

accepted progress schedule, the Contractor must submit to the Construction

Manager a specific request, in writing, for each item of information or approval

required of him by the Contract. These requests must be submitted sufficiently in

advance of the date upon which the information or approval is actually required by

the Contractor to allow for the time the Construction Manager may take to act

upon such submissions or resubmissions.

B. The Contractor shall not have any right to an extension of time on account of

delays due to his failure to submit his requests for the required information or the

required approval in accordance with these requirements.

1.13 ADJUSTMENT BY OWNER

A. From time to time it may be necessary for the Contract schedule and/or Contract

Times to be adjusted by the Owner due to the effects of job conditions, acts or

omissions of other contractors not directly associated with this contract, weather,

technical difficulties, strikes, unavoidable delays on the part of the Owner or his

representatives, and other enforceable conditions which may indicate schedule

adjustments and/or completion time extension. Under such conditions, the

Construction Manager shall direct the Contractor to reschedule the work to reflect

the changed conditions, and the Contractor shall revise his schedule accordingly.

Schedule extensions affecting the Contract Times shall be granted only by the

Owner in writing. It is specifically pointed out that the use of available total float

in the CPM schedule may be used by the Owner and his representatives, as well as,

by the Contractor.

B. Without obligation to extend the Contract Times or any intermediate completion

dates set out in the CPM network, the Owner may initiate changes to the Contract

work that absorb float time only. Owner-initiated changes that affect the critical

path on the CPM network shall be the sole grounds for extending or shortening the

Contract Times. Contractor initiated changes that encroach on the float time,

identified in the CPM network, may be accomplished with the Owner's

concurrence. Such changes, however, shall give way to Owner-initiated changes

competing for the same float time.

1.14 FAILURE TO ADHERE TO SCHEDULE

A. If the Contractor fails to adhere to the schedule, the City may withhold partial

payments until such time as the Work is at least within 90% of the projected

schedule in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION



SECTION 01330

SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Description of Requirements

B. Submittal Procedures

C. Specific Submittal Requirements

D. Action on Submittals

E. Approval by the Contractor

F. Review of Shop Drawings by the Construction Manager and Engineer

G. Resubmittals

H. Forms

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS

A. This section specifies procedural requirements for Shop Drawings, product data,

samples, and other miscellaneous Work-related submittals.

B. Electronic Submittals: Submittals and other documents shall be made in

electronic, PDF, format to the Construction Manager.

1. Additional hard paper copies of pages larger than 11x17 inches shall be

submitted and include eight (8) copies which shall be in addition to the one

(1) electronic copy.

2. Detailed procedures for handling electronic submittals will be discussed at

the preconstruction conference.

3. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor from the Construction Manager

in electronic format.

C. Procedures concerning items such as listing of manufacturers, suppliers,

subcontractors, construction progress schedule, schedule of Shop Drawing



submissions, bonds, payment applications, insurance certificates, and schedule of

values are specified elsewhere.

D. Work-Related Submittals:

1. Shop Drawings: Includes technical data and drawings specially prepared for

this Project, including fabrication and installation drawings, software

programming, diagrams, actual performance curves, data sheets, schedules,

templates, patterns, reports, storage instructions, design mix formulas,

measurements, and similar information not in standard printed form.

a. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the

Project is not considered a Shop Drawing.

2. Product Data: Includes standard printed information on manufactured

products, and systems that has not been specially prepared for this Project,

including manufacturer's product specifications, equipment storage,

handling and installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard wiring

diagrams, printed performance curves, mill reports, standard color charts,

and recommended spare parts.

3. Samples: Includes both fabricated and manufactured physical examples of

materials, products, and units of work, partial cuts of manufactured or

fabricated work, swatches showing color, texture, and pattern, and units of

work to be used for independent inspection and testing.

4. Miscellaneous Submittals: Work-related submittals that do not fit in the

previous categories, such as guarantees, warranties, certifications,

experience records, maintenance agreements, Operating and Maintenance

Manuals, workmanship bonds, survey data and reports, physical work

records, quality testing and certifying reports, copies of industry standards,

record drawings, field measurement data, and similar information, devices,

and materials applicable to the Work.

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Scheduling:

1. Submit for approval, a preliminary schedule of shop drawings and samples

submittals, in duplicate, within 15 days after the date stated as the date to

proceed at the Preconstruction Conference.

2. Prepare and transmit each submittal to Construction Manager sufficiently in

advance of scheduled performance of related work and other applicable

activities. Allow a minimum of 25 days for Construction Manager and



Engineer's review of normal submittals and all of a minimum of 30 days for

Engineer's review of software programming submittals.

B. Coordination:

1. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

work. Coordinate each submittal with other submittals and related activities

such as testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and similar activities that

require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate submission of different units of interrelated work so that one

submittal will not be delayed by Construction Manager and Engineer's need

to review a related submittal. Construction Manager and Engineer may

withhold action on any submittal requiring coordination with other

submittals until related submittals are forthcoming.

C. Submittal Preparation:

1. Stamp and sign each submittal certifying to review of submittal, verification

of products, coordination of information within submittal with requirements

of the Work and the Contract Documents, and verification that product will

fit in space provided.

2. Stock or standard drawings will not be accepted for review unless full

identification and supplementary information is shown thereon in ink or

typewritten form.

3. A submittal shall not encompass more than one paragraph of the

Specifications.

4. Submit one (1) electronic copy and eight (8) hard copies of all pages larger

than 11x17 inches for all submittals and resubmittals accompanied by a

letter of transmittal. The form of the letter of transmittal which shall be used

is as shown at the end of this section. The letter of transmittal shall contain

the following information.

a. Identification of the Contractor, subcontractor or supplier.

b. Project title, project number and division, and contract number.

c. Submittal number comprised of specification chapter number,

paragraph number and suffix.

d. Drawing sheet, and detail number as appropriate.



e. Contractor's stamp or certification the products have been reviewed

and are in accordance with the requirements of the Work and the

Contract Documents.

f. Listing of variations from Contract Documents and any limitations

which may be detrimental to the Work.

5. Submittal Numbering:

a. All shop drawings and submittals shall be numbered as follows:

(A) - (B) __

(Specification Section No.) (Consecutive No. / Submittal Rev.)

where:

(A) = Specification Section Number

(B) = Consecutive submittal number for the specification

section number listed in (A) with an alphabetic suffix

identifying the revision number.

Example: 01300-001A - indicates the initial submission

of submittal number 001 for

Specification Section 01300.

01300-001B - indicates the first revision of

submittal number 001 for

Specification Section 01300.

01300-002A - indicated the initial submission

of submittal number 002 for

Specification section 01300.

b. When an item is resubmitted for any reason, transmit under a new

letter of transmittal and with the same submittal number indicated

revised by an alphabetic suffix. List the previous transmittal number

and date.

D. Resubmittal Preparation:

1. Comply with the requirements described in Submittal Preparation. In

addition:

a. Make any corrections or changes in submittals required by

Construction Manager and Engineer's notations on returned submittal.



b. Respond to Engineer's notations:

(1) On the transmittal or on a separate page attached to

Contractor's resubmission transmittal, answer or acknowledge

in writing all notations or questions indicated by Construction

Manager and Engineer on Construction Manager and

Engineer's transmittal form returning review submission to

Contractor.

(2) Identify each response by question or notation number

established by Construction Manager and Engineer.

(3) If Contractor does not respond to each notation or question,

resubmission will be returned without action by Construction

Manager and Engineer until Construction Manager and

Contractor provides a written response to all Engineer's

notations or questions.

1.4 SPECIFIC SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Specific submittals required for individual elements of work are specified in the

individual Specification sections. Except as otherwise indicated in Specification

sections, comply with requirements specified herein for each indicated type of

submittal.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit newly prepared information, with graphic information at accurate

scale. Indicate name of manufacturer or supplier (firm name). Show

dimensions and clearly note which are based on field measurement; identify

materials and products which are included in the Work; identify revisions.

Indicate compliance with standards and notation of coordination

requirements with other work. Highlight, encircle or otherwise indicate

variations from Contract Documents or previous submittals.

2. Include on each drawing or page:

a. Submittal date and revision dates.

b. Project name, division number and descriptions.

c. Detailed specifications section number and page number.

d. Identification of equipment, product or material.

e. Name of Contractor and Subcontractor.



f. Name of Supplier and Manufacturer.

g. Standards or Industry Specification references.

h. Identification of deviations from the Contract Documents.

i. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, dated and certifying to review

of submittal, certification of field measurements and compliance with

Contract.

j. Physical location and location relative to other connected or attached

material at which the equipment or materials are to be installed.

3. Distribution:

a. Do not proceed with fabrication of equipment until copy of applicable

product data showing only approved information is in possession of

installer.

C. Miscellaneous Submittals:

1. Inspection and Test Reports:

a. Classify each inspection and test report as being either "Shop

Drawings" or "product data", depending on whether report is specially

prepared for Project or standard publication of workmanship control

testing at point of production. Process inspection and test reports

accordingly.

2. Guarantees, Warranties, Maintenance Agreements, and Workmanship

Bonds:

a. Refer to Specification sections for specific requirements. Submittal is

final when returned by Construction Manager marked "Approved" or

"Approved as Noted".

b. Provide copies where required for maintenance data.

3. Certifications:

a. Refer to Specification sections for specific requirement on submittal

of certifications. Certifications are submitted for review of

conformance with specified requirements and information. Submittal

is final when returned by Construction Manager marked "Approved".



Include copies of all certifications in the Operation and Maintenance

Manual.

4. Closeout Submittals:

a. Refer to Specification sections and section titled "Contract Close Out"

for specific requirements on submittal of closeout information.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

1. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with section

titled "Operation and Maintenance Manuals".

E. General Distribution:

1. Unless required elsewhere, provide distribution of submittals to

subcontractors, suppliers, governing authorities, and others as necessary for

proper performance of work.

1.5 ACTION ON SUBMITTALS

A. Engineer's Action:

1. General: Except for submittals for record and similar purposes, where

action and return on submittals are required or requested, Engineer will

review each submittal, mark with appropriate action, and return. Where

submittal must be held for coordination, Engineer will also advise

Contractor without delay. Engineer will review each submittal with uniform,

self-explanatory action, appropriately marked on the submittal transmittal

form.

2. Action:

a. Approved: Where submittals are marked "Approved", Work covered

by submittal may proceed provided it complies with contract

documents. Acceptance of Work will depend upon that compliance.

b. Approved Subject to Corrections Noted: When submittals are marked

"Approved Subject to Corrections Noted", Work covered by submittal

may proceed provided it complies with both Engineer's notations or

corrections on submittal and with Contract Documents. Acceptance of

Work will depend on that compliance.

c. Revise and Resubmit: When submittals are marked "Revise and

Resubmit", do not proceed with Work covered by submittal. Do not

permit Work covered by submittal to be used at Project site or



elsewhere where Work is in progress. Revise submittal or prepare

new submittal in accordance with Engineer's notations in accordance

with this section. Resubmit submittal without delay. Repeat if

necessary to obtain different action marking. Any additional time

necessary to make corrections to the submittals, or loss of materials,

equipment and time of manufacturing, or labor costs, or any other

costs of any nature as a direct consequence of the non-conformity of

the Contractor's document or non-compliance with the specifications,

shall not be cause for extension of contract time or increase to the

Contract cost.

d. Not Reviewed: Submittals marked “Not Reviewed” are not needed

and is being returned without being reviewed.

e. For Information Only: Submittals marked "For Information Only" do

not require further action unless noted otherwise on submittal. Such

submittals include guarantees, warranties, maintenance agreements,

workmanship bonds, and calculations by a licensed professional

engineer.

1.6 APPROVAL BY THE CONTRACTOR

A. The Contractor shall check and approve all shop drawings before transmitting

them to the Construction Manager to determine that they comply with the

requirements of the Contract Documents. Drawings which are not complete or not

in compliance with the Contract Documents shall not be submitted. All shop

drawing submittals, regardless of origin, shall be stamped with the approval of the

Contractor and identified with the Contractor's name and references to applicable

specification paragraphs and Contract Drawings. Each shop drawing submittal

shall indicate the intended use of the item in the Work. When catalog pages are

submitted, applicable items shall be clearly identified. The current revision, issue

number, and date shall be indicated on all shop drawings and other descriptive

data. The Contractor's stamp of approval shall constitute a representation to the

Owner, the Construction Manager, and the Engineer that the Contractor accepts

full responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, field

construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data; that he has

reviewed or coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the Work and the

Contract Documents; and that the submittal fully meets the requirements of the

Contract Documents.

1.7 REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS BY THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER

AND ENGINEER

A. Deviations from Contract Requirements: If the shop drawings show deviations

from the Contract requirements, the Contractor shall make specific mention thereof

as previously specified in this Section. Review of such submittals shall not



constitute approval of the deviation unless the deviations are identified. Review of

the shop drawings shall constitute review of the subject matter thereof only and not

of any structure, material, equipment, or apparatus shown or indicated. Such

submittals shall, as pertinent to the deviation, indicate essential details of all

changes proposed by the Contractor (including modifications to other facilities that

may be a result of the deviation) and all required piping and wiring diagrams, all in

accordance with the General Requirements.

B. Completeness of Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall accept full responsibility

for the completeness of each submittal, and, in the case of a resubmittal, shall

verify that all exceptions previously noted by the Engineer have been taken into

account. Costs associated with the review by the Engineer of any third and

subsequent submittals shall be borne by the Contractor which may be deducted

from any progress payments due the Contractor by the Owner.

C. Accuracy of Drawings: The review of shop drawings will be general and shall not

relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the accuracy of such drawings, or for

the furnishing of materials or Work required by the Contract and not indicated on

the shop drawings. Approval is intended on for compliance with the information

given in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is also responsible for

information that pertains solely to the fabrication processes.

1.8 RESUBMITTALS

A. Resubmittals Within 20 Days: Resubmittals shall be made within 20 days of the

date of the Construction Manager transmittal returning the material to be modified

or corrected, unless within 7 days the Contractor submits an acceptable request for

an extension of the stipulated time period, listing the reasons the resubmittal

cannot be completed within that time.

B. Additional Resubmittals: Any need for more than one resubmittal or any other

delay in obtaining the Engineer's review of submittals will not entitle the

Contractor to an extension of time unless a delay of the Work is directly caused by

an authorized change in the Work or by the Engineer's failure to return any

submittal.

1.9 FORMS

A. An example of the Contractor Submittal Form is furnished at the end of this

section and will be provided to the Contractor in electronic format.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used



CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM

TO: SITE:

PROJECT NAME:

SPEC. REF. NO.

ATTN: PLAN REF. NO.

SYSTEM:

FROM: SUBCONTRACTOR:

SUPPLIER:

DATE:

1. The following submittals are forwarded for your review:

No. of

Repros/Copies Manufacturer Description Dwg. No. Date

/

/

/

/

/

2. Will item submitted for review fit in space

provided in the Contract Documents? ______ Yes ______ No

3. Has work indicated in this submittal been

coordinated with all trades: ______ Yes ______ No

4. Is work by all trades being provided as

necessary to accommodate this submittal? ______ Yes ______ No

5. Contractor has approved submittal and has

affixed his certification stamp? ______ Yes ______ No

6. Contractor's description and justification for deviations from Contract Documents. (Use additional

sheet, if necessary)

7. Remarks:

Signature:



END OF SECTION



SECTION 01335

LIMITATIONS ON SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Operation of Existing Facilities

B. Limitations of Sequence of Construction

C. Work Completion Phases

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01325 - Progress Schedule

1.3 OPERATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

A. The work shall be so conducted that the existing facilities will be maintained in full

operation at all times except for operation interruptions provided for under this

section.

B. The Contractor shall keep the Construction Manager fully advised as to his plans for

carrying out the work and obtain the Construction Manager's approval for all phases

of his operations as hereinafter specified.

C. It is mutually agreed that the existing facilities shall not be shut down.

D. Any temporary structures, connections, piping, and other work necessary to maintain

service during the construction period shall be made as a part of the work.

E. All work shall be performed to avoid damage to existing structures and equipment.

Before starting work on any modifications to existing facilities, the Contractor shall

submit a schedule to the Construction Manager for approval, comprising a detailed

sequence of operations for these modifications which demonstrates that operation of

these existing facilities will be maintained. All construction shall be in accordance

with the approved schedule. At no time shall the service performed by any operating

system, pipeline, equipment or structures be interrupted from providing its intended

operation, function and service without specific prior approval of the Construction

Manager.



F. Temporary facilities and equipment shall be provided as required and directed to

maintain pipelines, equipment, systems, processes, auxiliaries, appurtenances and

structures in service. Any temporary work not required after completion of the work

shall be promptly removed.

G. All costs associated with maintaining the existing facilities in operation shall be

included in the lump sum Contract Item for Structures and Equipment and no separate

payment will be made therefore.

1.4 LIMITATIONS ON SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION

A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 01325, Progress Schedule, the

Contractor shall prepare and submit a comprehensive schedule of his proposed

sequence of construction for review by the Construction Manager.

B. The schedule shall be arranged to complete the work in phases and permit operation

by the Owner of completed phases or parts thereof.

C. The Contractor is cautioned that his schedule for certain areas of the work may be

affected by work included under the other Contracts. Refer to Section 01310 -

Coordination and Meetings.

D. Work on this Contract shall be coordinated with the operation of the facilities. The

Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager of the Contractor's planned

procedures for each specific alteration of existing facilities before the alteration

begins. The Contractor shall not begin any alteration until specific permission has

been granted by the Construction Manager with sufficient advance notice as not to

impact the Contractor's schedule. The making of connections to existing facilities or

other operations that interfere with the operation of the existing equipment shall be

completed as quickly as possible and with as little delay as possible.

E. Authorized Owner personnel will perform all changes to the operational functions of

the existing facilities identified as necessary to facilitate the Work of the Contractor.

F. If it is necessary for proper operation or maintenance of the facilities, the Contractor

shall reschedule his operations so that his work will not conflict with necessary

operation or maintenance of the station. Such rescheduling shall not be cause for a

time extension except as provided for in the General Conditions.

G. The Contractor shall maintain safe passage through all access roads to the existing

facilities and to all parts of the existing station.

H. The Construction Manager shall be the sole judge of when the Contractor's operations

are causing interference with the existing facilities operations, and his orders and

instructions shall be carried out without delay.



I. The Contractor is required to perform certain functions in an order which will allow

the existing facilities to remain in operation and to allow other facilities to be

completed on schedule. The Contractor shall perform items of work under the

Contract in a sequence of his choosing to meet his “Progress Schedule” specified in

Section 01325, but in keeping with the construction sequence requirements indicated

on the Drawings. The limitations on the sequence of construction shall be

incorporated into the Contractor’s sequence of construction and shall apply at all

times, except as may be modified in writing by the Construction Manager.

PART 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION



SECTION 01422

REFERENCES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Reference Abbreviations

B. Abbreviations

C. Reference Standards

D. Definitions


A. Information provided in this section is used where applicable in individual

Specification Sections, Divisions 1 through 16.

1.3 REFERENCE ABBREVIATIONS

A. Reference to a technical society, trade association or standards setting

organization, may be made in the Specifications by abbreviations in accordance

with the following list:

AABC Associated Air Balance Council

AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists

ACI American Concrete Institute

ADC Air Diffusion Council

AFBMA Anti-friction Bearing Manufacturers Association

AGA American Gas Association

AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association

AHA Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association, Inc.

ANSI American National Standards Institute

APA American Plywood Association

ARI American Refrigeration Institute



ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning

Engineers

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute

AWPA American Wood Preservers Association

AWS American Welding Society

AWWA American Water Works Association

BHMA Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association

BIA Brick Institute of American

CABO Council of American Building Officials

CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute

CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America

CRD U.S. Corps of Engineers Specifications

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute

CTI Cooling Tower Institute

DHI Door and Hardware Institute

DOH Department of Health

DOT Department of Transportation

Fed. Spec. Federal Specifications

FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association

FM Factory Mutual

HMI Hoist Manufacturing Institute

HPMA See HPVA

HPVA Hardwood Plywood Veneer Association

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IFI Industrial Fasteners Institute

MIL Military Specifications

MSS Manufacturer's Standardization Society

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

NACM National Association of Chain Manufacturers

NBS National Bureau of Standards, See NIST

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau

NEC National Electrical Code

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

NETA National Electrical Testing Association

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

NFPA National Forest Products Association

NFPA National Fluid Power Association

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology

NLMA National Lumber Manufacturers Association



NSF National Sanitation Foundation

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act

PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute

PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute

SAE Society of Automotive Engineers

SCPRF Structural Clay Products Research Foundation

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association

SPI Society of the Plastics Industry

SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council

STI Steel Tank Institute

TCA Tile Council of American

TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers' Association

UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

USBR U. S. Bureau of Reclamation

USBS U. S. Bureau of Standards, See NIST

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS

A. Abbreviations which may be used in individual Specification Sections Divisions 1

through 16 are as follows:



alternating current .................................... ac

American wire gauge .......................... AWG

ampere(s) ............................................... amp

ampere-hour(s) ....................................... AH

annual ...................................................... ann

Ampere Interrupting

Capacity ............................................... AIC

atmosphere(s) .......................................... atm

average .................................................... avg

biochemical oxygen demand ................ BOD

Board Foot ........................................... FBM

brake horsepower .................................... bhp

Brinell Hardness .................................... BH

British thermal unit(s) ............................. Btu

calorie (s) ................................................. cal

carbonaceous biochemical

oxygen demand ............................... CBOD

Celsius (centigrade) .................................. C

Center to Center ................................. C to C

centimeter(s) ........................................... cm

chemical oxygen demand ..................... COD

coefficient, valve flow ............................. Cv

condensate return ..................................... CR

cubic ......................................................... cu

cubic centimeter(s) .................................... cc

cubic feet per day ..................................... cfd

cubic feet per hour ................................... cfh

cubic feet per minute .............................. cfm

cubic feet per minute,

standard conditions ............................ scfm

cubic feet per second ............................... cfs

cubic foot (feet) ...................................... cu ft

cubic inch(es) ........................................ cu in

cubic yard(s) ........................................ cu yd

decibels .................................................... dB

decibels (A scale) .................................... dBa

degree(s) ................................................. deg

dewpoint temperature .............................. dpt

diameter ................................................... dia

direct current ............................................. dc

dissolved oxygen .................................... DO

dissolved solids ........................................ DS

dry-bulb temperature ............................... dbt

efficiency .................................................. eff

elevation ................................................... el

entering water temperature ......................ewt

entering air temperature ............................ eat

equivalent direct radiation ....................... edr

face area ..................................................... fa

face to face .............................................f to f

Fahrenheit .................................................. F

feet per day .............................................. fpd

feet per hour ............................................. fph

feet per minute ........................................ fpm

feet per second ......................................... fps

foot (feet) .................................................... ft

foot-candle ................................................. fc

foot-pound ............................................. ft-lb

foot-pounds per minute................... ft-lb/min

foot-pounds per second.................... ft-lb/sec

formazin turbidity unit(s) ...................... FTU

frequency ................................................ freq

fuel oil ...................................................... FO

fuel oil supply ........................................ FOS

fuel oil return .........................................FOR

gallon(s) ................................................... gal

gallons per day ........................................ gpd

gallons per day per

cubic foot ...................................... gpd/cu ft

gallons per day per

square foot .................................... gpd/sq ft

gallons per hour ..................................... gph

gallons per minute ................................. gpm

gallons per second ................................... gps

gas chromatography and

mass spectrometry .......................... GC-MS

gauge .........................................................ga

grain(s) ....................................................... gr

gram(s) ........................................................ g

grams per cubic centimeter ..................gm/cc

Heat Transfer Coefficient .......................... U

height ....................................................... hgt



Hertz ....................................................... Hz

horsepower ............................................... hp

horsepower-hour .................................. hp-hr

hour(s) ....................................................... hr

humidity, relative ...................................... rh

hydrogen ion concentration ..................... pH

inch(es) ...................................................... in

inches per second ..................................... ips

inside diameter .......................................... ID

Jackson turbidity unit(s) ........................ JTU

kelvin ........................................................ K

kiloamperes .............................................. kA

kilogram(s) ................................................ kg

kilometer(s) .............................................. km

kilovar (kilovolt-amperes

reactive) ............................................... kvar

kilovolt(s) ................................................. kV

kilovolt-ampere(s) ................................. kVA

kilowatt(s) ............................................... kW

kilowatt-hour(s) .................................... kWh

linear foot (feet) .................................... lin ft

liter(s) .......................................................... L

megavolt-ampere(s) ............................. MVA

meter(s) ...................................................... m

micrograms per liter ............................ ug/L

miles per hour ........................................ mph

milliampere(s) ........................................ mA

milligram(s) ............................................ mg

milligrams per liter ............................. mg/L

milliliter(s) ............................................. mL

millimeter(s) .......................................... mm

million gallons ....................................... MG

million gallons per day ......................... mgd

millisecond(s) ......................................... ms

millivolt(s) ............................................. mV

minute(s) ................................................ min

mixed liquor suspended

solids ................................................. MLSS

nephelometric turbidity

unit ...................................................... NTU

net positive suction head .................... NPSH

noise criteria ..............................................nc

noise reduction coefficient ................... NRC

number ...................................................... no

ounce(s) .....................................................oz

outside air ..................................................oa

outside diameter.......................................OD

parts per billion ...................................... ppb

parts per million .................................... ppm

percent .................................................... pct

phase (electrical) .................................. . . ph

pound(s) .................................................... lb

pounds per cubic foot ............................. pcf

pounds per cubic foot

per hour .............................................. pcf/hr

pounds per day ................................... lbs/day

pounds per day per

cubic foot ................................ lbs/day/cu ft

pounds per day per

square foot ............................... lbs/day/sq ft

pounds per square foot............................ psf

pounds per square foot

per hour .............................................. psf/hr

pounds per square inch ............................ psi

pounds per square inch

absolute ................................................. psia

pounds per square inch

gauge .................................................... psig

power factor .............................................. PF

pressure drop or

difference ................................................ dp

pressure, dynamic

(velocity)................................................. vp

pressure, vapor .................................... vap pr

quart(s) ....................................................... qt

Rankine ...................................................... R

relative humidity ........................................ rh

resistance ................................................. res

return air .................................................... ra

revolution(s) ........................................... rev



revolutions per minute ............................ rpm

revolutions per second ............................ rps

root mean squared .................................. rms

safety factor .............................................. sf

second(s) ................................................. sec

shading coefficient .................................. SC

sludge density index .............................. SDI

Sound Transmission

Coefficient .......................................... STC

specific gravity ..................................... sp gr

specific volume ................................. Sp Vol

sp ht at constant pressure ........................ Cp

square ....................................................... sq

square centimeter(s) ............................. sq cm

square foot (feet) .................................... sq ft

square inch (es) ..................................... sq in

square meter(s) ..................................... sq m

square yard(s)....................................... sq yd

standard ................................................... std

static pressure......................................... st pr

supply air .............................................. . . sa

suspended solids ...................................... SS

temperature .......................................... temp

temperature difference ............................ TD

temperature entering ............................... TE

temperature leaving ................................ TL

thousand Btu per hour .......................... Mbh

thousand circular mils ......................... kcmil

thousand cubic feet ............................... Mcf

threshold limit value ............................ TLV

tons of refrigeration ............................... tons

torque ................................................... TRQ

total dissolved solids ............................ TDS

total dynamic head ............................... TDH

total kjeldahl nitrogen .......................... TKN

total oxygen demand ............................ TOD

total pressure ........................................... TP

total solids ............................................... TS

total suspended solids ........................... TSS

total volatile solids ............................... TVS

vacuum ................................................... vac

viscosity ................................................. visc

volatile organic chemical ..................... VOC

volatile solids ........................................... VS

volatile suspended solids ...................... VSS

volt(s) ........................................................ V

volts-ampere(s) ....................................... VA

volume .................................................... vol

watt(s) ....................................................... W

watthour(s) .............................................. Wh

watt-hour demand ................................ WHD

watt-hour demand meter .................. WHDM

week(s) ................................................... wk

weight ...................................................... wt

wet-bulb ................................................. WB

wet bulb temperature .......................... WBT

yard(s) ....................................................... yd

year(s) ........................................................ yr



B. Use ASME Y1.1-1989, “Abbreviations for use on Drawings and in Text” for

abbreviations for units of measure not included herein in Paragraph 1.4.

1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Latest Edition: Construe references to furnishing materials or testing, which

conform to the standards of a particular technical society, organization, or body, to

mean the latest standard, code, or specification of that body, adopted and published

as of the date of bidding this Contract. Standards referred to herein are made a part

of these Specifications to the extent which is indicated or intended.

B. Precedence: The duties and responsibilities of the Owner, Contractor or

Construction Manager, or any of their consultants, agents or employees are set

forth in the Contract Documents, and are not changed or altered by any provision

of any referenced standard specifications, manuals or code, whether such standard

manual or code is or is not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract

Documents. Any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or

performance of the Work or any duty or authority, to undertake responsibility

contrary to the powers of the Construction Manager as set forth in the Contract

Documents cannot be assigned to the Construction Manager or any of the

Construction Manager's consultants, agents or employees.

1.6 DEFINITIONS

A. In these Contract Documents the words furnish, install and provide are defined as

follows:

1. Furnish (materials): to supply and deliver to the project ready for

installation and in operable condition.

2. Install (services or labor): to place in final position, complete, anchored,

connected in operable condition.

3. Provide: to furnish and install complete. Includes the supply of specified

services. When neither furnish, install or provide is stated, provide is

implied.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used



PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION



SECTION 01450

QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Submittals

B. Inspection Services

C. Inspection of Materials

D. Quality Control

E. Costs of Inspection

F. Acceptance Tests

G. Failure to Comply with Contract


A. Section 01330 - Submittals: Specific Submittal Requirements

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Provide all submittals, including the following, as specified in Section

01330 - Submittals.

B. Certificate Submittals: Furnish the Engineer authoritative evidence in the form of

Certificates of Manufacture that the materials and equipment to be used in the

Work have been manufactured and tested in conformity with the Contract

Documents. Include copies of the results of physical tests and chemical analyses,

where necessary, that have been made directly on the product or on similar

products of the manufacturer.

1.4 INSPECTION SERVICES

A. Owner's Access: At all times during the progress of the Work and until the date of

final completion, afford the Owner, Construction Manager, and Engineer every

reasonable, safe, and proper facility for inspecting the Work at the site. The



observation and inspection of any work will not relieve the Contractor of any

obligations to perform proper and satisfactory work as specified. Replace work

rejected due to faulty design, inferior, or defective materials, poor workmanship,

improper installation, excessive wear, or nonconformity with the requirements of

the Contract Documents, with satisfactory work at no additional cost to the Owner.

Replace as directed, finished or unfinished work found not to be in strict

accordance with the Contract, even though such work may have been previously

approved and payment made therefor.

B. Rejection: The Owner and the Owner's Authorized Representatives have the right

to reject materials and workmanship which are defective or require correction.

Promptly remove rejected work and materials from the site.

C. Inferior Work Discoveries: Failure or neglect on the part of the Owner or the

Owner's Authorized Representatives to condemn or reject bad or inferior work or

materials does not imply an acceptance of such work or materials. Neither is it to

be construed as barring the Owner or the Owner's Authorized Representatives at

any subsequent time from recovering damages or a sum of money needed to build

anew all portions of the Work in which inferior work or improper materials were

used.

D. Removal for Examination: Should it be considered necessary or advisable by the

Owner or the Owner's Authorized Representatives, at any time before final

acceptance of the Work, to make examinations of portions of the Work already

completed, by removing or tearing out such portions, promptly furnish all

necessary facilities, labor, and material, to make such an examination. If such

Work is found to be defective in any respect, defray all expenses of such

examination and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such work is found to

meet the requirements of the Contract, the cost of examination and restoration of

the Work will be considered a change in the Work and Contractor may request

compensation in accordance with applicable provisions of the Contract.

E. Operation Responsibility: Assume full responsibility for the proper operation of

equipment during tests and instruction periods. Make no claim for damage which

may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner accepts the Work.

F. Rejection Prior to Warrantee Expiration: If at any time prior to the expiration of

any applicable warranties or guarantees, equipment is rejected by the Owner, repay

to the Owner all sums of money received for the rejected equipment on progress

certificates or otherwise on account of the Contract lump sum prices, and upon the

receipt of the sum of money, Owner will execute and deliver a bill of sale of all its

rights, title, and interest in and to the rejected equipment. Do not remove the

equipment from the premises of the Owner until the Owner obtains from other

sources, equipment to take the place of that rejected. The Owner hereby agrees to

obtain other equipment within a reasonable time and the Contractor agrees that the



Owner may use the equipment furnished by the Contractor without rental or other

charge until the other new equipment is obtained.

1.5 INSPECTION OF MATERIALS

A. Premanufacture Notification: Give notice in writing to the Construction Manager

sufficiently in advance of the commencement of manufacture or preparation of

materials especially manufactured or prepared for use in or as part of the

permanent construction. When required, the notice is to include a request for

inspection, the date of commencement, and the expected date of completion of the

manufacture or preparation of materials. Upon receipt of such notice, Construction

Manager will arrange to have a representative present at such times during the

manufacture or testing as may be necessary to inspect the materials, or will notify

Contractor that the inspection will be made at a point other than the point of

manufacture or testing, or that the inspection will be waived. Comply with these

provisions before shipping any materials. Such inspection will not constitute a

release from the responsibility for furnishing materials meeting the requirements of

the Contract Documents.

B. Testing Standards: Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances

shall be conducted in accordance with recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME,

or IEEE, except as may otherwise be stated herein.

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing

1. Field and Laboratory

a. Provide personnel to assist the Construction Manager in performing

the following periodic observation and associated services.

(1) Soils: Observe and test excavations, placement and

compaction of soils. Determine suitability of excavated

material. Observe subgrade soils and foundations.

(2) Concrete: Observe forms and reinforcement; observe concrete

placement; witness air entrainment tests, facilitate concrete

cylinder preparation and assist with other tests performed by


(3) Masonry: Sample and test mortar, bricks, blocks and grout;

inspect brick and block samples and sample panels; inspect

placement of reinforcement and grouting.



b. When specified in Divisions 2 through 16 of the Contract Documents,

provide an independent laboratory testing facility to perform required

testing. Qualify the laboratory as having performed previous

satisfactory work. Prior to use, submit to the Construction Manager

for approval.

c. Cooperate with the Construction Manager and laboratory testing

representatives. Provide at least 24 hours notice prior to when

specified testing is required. Provide labor and materials, and

necessary facilities at the site as required by the Construction

Manager and the testing laboratory.

d. Provide an independent testing agency, a member of the National

Electrical Testing Association, to perform inspections and tests

specified in Division 16 of these Specifications.

2. Equipment: Coordinate and demonstrate test procedures as specified in the

Contract Documents or as otherwise required during the formal tests.

3. Pipeline and Other Testing: Conform to test procedures and requirements

specified in the appropriate Specification Section.

B. Reports

1. Certified Test Reports: Where transcripts or certified test reports are

required by the Contract Documents, meet the following requirements:

a. Before delivery of materials or equipment submit and obtain approval

of the Construction Manager for all required transcripts, certified test

reports, certified copies of the reports of all tests required in

referenced specifications or specified in the Contract Documents.

b. Perform all testing in an approved independent laboratory or the

manufacturer's laboratory. Submit for approval reports of shop

equipment tests within thirty days of testing.

c. Transcripts or test reports are to be accompanied by a notarized

certificate in the form of a letter from the manufacturer or supplier

certifying that tested material or equipment meets the specified

requirements and the same type, quality, manufacture and make as

specified. The certificate shall be signed by an officer of the

manufacturer or the manufacturer's plant manager.

2. Certificate of Compliance: At the option of the Construction Manager, or

where not otherwise specified, submit for approval a notarized Certificate of



Compliance. The Certificates may be in the form of a letter stating the

following:

a. Manufacturer has performed all required tests

b. Materials to be supplied meet all test requirements

c. Tests were performed not more than one year prior to submittal of the

certificate

d. Materials and equipment subjected to the tests are of the same quality,

manufacture and make as those specified

e. Identification of the materials

1.7 COSTS OF INSPECTION

A. Owner's Obligation: Initial inspection and testing of materials furnished under this

Contract will be performed by the Owner or his authorized Representatives or

inspection bureaus without cost to the Contractor, unless otherwise expressly

specified. If subsequent testing is necessary due to failure of the initial tests or

because of rejection for noncompliance, reimburse the Owner for expenditures

incurred in making such tests.

B. Contractor's Obligation: Include in the Contract Price, the cost of all shop and

field tests of equipment and other tests specifically called for in the Contract

Documents. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary permits and

inspections from City of Richmond Building Inspections.

C. Reimbursements to Owner:

1. Materials and equipment submitted by the Contractor as the equivalent to

those specifically named in the Contract may be tested by the Owner for

compliance. Reimburse the Owner for expenditures incurred in making such

tests on materials and equipment which are rejected for noncompliance.

2. Reimburse Owner for the costs of jobsite inspection on weekends and

holidays, and between the hours of 5:00 p.m. and 8:00 a.m. on workdays

unless the weekend, holiday or after-hours work is specifically required by

the Owner to minimize operational impact or traffic disruption. Jobsite

inspection costs for weekend, holidays or after-hours work, if authorized,

solely to make up schedule slippage shall be reimbursable.

3. Reimburse Owner for all costs associated with field Witness Tests which

exceed 5 Calendar Days per kind of equipment.



4. Reimburse Owner for all travel costs associated with the Owner witness of

equipment and system Factory Testing as specified in the equipment

specifications.

5. Reimbursement to Owner shall be by a credit Change Order to the lump sum

contract items issued at the end of the project.

1.8 ACCEPTANCE TESTS

A. Preliminary Field Tests: As soon as conditions permit, furnish all labor and

materials and services to perform preliminary field tests of all equipment provided

under this Contract. If the preliminary field tests disclose that any equipment

furnished and installed under this Contract does not meet the requirements of the

Contract Documents, make all changes, adjustments and replacements required

prior to the final field tests.

B. Final Field Tests: Upon completion of the Work and prior to substantial

completion inspection, subject all equipment, piping and appliances installed under

this Contract to acceptance tests to demonstrate compliance with the Contract

Documents. The Contractor shall develop a detailed testing plan for the new

equipment and new equipment systems in order to show that the completed work

complies with all the requirements of the Contract Documents. The detailed testing

plan shall include development of detailed check lists for use during the final field

testing. The testing plan shall include a description of the procedures proposed by

the Contractor to test each equipment system to show compliance with the

functional requirements of the Contract Documents. The field testing check lists

shall include, but shall not be limited to, the items and systems shown in Table

01450-1. The detailed testing plan and testing check lists shall be submitted to the

Construction Manager for approval and approval obtained by the Construction

Manager a minimum of 14 calendar days before the scheduled date to conduct the

final field tests.

1. Furnish all labor, fuel, energy, water and other materials, equipment,

instruments and services necessary for all acceptance tests.

2. Conduct field tests in the presence of the Construction Manager. Perform the

field tests to demonstrate that under all conditions of operation each

equipment item:

a. Has not been damaged by transportation or installation

b. Has been properly installed

c. Has been property lubricated

d. Has no electrical or mechanical defects

e. Is in proper alignment



f. Has been properly connected

g. Is free of overheating of any parts

h. Is free of all objectionable vibration

i. Is free of overloading of any parts

j. Is free of excessive noise

k. Operates as intended

l. Complete inspection check lists

3. Operate work or portions of work for the minimum time periods specified.

Conduct test on those systems which require load produced by weather

(heating or cooling) exercise only when weather will produce proper load.

C. Failure of Tests: If the acceptance tests reveal defects in material or equipment, or

if the material or equipment in any way fails to comply with the requirements of

the Contract Documents, then promptly correct such deficiencies. Failure or

refusal to correct the deficiencies, or if the improved materials or equipment, when

tested again, fail to meet the guarantees or specified requirements, the Owner,

notwithstanding its partial payment for work and materials or equipment, may

reject said materials or equipment and may order the Contractor to remove the

defective work from the site at no addition to the Contract Price, and replace it

with material or equipment which meets the Contract Documents.

1.9 FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH CONTRACT

A. Unacceptable Materials: If it is ascertained by testing or inspection that the

material or equipment does not comply with the Contract, do not deliver said

material or equipment, or if delivered remove it promptly from the site or from the

Work and replace it with acceptable material without additional cost to the Owner.

Fulfill all obligations under the terms and conditions of the Contract even though

the Owner or the Owner's Authorized Representatives fail to ascertain

noncompliance or notify the Contractor of noncompliance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

Table 01450-1



Field Testing Check List (Example)

Date: ________________________

Item

Local

Control

Station

Control

Panel

Station

GDP

SCADA HMI

Remarks Trafford WTP

A. Pump No. 1

1. AFD HOA Switch Indication (DPC)

2. AFD HOA Switch Control

3. Run Status

4. Manual Start/Stop/Speed Control from AFD

Panel

5. Manual Start/Stop/Speed Control from GDP

6. Manual Start/Stop/Speed Control from

SCADA

7. Auto Start/Stop/Speed Control

8. Discharge Valve Open/Closed Indication to

DPC

9. AFD Emergency Stop

10. Pump Emergency Stop

11. Emergency Stop Indication

12. Discharge Valve Control

Table 01450-1



Item

Local

Control

Station

Control

Panel

Station

GDP

SCADA HMI


13. Discharge Valve Fail to Open

14. Discharge Valve Fail to Close

15. Manual Valve Open/Close Control

16. Valve Operator Open/Closed Indication

17. AFD Operable (Power On)

18. Motor Bearing RTD Temperature

19. Pump Bearing RTD Temperature

20. Motor Bearing RTD Set-Point

21. Pump Bearing RTD Set-Point

22. Bearing Temperature Fault

23. AFD Fault Indication

24. AFD Fault Reset

25. LOR Fault Indication

26. LOR Fault Reset

27. Discharge Valve Pressure Switch

B. Pump No. 2



Table 01450-1



Item

Local

Control

Station

Control

Panel

Station

GDP

SCADA HMI


3. Run Status


Panel



SCADA



DPC











Table 01450-1



Item

Local

Control

Station

Control

Panel

Station

GDP

SCADA HMI







24. AFD Fault Reset


26. LOR Fault Reset


C. Pump No. 3



3. Run Status


Panel



SCADA

Table 01450-1



Item

Local

Control

Station

Control

Panel

Station

GDP

SCADA HMI




DPC
















Table 01450-1



Item

Local

Control

Station

Control

Panel

Station

GDP

SCADA HMI


24. AFD Fault Reset


26. LOR Fault Reset


D. Other Items

1. Station Discharge Pressure to DPC

2. Station Flow to DPC

3. Main Switch 1 Indication to DPC

4. Main Switch 2 Indication to DPC

5. Main Breaker 1 Indication to DPC

6. Main Breaker 2 Indication to DPC

7. Tie Breaker Indication to DPC

8. 125 VDC Low Voltage Alarm to DPC

9. 125 VDC Input Power Fail to DPC

10. New Discharge Valve 1 Operator Operation



13. New Water System Backflow Preventer

Table 01450-1



Item

Local

Control

Station

Control

Panel

Station

GDP

SCADA HMI


14. New Toilet Facilities

15. New 125 VDC Power System

16. Terminal Cabinet TC-3 Wiring Demolition

Field Testing Attendance List:

Name Signature Firm Telephone

Field Testing Notes:



SECTION 01500

CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. References

B. General Requirements

C. Temporary Utilities

D. Temporary Construction

E. Barricades and Enclosures

F. Fences

G. Protection of Property, Utilities and Structures

H. Temporary Controls

I. Traffic Regulation

J. Field Offices and Sheds

K. Hoists and Cranes

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Codes and standards referred to in this section are:

1. Virginia Department of Transportation Road and Bridge Specifications

2. OSHA Regulations

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Plant and Facilities: Furnish, install, maintain and remove all false work,

scaffolding, ladders, hoistways, braces, pumping plants, shields, trestles, roadways,

sheeting, centering forms, barricades, drains, flumes, control equipment, and the



like, any of which may be needed in the construction of any part of the Work and

which are not herein described or specified in detail. Accept responsibility for the

safety and efficiency of such works and for any damage to the Work or Owner

equipment, buildings and structures that may result from their failure or from their

improper construction, maintenance or operation.

B. First Aid: Maintain a readily accessible, completely equipped first aid kit at each

location where work is in progress.

C. Safety Responsibility: Accept sole responsibility for safety and security at the site.

Indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Owner's Authorized

Representatives, including Greeley and Hansen and Construction Manager, for any

safety violation, or noncompliance with governing bodies and their regulations,

and for accidents, deaths, injuries, or damage at the site during occupancy or

partial occupancy of the site by Contractor's forces while performing any part of

the Work. Provide the Construction Manager with a copy of the Contractor Safety

Plan for this project which includes all proposed Work planned.

D. Hazard Communication: Furnish two copies of the Contractor's Hazard

Communication Program required under OSHA regulations before beginning on

site activities. Furnish two copies of amendments to Hazard Communications

Program as they are prepared.

E. Confined Space: Portions of the existing facilities are considered Confined Spaces

by the Owner. These generally include but are not limited to: Storage Tanks,

Sewers, Dry Wells, Underground Vaults, Boilers, Digesters, Manholes, Tunnels,

Ventilation or Exhaust Ducts, Wet Wells, Open Top Pits, Lagoons, and Vats and

Vessels. These areas may be considered Permit Required Confined Spaces because

of the potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere, the potential of engulfment,

and because of its internal configuration. Permit Required Confined Spaces are

posted and identified with signs. Concurrent entry into any permit required

confined space by Contractor and Owner’s personnel shall be coordinated.

F. General Requirement Costs: All costs associated with the general requirements

shall be included in the lump sum contract items and no separate payments will be

made therefore.

1.4 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. Water: Provide all necessary facilities and required water without additional cost

to the Owner, unless otherwise specified. If necessary, provide and lay water lines

to the place of use; secure all necessary permits; pay for all taps to water mains and

hydrants and for all water used at the established rates.



B. Light and Power: Provide without additional cost to the Owner temporary lighting

and power facilities required for the proper construction and inspection of the

Work. If, in the Construction Manager's opinion, these facilities are inadequate, do

NOT proceed with any portion of the Work affected thereby. Maintain temporary

lighting and power until the Work is accepted.

C. Heat: Provide temporary heat, whenever required, for work being performed

during cold weather to prevent freezing of concrete, water pipes, and other damage

to the Work or existing facilities.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide sufficient sanitary facilities for construction personnel.

Prohibit and prevent nuisances on the site of the Work or on adjoining property.

Discharge any employee who violates this rule. Abide by all environmental

regulations or laws applicable to the Work.

E. Connections to Existing Utilities:

1. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, make all necessary connections to

existing facilities including structures, drain lines, and utilities such as water,

sewer, gas, telephone, and electricity. In each case, obtain permission from

the Owner or the owning utility prior to undertaking connections. Protect

facilities against deleterious substances and damage.

2. Thoroughly plan in advance all connections to existing facilities. Have on

hand at the time of undertaking the connections, all material, labor and

required equipment. Proceed continuously to complete connections in

minimum time. Arrange for the operation of valves or other appurtenances

on existing utilities, under the direct supervision of the owning utility.

1.5 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION

A. Bridges:

1. Design and place suitable temporary bridges where necessary for the

maintenance of vehicular and pedestrian traffic. Assume responsibility for

the sufficiency and safety of all such temporary work or bridges and for any

damage which may result from their failure or their improper construction,

maintenance, or operation. Indemnify and save harmless the Owner and the

Owner's representatives, including Greeley and Hansen and Construction

Manager, from all claims, suits or actions, and damages or costs of every

description arising by reason of failure to comply with the above provisions.

2. Provide a pedestrian access bridge to the station access door for use during

the period that the station discharge header and the access door platform are

being replaced.



1.6 BARRICADES AND ENCLOSURES

A. Protection of Workmen and Public: Effect and maintain at all times during the

prosecution of the Work, barriers and lights necessary for the protection of

Workmen and the Public. Provide suitable barricades, lights, "danger" or "caution"

or "street closed" signs and watchmen at all places where the Work causes

obstructions to normal traffic, excavation sites, or constitutes in any way a hazard

to the public.

B. Barricades and Lights:

1. Protect all streets, roads, highways, excavations and other public

thoroughfares which are closed to traffic; use effective barricades which

display acceptable warning signs. Locate barricades at the nearest public

highway or street on each side of the blocked section.

2. Statutory Requirements: Install and maintain all barricades, signs, lights,

and other protective devices within highway rights-of-way in strict

conformity with applicable statutory requirements by the authority having

jurisdiction.

1.7 FENCES

A. Existing Fences: Obtain written permission from the Owner prior to relocating or

dismantling fences which interfere with construction operations. Reach agreements

with the fence owner as to the period the fence may be left relocated or dismantled.

Install adequate gates where fencing must be maintained. Keep gates closed and

locked at all times when not in use.

B. Restoration: Restore all fences to their original or better condition and to their

original location on completion of the Work.

1.8 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY, UTILITIES AND STRUCTURES

A. Preservation of Property:

1. Preserve from damage, all property along the line of the Work, in the

vicinity of or in any way affected by the Work, the removal or destruction of

which is not called for by the Drawings. Preserve from damage, public

utilities, trees, lawn areas, building monuments, fences, pipe and

underground structures, existing station security system, and public streets.

Tree protection within public street right-of-ways, parks, and other City

public spaces shall be provided in accordance with the City of Richmond

Arborist requirements. Note: Normal wear and tear of streets resulting from



legitimate use by the Contractor are not considered as damage. Whenever

damages occur to such property, immediately restore to its original

condition. Costs for such repairs are incidental to the Contract.

2. In case of failure on the part of the Contractor to restore property or make

good on damage or injury, the Owner may, upon 24 hours written notice,

proceed to repair, rebuild, or otherwise restore such property as may be

deemed necessary, and the cost thereof will be deducted from any moneys

due or which may become due the Contractor under this Contract. If

removal, repair or replacement of public or private property is made

necessary by alteration of grade or alignment authorized by the Owner and

not contemplated by the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be

compensated, in accordance with the General Conditions, provided that such

property has not been damaged through fault of the Contractor or the

Contractor's employees.

B. Public Utility Installations and Structures:

1. Public utility installations and structures include all poles, tracks, pipes,

wires, conduits, vaults, ductbanks, manholes, and other appurtenances and

facilities, whether owned or controlled by public bodies or privately owned

individuals, firms or corporations, used to serve the public with

transportation, gas, electricity, telephone, storm and sanitary sewers, water,

or other public or private utility services. Facilities appurtenant to public or

private property which may be affected by the Work are deemed included

hereunder.

2. The Contract Documents contain data relative to existing public utility

installations and structures above and below the ground surface. Existing

public utility installations and structures are indicated on the Drawings only

to the extent such information was made available to, or found by, the

Engineer in preparing the Drawings. These data are not guaranteed for

completeness or accuracy, and the Contractor is responsible for making

necessary investigations to become fully informed as to the character,

condition, and extent of all public utility installations and structures that may

be encountered and that may affect the construction operations.

3. Contact utility locating service sufficiently in advance of the start of

construction to avoid damage to the utilities and delays to the completion

date.

4. Remove, replace, relocate, repair, rebuild, and secure any public utility

installations and structures damaged as a direct or indirect result of the Work

under this Contract. Costs for such work are incidental to the Contract. Be

responsible and liable for any consequential damages done to or suffered by



any public utility installations or structures. Assume and accept

responsibility for any injury, damage, or loss which may result from or be

consequent to interference with, or interruption or discontinuance of, any

public utility service.

5. Repair or replace any water, electric, sewer, gas, or other service connection

or equipment damaged during the Work with no addition to the Contract

price.

6. At all times in performance of the Work, employ proven methods and

exercise reasonable care and skill to avoid unnecessary delay, injury,

damage, or destruction to public utility installations and structures. Avoid

unnecessary interference with, or interruption of, public utility services.

Cooperate fully with the owners thereof to that end.

7. Give written notice to the owners of all public utility installations and

structures affected by proposed construction operations, sufficiently in

advance of breaking ground in any area or on any unit of the Work, to obtain

their permission before disrupting the lines and to allow them to take

measures necessary to protect their interests. Advise the Chiefs of Police,

Fire and Rescue Services of any excavation in public streets or the

temporary shut-off of any water main. Provide at least 24 hours notice to all

affected property owners whenever service connections are taken out of

service.

C. Miscellaneous Structures: Assume and accept responsibility for all injuries or

damage to culverts, building foundations and walls, retaining walls, or other

structures of any kind met with during the prosecution of the Work. Assume and

accept liability for damages to public or private property resulting therefrom.

Adequately protect against freezing all pipes carrying liquid.

D. Protection of Trees and Lawn Areas:

1. Protect with boxes, trees and shrubs, except those shown to be removed. Do

not place excavated material so as to cause injury to such trees or shrubs.

Replace trees or shrubs destroyed by accident or negligence of the

Contractor or Contractor's employees with new stock of similar size and age,

at the proper season, at no additional cost to the Owner.

2. Leave lawn areas in as good condition as before the start of the Work.

Restore areas where sod has been removed by seeding or sodding.



1.9 TEMPORARY CONTROLS

A. During Construction:

1. Keep the site of the Work and adjacent premises free from construction

materials, debris, and rubbish. Remove this material from any portion of the

site if such material, debris, or rubbish constitutes a nuisance or is

objectionable.

2. Remove from the site all surplus materials and temporary structures when

they are no longer needed.

3. Neatly stack construction materials such as concrete forms and scaffolding

when not in use. Promptly remove splattered concrete, asphalt, oil, paint,

corrosive liquids, and cleaning solutions from surfaces to prevent marring or

other damage.

4. Properly store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and remove from

the site daily.

5. Do not bury or burn on the site or dispose of into storm drains, sanitary

sewers, streams, or waterways, any waste material. Remove all wastes from

the site and dispose of in a manner complying with applicable ordinances

and laws.

B. Smoke Prevention:

1. Strictly observe all air pollution control regulations.

2. Open fires will be allowed only if permitted under current ordinances.

C. Noises:

1. Maintain acceptable noise levels in the vicinity of the Work. Limit noise

production to acceptable levels by using special mufflers, barriers,

enclosures, equipment positioning, and other approved methods.

2. Supply written notification to the Owner sufficiently in advance of the start

of any work which violates this provision. Proceed only when all applicable

authorizations and variances have been obtained in writing.

D. Hours of Operation:

1. Operation of construction equipment between the hours of 5:00 p.m. and

8:00 a.m. the following day is prohibited. For operation of this equipment

during this period obtain written consent from the Owner.



2. Do not carry out nonemergency work, including equipment moves, on

Saturdays, Sundays or City observed holidays without prior written

authorization by the Owner.

E. Dust Control:

1. Take measures to prevent unnecessary dust. Keep earth surfaces exposed to

dusting moist with water or a chemical dust suppressant. Cover materials in

piles or while in transit to prevent blowing or spreading dust.

2. Adequately protect buildings or operating facilities which may be affected

adversely by dust. Protect machinery, motors, instrument panels, or similar

equipment by suitable dust screens. Include proper ventilation with dust

screens.

F. Temporary Drainage Provisions:

1. Provide for the drainage of stormwater and any water applied or discharged

on the site in performance of the Work. Provide adequate drainage facilities

to prevent damage to the Work, the site, and adjacent property.

2. Supplement existing drainage channels and conduits as necessary to carry all

increased runoff from construction operations. Construct dikes as necessary

to divert increased runoff from entering adjacent property (except in natural

channels), to protect the Owner's facilities and the Work, and to direct water

to drainage channels or conduits. Provide ponding as necessary to prevent

downstream flooding.

3. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping

equipment.

G. Erosion Control: Provide erosion control in accordance with the Specification

Section titled Soil Erosion and Sediment Control.

H. Pollution: Prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary wastes,

sediment, debris, and other substances resulting from construction activities. Do

not permit sanitary wastes to enter any drain or watercourse other than sanitary

sewers. Do not permit sediment, debris, or other substances to enter sanitary

sewers. Take reasonable measures to prevent such materials from entering any

drain or watercourse.



1.10 TRAFFIC REGULATION

A. Access: Conduct Work to interfere as little as possible with public travel, whether

vehicular or pedestrian. The Contractor’s personnel, equipment, machinery, tools

and supplies shall be kept clear of active traffic lanes except as necessary for

prosecuting active work. Material that is spilled or tracked onto the traveled

pavement during prosecution of the work shall be promptly removed. Provide and

maintain suitable temporary expedients for the accommodation of public and

private travel. Whenever it is necessary to cross, obstruct, or close roads,

driveways, and walks, whether public or private, give 2 weeks notice to Owners of

private drives before interfering with them. Such maintenance of traffic will not be

required when the Contractor has obtained permission from the Owner or tenant of

private property, or from the authority having jurisdiction over the public property

involved, to obstruct traffic at the designated point.

B. Work-in-Street Permit: All work in City streets shall comply with the

requirements of the Work-in-Street Permit obtained by the Contractor.

C. Traffic and Speeding Requirements: Adhere to all local traffic and speeding

requirements.

1.11 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

A. Office: Furnish and maintain a temporary field office on the site. Keep readily

accessible copies of the Contract Documents, required record documents, and the

latest approved shop drawings at this field office.

1. Provide a separate 10 foot by 10 foot, minimum, office in the Field Office

for use of the Construction Manager which includes a table, two (2) office

chairs, one four drawer file cabinet, and one exterior, lockable, access door.

B. Material Sheds and Temporary Structures: Provide material sheds and other

temporary structures of sturdy construction and neat appearance.

C. Location: Coordinate location of field offices, material sheds and temporary

structures with Construction Manager and Owner.

1.12 HOISTS AND CRANES

A. Contractor shall NOT use any hoists or cranes belonging to the Owner, for the

performance of the work, without first submitting a written request to the

Construction Manager. The request shall describe how the Contractor intends to

use the hoist or crane, the weight of the items being lifted, and how long the

Contractor intends to use the hoist or crane. If the request is approved, the

Construction Manager will provide written authorization to the Contractor.



B. Contractor’s use of hoist/crane, upon receiving written approval, shall be in

accordance with the unit’s operation and maintenance procedures and all

applicable regulations.

C. Prior to using the hoist/crane, the Contractor shall pay for an independent certified

inspection of the hoist/crane by an inspector approved by the Construction

Manager. Submit copies of the report to the Construction Manager.

D. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall pay for a second certified

inspection of the hoist/crane, by the approved inspector. Submit copies of the

report to the Construction Manager. The report shall be submitted prior to

substantial completion.

E. Any unusual wear or damage to the hoist/crane, its appurtenances, or any

components, found by this second inspection, shall be repaired or replaced prior to

substantial completion, to the satisfaction of the Owner and Construction Manager,

at the expense of the Contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01530

PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation and protection of property adjacent to the work site against damage or injury as a result of his operations under this Contract. Any damage or injury occurring on account of any act, omission or neglect on the part of the Contractor shall be restored in a proper and satisfactory manner or replaced by and at the expense of the Contractor to an equal or superior condition than previously existed.

B. Contractor shall comply promptly with such safety regulations as may be prescribed by

the Owner or the local authorities having jurisdiction and shall, when so directed, properly correct any unsafe conditions created by, or unsafe practices on the part of, his employees. In the event of the Contractor's failure to comply, the Owner may take the necessary measures to correct the conditions or practices complained of, and all costs thereof will be deducted from any monies due the Contractor. Failure of the Engineer to direct the correction of unsafe conditions or practices shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility hereunder.

C. In the event of any claims for damage or alleged damage to property as a result of work

under this Contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs in connection with the settlement of or defense against such claims. Prior to commencement of work in the vicinity of property adjacent to the work site, the Contractor, at his own expense, shall take such surveys as may be necessary to establish the existing condition of the property. Before final payment can be made, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all claims for damage have been legally settled or sufficient funds to cover such claims have been placed in escrow, or that an adequate bond to cover such claims has been obtained.

1.02 PROTECTION OF WORK AND MATERIAL

A. During the progress of the work and up to the date of final payment, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the care and protection of all work and materials covered by the Contract.

B. All work and materials shall be protected against damage, injury or loss from any cause

whatsoever, and the Contractor shall make good any such damage or loss at his own expense. Protection measures shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

1.03 BARRICADES, WARNING SIGNS AND LIGHTS

A. The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain as necessary, strong and suitable barricades, danger signs and warning lights along all roads accessible to the public, as required by the authority having jurisdiction, to insure safety to the public. All barricades

04

13

11

BR


and obstructions along public roads shall be illuminated at night and all lights for this purpose shall be kept burning from sunset to sunrise.

B. Each Contractor shall provide and maintain such other warning signs and barricades in

areas of and around their respective work as may be required for the safety of all those employed in the work, the Owner's operating personnel, or those visiting the site.

1.04 EXISTING UTILITIES AND STRUCTURES

A. The term existing utilities shall be deemed to refer to both publicly-owned and privately-owned utilities such as electric power and lighting, telephone, water, gas, storm drains, process lines, sanitary sewers and all appurtenant structures.

B. Where existing utilities and structures are indicated on the Drawings, it shall be understood

that all of the existing utilities and structures affecting the work may not be shown and that the locations of those shown are approximate only. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ascertain the actual extent and exact location of existing utilities and structures. In every instance, the Contractor shall notify the proper authority having jurisdiction and obtain all necessary directions and approvals before performing any work in the vicinity of existing utilities.

C. Prior to beginning any excavation work, the Contractor shall, through field investigations,

determine any conflicts or interferences between existing utilities and new utilities to be constructed under this project. This determination shall be based on the actual locations, elevations, slopes, etc., of existing utilities as determined in the field investigations, and locations, elevation, slope, etc. of new utilities as shown on the Drawings. If an interference exists, the Contractor shall bring it to the attention of the Engineer as soon as possible. If the Engineer agrees that an interference exists, he shall modify the design as required. Additional costs to the Contractor for this change shall be processed through a Change Order as detailed elsewhere in these Contract Documents. In the event the Contractor fails to bring a potential conflict or interference to the attention of the Engineer prior to beginning excavation work, any actual conflict or interference which does arise during the Project shall be corrected by the Contractor, as directed by the Engineer, at no additional expense to the Owner.

D. The work shall be carried out in a manner to prevent disruption of existing services and to

avoid damage to the existing utilities. Any damage resulting from the work of this Contract shall be promptly repaired by the Contractor at his own expense in a manner approved by the Engineer and further subject to the requirements of any authority having jurisdiction. Where it is required by the authority having jurisdiction that they perform their own repairs or have them done by others, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs thereof.

E. Where excavations by the Contractor require any utility lines or appurtenant structures to

be temporarily supported and otherwise protected during the construction work, such support and protection shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit a detailed plan for temporary support and protection of existing utility lines which must be crossed, and the plan must be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia. All such work shall be performed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer and the respective authority having jurisdiction over such work. In the event the Contractor fails to provide proper support or protection to any existing utility, the Engineer may, at his discretion, have the respective authority to provide such support or


protection as may be necessary to insure the safety of such utility, and the costs of such measures shall be paid by the Contractor.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 -- EXECUTION (NOT USED)

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 01550

SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Access Roads

1. The Contractor shall construct and maintain such temporary access roads as required to perform the work of this Contract.

2. Access roads shall be located within the property lines of the Owner.

3. Existing roads used by the Contractor shall be suitably maintained by the

Contractor at his expense during construction. Contractor shall not be permitted to restrict Owner access to existing facilities. Engineer may direct Contractor to perform maintenance of existing access roads when Engineer determines that such work is required to insure all-weather access by the Owner.

B. Parking Areas

1. Each Contractor shall maintain suitable parking areas for his construction

personnel on the project site where approved by the Engineer and the Owner.

C. Restoration

1. At the completion of the work, the surfaces of land used for access roads and parking areas shall be restored by each Contractor to its original condition and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. At a minimum, such restoration shall include establishment of a permanent ground cover adequate to restrain erosion for all disturbed areas.

D. Traffic Regulations

1. Contractor shall obey all traffic laws and comply with all the requirements, rules

and regulations of the City of Richmond and other local authorities having jurisdiction to maintain adequate warning signs, lights, barriers, etc., for the protection of traffic on public roadways.

E. Storage of Equipment and Materials

1. Contractor shall store his equipment and materials at the job site in accordance

with the requirements of the General Conditions, the Supplemental Conditions, and as hereinafter specified. All equipment and materials shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as directed by the Owner or Engineer, and in conformity to applicable statutes, ordinances, regulations and rulings of the public authority having jurisdiction.

01

25

06

BR


2. Contractor shall not store materials or encroach upon private property without the

written consent of the owners of such private property.

3. Contractor shall not store unnecessary materials or equipment on the job site, and shall take care to prevent any structure from being loaded with a weight which will endanger its security or the safety of persons.

4. Materials shall not be placed within ten (10) feet of fire hydrants. Gutters, drainage

channels and inlets shall be kept unobstructed at all times.

5. Contractor shall provide adequate temporary storage buildings/facilities, if required, to protect materials or equipment on the job site.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 -- EXECUTION (NOT USED)

- END OF SECTION -



SECTION 01600

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Description

B. Substitutions

C. “Or Equal” Submittals

D. Manufacturer's Written Instructions

E. Transportation and Handling

F. Storage, Protection, and Maintenance

G. Storage and Handling of Equipment On Site

H. Equipment List and Tagging

I. Special Tools and Lubricating Equipment

J. Care and Protection of New Electrical Equipment and Instrumentation

K. Electrical Work

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Proposed Manufacturers List: Within 15 calendar days of the date of the Notice to

Proceed, submit to the Construction Manager a list of the names of proposed

manufacturers, suppliers, dealers and subcontractors, obtain approval of this list by

Owner prior to submission of any shop drawings. Upon request submit evidence to

Construction Manager that each proposed manufacturer has manufactured a similar

product to the one specified and that it has previously been used for a like purpose

for a sufficient length of time to demonstrate its satisfactory performance.

B. Provide material, spare parts, and equipment essential to the installation of the

equipment and materials, and otherwise shown to be provided under this contract,

which meet the following:



1. Standards: Design equipment and appurtenances in conformity with ANSI,

ASME, IEEE, NEMA, OSHA, NACE, AGMA, AISC, AWWA, and other

generally accepted standards. Equipment and appurtenances shall be of

rugged construction and of sufficient strength to withstand all stresses which

may occur during fabrication, testing, transportation, installation, and all

conditions of operation.

2. Electrical Requirements: Electrical devices, motors, equipment, control

panels, electrical equipment enclosures, and other electrical equipment

appurtenances shall be labeled by UL or other approved testing agency.

Shop drawings for electrical equipment shall denote that the represented

material has the approved testing agency label. Nonlisted materials and

special equipment devices not normally listed by the approved testing

agency and labeled shall equal or exceed the latest standards for such types

of equipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the services

of an electrical inspection firm to certify compliance of all nonlisted

materials to the approved testing agency standards and for providing

materials with an inspection label in accordance with the approved testing

agency standards.

3. Complies with size, make, type, and quality specified or as specifically

approved, in writing, by Construction Manager.

4. Will fit into the space provided with sufficient room for operation and

maintenance access and to properly connect to piping, ducts and services as

applicable.

5. Manufacture and fabricate in accordance with the following:

a. Design, fabricate, and assemble in accordance with the standards

referenced and the requirements given in the pertinent sections,

clauses, paragraphs, and sentences, both directly and indirectly

applicable thereto, in that part of the Contract Documents.

b. Provide equipment which is new, unused, and correctly designed. It

shall be of standard first-grade quality, produced by expert workmen.

c. Details shall be designed for appearance as well as utility. Protruding

members, joints, corners, and the like, shall be finished in appearance.

All exposed welds shall be ground smooth and the corners of

structural shapes shall be mitered.

d. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges,

to be interchangeable.



e. Provide two or more items of same kind identical, by same

manufacturer.

f. Provide materials and equipment suitable for service conditions.

g. Adhere to equipment capabilities, sizes, and dimensions shown or

specified unless variations are specifically approved, in writing, in

accordance with the Contract Documents.

6. Use material or equipment only for the purpose for which it is designed or

specified.

1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions:

1. Contractor’s requests for changes in equipment and materials from those

required by the Contract Documents are considered requests for

substitutions and are subject to Contractor’s representations and review

provisions of the Contract Documents when one of following conditions are

satisfied:

a. Where required equipment or material cannot be provided within

Contract Time, but not as result of Contractor’s failure to pursue

Work promptly or to coordinate various activities properly.

b. Where required equipment or material cannot be provided in manner

compatible with other materials of Work, or cannot be properly

coordinated therewith.

2. Contractor’s Options:

a. Where more than one choice is available as options for Contractor’s

selection of equipment or material, select option compatible with

other equipment and materials already selected (which may have been

from among options for other equipment and materials).

b. Where compliance with specified standard, code or regulation is

required, select from among products which comply with

requirements of those standards, codes, and regulations.



B. Conditions Which are Not Substitution:

1. Requirements for substitutions do not apply to Contractor options on

materials and equipment provided for in the Specifications.

2. Revisions to Contract Documents, where requested by Owner or

Construction Manager, are "changes" not "substitutions".

3. Contractor’s determination of and compliance with governing regulations

and orders issued by governing authorities do not constitute substitutions

and do not constitute basis for a Change Order, except as provided for in

Contract Documents.

1.4 “OR EQUAL” SUBMITTAL

A. This Section includes requirements related to the Contractor’s responsibilities for

“Or Equal” Submittal.

B. “Or Equal” Manufacturer

1. Whenever a material, article or method is specified or described by using the

name of a proprietary product or the name of a particular manufacturer(s) or

vendor(s), followed by the phase “or equal”, the specific item mentioned

shall be understood as establishing the type, function, dimension,

appearance, and quality desired and is to be the basis upon which bids are to

be prepared. Other manufacturer’s materials, articles and methods not

named will be considered as “Or Equal” provided required information is

submitted in the manner set forth herein and provided substitution will not

require substantial revisions of the Contract Documents. This applies to

specific construction methods when such are required by the Contract

Documents.

2. Whenever a material, article, or method is specified or described without the

phrase “or equal”, no substitutions will be allowed.

C. Submittal of Proposed “Or Equal” Manufacturers

1. Bids shall be based on materials, articles and methods named and specified

in the Contract Documents. If the bidder proposes to use an “Or Equal”

manufacturer for named and specified materials, articles and methods

followed by the phrase “or equal” within the Contract Documents during the

bidding process, he shall submit a list of proposed substitutions on the Form

for Proposed “Or Equal” Major Equipment Schedule with his bid. This

form is provided in the Bid Form and Attachment portion of the Bid



Documents for this purpose. Request for “or equal” manufacturer received

after bids are open will not be considered except as stated herein.

D. Submittal of Data for Proposed “Or Equal” Manufacturer

1. In order for the “or equal” manufacturer to be considered, the Contractor

shall submit with the bid a complete data as set forth herein to permit

complete analysis of all proposed substitutions listed on his submitted Form

For Proposed “Or Equal” Major Equipment Schedule. No substitution will

be considered unless the Contractor provides required data in accordance

with the requirements of this Section. The Engineer will take such time is

required to ensure full compliance with all Contract requirements. Three

copies of the following data shall be submitted in order for the “or equal”

manufacturer to be considered.

a. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed “or equal”

manufacturer with Contract Documents. The “or equal” manufacturer

shall not change design intent.

b. For products provide

(1) Identification, including manufacturer’s name and address.

(2) Manufacturer’s literature, including but not necessarily limited

to:

(a) Product description, performance and test data

(b) Reference standards

(3) Samples where appropriate.

(4) Name and address of similar projects on which product was

used, and date of installation.

c. Itemized comparison of proposed “or equal” manufacturer with

product methods specified. Different types of products and methods

will be considered provided final performance is at least equal to that

specified.

d. Data relating to impact on construction schedule occasion by the

proposed “or equal” manufacturer.

e. Proposed monetary changes supported by accurate cost data on

proposed “or equal” manufacturer in comparison with product or

method specified, including costs for redesigns required. Costs for



redesigns due to “or equal” manufacturer are the responsibility of the

Contractor.

f. In making request for “or equal” manufacturer, Bidder represents:

(1) He has personally investigated proposed product and

determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that

specified. He will provide the same guarantee for the “or equal”

manufacturer as for product specified.

(2) He will coordinate installation of accepted “or equal”

manufacturer into the Work, making such design and

construction changes as may be required for the Work to be

complete in all respects in accordance with Contract

requirements without additional cost to the City.

E. Rejection of Proposed “Or Equal”

1. Substitutions will not be considered at any time if:

a. They are indicated or implied on Contractor’s drawings or project

data submittals without formal request submitted in accordance with

this Section.

b. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.

c. Acceptance will create problems in stocking of repair parts and in

future maintenance by the City.

F. Approval of “Or Equal”

1. The Construction Manager’s decision regarding evaluation of “or equal”

manufacturer shall be final and binding. All approved “or equal”

manufacturers will be incorporated into the Contract.

1.5 MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS

A. Manufacturer's Requirements: Store, maintain, handle, install, connect, clean,

condition, and adjust products, equipment, spare parts, and materials in accordance

with manufacturer's written instructions and in conformity with Specifications.

1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's

instructions, consult Construction Manager for further instructions.

2. Do not proceed with work without written instructions.



B. Instruction Distribution: Provide manufacturer's written instructions, obtain and

distribute printed copies of such instructions to parties involved in installation,

including three copies to Construction Manager. Maintain one set of complete

instructions at job site during storage and installation, and until completion of

work.

C. Performance Procedures: Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions. Do not omit preparatory steps or installation procedures, unless

specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents.

D. Documentation: The Contractor shall document that Contractor has conformed to

Manufacturer’s Requirements and submit written documentation to the


1.6 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Coordination with Schedule: Arrange deliveries of products, materials, and

equipment in accordance with construction Progress Schedules. Coordinate to

avoid conflict with work and conditions at site.

1. Deliver products and move from storage materials, equipment, and spare

parts in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or

packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.

2. Protect bright-machined surfaces, such as shafts and valve faces, with a

heavy coat of grease prior to shipment.

3. Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipments of products, materials, and

equipment to determine compliance with requirements of Contract

Documents and approved submittals and that material and equipment are

protected and undamaged.

B. Handling: Provide equipment and personnel to handle products, materials, spare

parts, and equipment by methods recommended by manufacturer to prevent soiling

or damage to materials and equipment or packaging.

1.7 STORAGE, PROTECTION, AND MAINTENANCE

A. General: Store and maintain equipment, spare parts, and materials from the time

of delivery until the time the Contractor moves the equipment from storage for

installation. Provide all storage facilities and storage maintenance in accordance

with these requirements. Equipment, spare parts, and material that has not been

stored and protected in accordance with the manufacturers written instruction, or

not in acceptable as new condition, shall not be incorporated into the completed



work. Spare parts which have not been stored on the site in accordance with the

manufacturers written instructions and are not as new condition shall be rejected as

acceptable spare parts.

B. Exterior storage areas:

1. Coordinate location of storage areas with Construction Manager and Owner.

2. Arrange on-site storage areas for proper protection and segregation of stored

materials and equipment with proper drainage. Provide for safe travel

around storage areas and safe access to stored materials and equipment.

3. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to

prevent mixing with foreign matter.

4. Store materials such as pipe, reinforcing and structural steel, and equipment

on pallets, blocks or racks, off ground.

5. Store fabricated materials and equipment above ground, on blocking or

skids, to prevent soiling or staining. Cover materials and equipment which

are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings; provide

adequate ventilation to avoid condensation.

C. Interior Storage:

1. Store materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.

2. Store materials and equipment, subject to damage by elements, in weather

tight enclosures.

3. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges required by

manufacturer's instructions.

D. Accessible Storage: Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for

inspection and inventory. Make periodic inspections of stored materials or

equipment to assure that materials or equipment are maintained under specified

conditions and free from damage or deterioration.

1. Perform maintenance on stored materials of equipment in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions, in presence of Owner or Construction Manager.

2. Submit a report of completed maintenance to Construction Manager with

each Application for Payment.



3. Failure to perform maintenance, to notify Construction Manager of intent to

perform maintenance or to submit maintenance report may result in rejection

of material or equipment.

E. Owner's Responsibility: Owner assumes no responsibility for materials, spare

parts, or equipment stored in buildings or on-site.

F. Contractor's Responsibility:

1. Contractor assumes full responsibility for protection of the equipment.

2. Contractor assumes full responsibility for protection of completed

construction and installation. Repair and restore damage to completed Work

equal to its original condition.

G. Special Equipment: Use only rubber tired wheelbarrows, buggies, trucks, or

dollies to wheel loads over finished floors, regardless if the floor has been

protected or not. This applies to finished floors and to exposed concrete floors as

well as those covered with composition tile or other applied surfacing.

H. Surface Damage: Where structural concrete is also the finished surface, take care

to avoid marking or damaging surface.

1.8 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF EQUIPMENT ON SITE

A. Manufacturer’s Instruction for Storage and Handling shall be submitted in

accordance with Section 01330. The Contractor shall also maintain one complete

set of all storage and handling instructions at the job site through final acceptance.

B. Special attention shall be given to the storage and handling of equipment on site.

As a minimum, the procedure outlined below shall be followed.

1. Equipment shall not be shipped until approved by the Construction

Manager. The intent of this requirement is to reduce on site storage time

prior to installation and/or operation. Under no circumstances shall

equipment be delivered to the site more than three months prior to

installation without written authorization from the Construction Manager.

Operation and maintenance data as described in Section 01783 shall be

submitted to the Construction Manager for review prior to shipment of

equipment.

2. Contractor shall notify Construction Manager of schedule of major

equipment and material deliveries.



3. All equipment shall be stored fully lubricated with oil, grease, etc. unless

otherwise instructed by the manufacturer.

4. A copy of the manufacturer’s storage instructions shall be given to the

Construction Manager and shall be carefully studied by the Contractor and

reviewed with the Construction Manager. These instructions shall be

carefully followed and a written record of this kept by the Contractor.

5. Lubricants shall be changed upon completion of installation and as

frequently as required thereafter during the period between installation and

acceptance. Mechanical equipment to be used in the work, if stored for

longer than ninety days, shall have the bearings cleaned, flushed, and

lubricated prior to testing and startup, at no extra cost to the Owner.

6. Prior to acceptance of the equipment, the Contractor shall have the

manufacturer inspect the equipment and certify that its condition has not

been detrimentally affected by the long storage period. Such certifications

by the manufacturer shall be deemed to mean that the equipment is judged

by the manufacturer to be in a condition equal to that of equipment that has

been shipped, installed, tested and accepted in a minimum time period. As

such, the manufacturer will guarantee the equipment equally in both

instances. If such a certification is not given, the equipment shall be judged

to be defective. It shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s

expense.

7. Contractor shall store his equipment and materials at the job site in

accordance with the contract requirements and as hereinafter specified. All

equipment and materials shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations and as directed by the Construction Manager, and in

conformity to applicable statutes, ordinances, regulations and rulings of the

public authority having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall provide a

temporary storage building for storage of all major equipment items to be

stored on site prior to incorporation into the Work. Provision shall be made

for electric service to power space or strip heaters as necessary. Where space

or strip heaters are provided within the enclosure for motors, valve

operators, motor starters, panels, instruments, or other electrical equipment,

the Contractor shall make connections to these heaters from an appropriate

power source and operate the heaters with temperature control as necessary

until the equipment is installed and being operated according to its intended

use. Where space heaters are not provided but temperature and/or humidity

control are recommended by the equipment manufacturer, and for all electric

panels, Contractor shall provide temporary heat as required to meet the

requirements as directed by the Construction Manager.



8. The Contractor shall maintain an equipment storage rotation log for all

equipment provided. Rotation log shall include, as a minimum, the

equipment identification, date stored, date removed from storage, copy of

manufacturer’s recommended storage guidelines, date of rotation of

equipment, and signature of party performing rotation. Moving parts shall be

rotated a minimum of once weekly. Contractor shall submit a copy of the

rotation log to the Construction Manager at each monthly progress meeting.

Failure to properly maintain stored materials is sufficient cause for rejection

of the equipment by the Construction Manager.

9. Contractor shall enforce the instructions of Construction Manager regarding

the posting of regulatory signs for loadings on structures, fire safety, and

smoking areas.

10. Contractor shall not store unnecessary materials or equipment on the job

site, and shall take care to prevent any structure from being loaded with a

weight that will endanger its security or the safety of persons.

11. Materials shall not be placed within 30 feet of fire hydrants or no closer than

allowed by local codes. Gutters, drainage channels and inlets shall be kept

unobstructed at all times.

12. Stored materials shall not encroach upon private property without written

agreement that storage on their property is acceptable.

13. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make

periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are

maintained under specific conditions and free from damage or deterioration.

14. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from

damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove

covering when no longer needed.

15. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment and supplies

sold and delivered to the Owner under this contract until final inspection of

the work and acceptance thereof by the Construction Manager and Owner.

In the event any such material, equipment and supplies are lost, stolen,

damaged, or destroyed prior to final inspection and acceptance, the

Contractor shall replace same without additional cost to the Owner.

16. Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of

equipment supplied under this Contract within seven days after written

notice to do so has been given, the Owner and Construction Manager retains

the right to correct all deficiencies noted in previously transmitted written

notice and deduct the cost associated with these corrections from the



Contractor’s contract. These costs may be comprised of expenditures for

labor, equipment usage, administrative, clerical, engineering, and any other

costs associated with making the necessary corrections.

C. Payment for stored equipment, if approved by the Construction Manager, will be

made only if the construction schedule indicates that the equipment will be

installed within 3 months of the date of delivery to the project site and all other

requirements are met for stored material payments.

1.9 EQUIPMENT LIST AND TAGGING

A. Contractor shall supply an equipment and valve list for all equipment and valves 4

inches and larger in diameter. Equipment and valve list shall include identification

letters and numbers shown on the Contract plans. Lists in both hard copy and

electronic format shall accommodate Asset Management identification numbers

that will be provided by the Owner. Each piece of equipment shall be identified in

the field with a two color engraved nonmetallic label with ½-inch engraving

showing both the drawing identification number and the Owner’s Asset

Management identification number. Labels shall be permanently secured to all

equipment and valves.

1.10 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICATING EQUIPMENT

A. General: Contractor shall provide for his own use, as per manufacturer's

recommendations, any and all special tools required for installation, checking,

alignment, balancing, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance. (Special tools

are those which have been specially designed or adapted for use on parts of the

equipment, and which are not customarily and routinely carried by maintenance

mechanics.)

1.11 CARE AND PROTECTION OF NEW ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND

INSTRUMENTATION

A. To insure adequate protection of all electrical and instrumentation equipment,

panels, electric motors, process controllers and the like, all such equipment shall be

stored in a suitable enclosure designed to protect the equipment from dust and

within temperature ranges as recommended by the manufacturer of such

equipment.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the storage facilities and

equipment stored therein and shall make provisions for all utilities required.

C. Continuous access shall be provided to the Construction Manager for all

equipment so stored.



D. During storage and after installation, all such equipment shall be covered with

Visqueen (polyethylene sheet), and the covers shall be taped to protect the

equipment from dust.

E. The covers shall remain on the equipment at all times during the construction

period except when necessary to make connections, adjustments or tests on the

equipment.

1.12 ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Where definite requirements are not set forth in the Specifications, all electrical

equipment, materials and work under this Contract shall comply with the

requirements of the Occupational Safety and health Act (OSHA) and shall be in

accordance with applicable standards of ANSI, IEEE, IPCEA, and NEMA. The

work shall be performed in compliance with the latest issue of the NEC, all

applicable state and municipal regulations and codes, and the service rules of

Dominion Virginia Power, unless otherwise specified or directed.

B. All equipment and materials shall be listed as complying with the requirements of

the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. for the particular applications wherever

available.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION



SECTION 01655

STARTING AND PLACING EQUIPMENT IN OPERATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Scope of Work

B. Definitions

C. Related Requirements

D. Submittals

E. Quality Control

F. Physical Checkout

G. Initial Start-Up

H. Minimum Equipment Pre-Start-up Requirements

I. System Start-up Procedures

J. Vibration Testing

K. Corrections to the Work

L. Functional Test

M. 30-Day Performance Test

N. Miscellaneous Constraints

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Contractor shall initially test, start-up and place all mechanical, instrumentation and

controls and electrical equipment and related systems and system components

installed by the Contractor into successful operation according to manufacturer’s

written instructions and as instructed by manufacturer's field service representatives.

Provide all material, labor tools, equipment, and expendables required. Starting and



placing equipment in operation shall include the following steps: physical checkout,

initial checks, tests and start-up, and functional testing and performance testing.

B. Equipment testing, startup, functional testing and performance testing shall be

satisfactorily completed prior to the request for issuance of the certificate of

Substantial Completion.

C. The start-up and testing procedures specified herein represent the minimum

requirements. If different requirements are specified in the individual equipment

specifications, the Contractor shall comply with the more stringent requirements. The

Contractor is responsible for bringing any conflicts in procedures with specified

requirements and manufacturer’s procedures to the Construction Manager’s attention;

however, the Contractor is not relieved from any requirements unless specifically

waived in writing by the Construction Manager.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Functional Test: A test or tests in the presence of the Construction Manager to

demonstrate that the installed equipment, subsystem, or system meets manufacturer’s

installation and adjustment requirements and other requirements specified including,

but not limited to, noise, vibration, alignment, speed, proper electrical and mechanical

connections, thrust restraint, proper rotation, and initial servicing.

B. Performance Test: A test performed in the presence of the Construction Manager and

after any required functional test specified, to demonstrate and confirm that the

equipment and/or system meets the specified performance requirements.

C. Subsystem, System: The overall process (System), or portion thereof (Subsystem),

that performs a specific function. A system may consist of two or more subsystems as

well as two or more types of equipment.

1.4 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Specifications

1. Section 01110 - Summary of Work

2. Section 01325 - Progress Schedule

3. Section 01330 - Submittals

4. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment

5. Section 01783 - Operation and Maintenance Data

6. Section 01789 - Contract Closeout

7. Section 01820 - Training



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit name, address, telephone number, and resume of proposed field services

technicians at least 30 days in advance of the need for such services.

B. Submit for review in accordance with Section 01330 detailed testing procedures for

shop tests, field performance tests and final acceptance tests as specified in the various

equipment specification sections. Test procedures shall be submitted at least 30 days

in advance of the proposed test dates and shall include at least the following

information:

1. Name of equipment to be tested, including reference to specifications section

number and title.

2. Testing schedule of proposed dates and times for testing.

3. Outline specific assignment of the responsibilities of the Contractor and

manufacturers' factory representatives or field service personnel.

4. Detailed description of step-by-step equipment testing requirements, with

reference to appropriate standardized testing procedures and laboratory

analyses by established technical organizations (e.g., ASTM, AWWA,

Standard Methods, etc.).

C. Submit in accordance with Section 01330 copies of test reports upon completion of

specified shop, performance and acceptance tests. Test reports shall incorporate the

information provided in the test procedures submittals, modified to reflect actual

conduct of the tests and the following additional information:

1. Copy of all test data sheets and results of lab analyses.

2. Summary comparison of specified test and performance requirements vs actual

test results.

3. Should actual test results fail to meet specified test and performance

requirements, describe action to be taken prior to re-testing equipment.

D. Submit in accordance with Section 01330 copies of the manufacturer's field service

technician's report summarizing the results of his/her initial inspection, operation,

adjustment and pre-tests. The report shall include detailed descriptions and tabulations

of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative results obtained,

suggestions for precautions to be taken to ensure proper maintenance, and the

equipment supplier's Certificate of Installation.

E. Submit detailed start-up plan for each piece of equipment in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations and approved O&M manuals. Submit in accordance



with Section 01330 a detailed start-up plan that addresses detailed sequencing and

start-up for the entire plant and water conveyance to and from the plant. This plan

shall cover all chemicals, all equipment, all basins, and all related regulations and

limits.

F. Furnish Construction Manager with three copies of the following. When training is

specified, furnish the copies at least 10 working days prior to training.

1. "Certificate of Installation, Inspection and Start-up Services" by manufacturers'

representatives for each piece of equipment and each system specified,

certifying:

a. That equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturers'

recommendations, approved shop drawings and the Contract

Documents.

b. That nothing in the installation voids any warranty.

c. That equipment has been operated in the presence of the manufacturer's

representative.

d. That equipment, as installed, is ready to be operated by others.

2. Detailed report by manufacturers' representatives, for review by Construction

Manager of the installation, inspection and start-up services performed,

including:

a. Description of calibration and adjustments if made. Attach copy.

b. Description of any parts replaced and why replaced.

c. Type, brand name, and quantity of lubrication used, if any.

d. General condition of equipment.

e. Description of problems encountered, and corrective action taken.

3. Detailed reports by Construction Manager of the equipment acceptance tests

(Section 01450).

4. Any special instructions left with Contractor or Construction Manager.

G. Furnish Construction Manager with Certification of Calibration of all testing

equipment.

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall comply with this section, Section 01450 requirements, and the

specific equipment specifications for all equipment requiring specific start-up

procedures. The Contractor shall comply with all required Quality Control procedures

whether specified in the Contract Documents or recommended by the Manufacturer’s

published installation and start-up documentation, including provision of authorized

representatives to be present at site to inspect, check, test, and approve equipment



installation prior to startup; supervision of placing equipment in operation; and

provision of a written report that equipment has been properly installed and

lubricated, is in accurate alignment, is free from any undue stress imposed by

connecting lines or anchor bolts, and has been satisfactorily operated under full load

conditions.

1.7 PHYSICAL CHECKOUT

A. Contractor shall conduct a physical checkout of all new equipment to insure that

installation is proper and complete. The manufacturer’s authorized representative shall

perform checkout and certify the installation.

B. General activities include:

1. Cleaning.

2. Removing temporary protective coatings.

3. Flushing and replacing greases and lubricants, where required by manufacturer.

4. Lubrication: Synthetic oil is to be provided and used unless the original

equipment manufacturer states that they are not to be used.

5. Check shaft and coupling alignments and reset where needed.

6. Check and set motor, pump and other equipment rotation, safety interlocks, and

belt tensions.

7. Check and correct if necessary leveling plates, grout, bearing plates, anchor

bolts, fasteners, and alignment of piping which may put stress on pumping

equipment connected to it.

8. All adjustments required.

9. Provide initial filling of lubricants and all other required operating fluids.

1.8 INITIAL START-UP

A. Following physical checkout, Contractor shall perform initial start-up of component

equipment, under the supervision of the manufacturer’s representative.

B. Contractor shall provide fuel, electricity, water, filters, and other expendables required

for initial start-up of equipment unless otherwise specified.

C. Construction Manager and Owner may provide personnel to assist Contractor in the

initial start-up, but the prime responsibility for proper mechanical operation will



belong to Contractor. Manufacturers’ representatives shall be present during initial

start-up and operation unless otherwise acceptable to Construction Manager.

D. Start-up of either the heating or air conditioning systems is dependent upon the time

of year that the plant start-up is initiated. Contractor will be required to return at the

beginning of the next heating or air conditioning season (whichever is applicable) to

start the appropriate system.

1.9 MINIMUM EQUIPMENT PRE-START-UP REQUIREMENTS

A. Valves:

1. Inspect hand and automatic control valves, clean bonnets and stems.

2. Tighten packing glands to assure no leakage, but permit valve stems to operate

without galling.

3. Replace packing in valves to retain maximum adjustment after system is judged

complete.

4. Replace packing on any valve which continues to leak.

5. Remove and repair bonnets which leak.

6. Coat packing gland threads and valve stems with a surface preparation of

"Moly-Cote" or "Fel-Pro", after cleaning.

B. Verify that valve seats are free from foreign material, and are properly positioned for

intended service.

C. Tighten flanges and all other pipe joints after system has been placed in operation.

1. Replace gaskets, which show any sign of leakage after tightening.

D. Inspect all joints for leakage.

1. Promptly remake each joint that appears to be faulty; do not wait for rust to

form.

2. Clean threads on both parts, apply compound and remake joints.

E. After system has been placed in operation, clean strainers, drives, pockets, orifices,

valve seats and headers in fluid system, to assure freedom from foreign materials.

F. Remove rust, scale and foreign materials from equipment and renew defaced surfaces.



1.10 SYSTEM START-UP PROCEDURES

A. General: After all component pieces of equipment have been successfully checked

and started, a functional or system start-up test will be required for all process

equipment.

B. Function Tests: Specific functional tests shall be performed by the Contractor in

addition to the requirements of shop, field and other tests called for in the technical

specifications. Such tests shall demonstrate that the component equipment functions

as an entire system in accordance with the design requirements.

1. The function testing shall include the completion of the Field Testing Check

Lists and other testing requirements of Section 01450, Quality Control.

2. The Construction Manager, Engineer and Owner may witness these tests, at

their option.

3. Approval of the functional test package by the Construction Manager will be

made within two weeks of the test date. Incorporate minor comments on the

procedures, equipment, and personnel prior to testing. Major comments by the

Construction Manager will require a resubmission of the functional test

package and test data.

4. Submit within one week after completion of the tests, the following to the

Construction Manager for approval:

a. Completed test forms for each device or system tested on forms

approved prior to the test.

b. Completed certification, the content of which was approved prior to the

tests.

c. A written summary of testing, reporting on the results and summarizing

the entire procedure.

d. A schedule for retesting, if necessary, including changes to procedures,

testing devices, or personnel. Any retesting required to fulfill the intent

of the test requirements due to negligence, poor workmanship, or

products that fail to meet the Contract requirements shall be at no

additional cost to the Construction Manager or Owner.

1.11 CORRECTIONS TO THE WORK

A. Contractor shall correct any items of work failing to meet the specified requirements

at no cost to the Owner. Correct the nonconforming items by rework, modification or



replacement as directed by the Construction Manager. All corrected items shall be re-

tested at no additional cost.

1.12 FUNCTIONAL TEST

A. Once all associated infrastructure has been completed and individual system

functional tested completed, demonstrate functional testing for a minimum one hour

period of successful operation and then all facilities must also run for the performance

testing without interruption or failure as a prerequisite to Substantial Completion.

B. Complete the Field Testing Check Lists shown in Section 01450 and correct all

problems identified.

C. If other unrelated Work by other Contractors is incomplete and is necessary to

complete Functional Testing of any equipment or systems, Contractor shall reschedule

their test, within their Contract Times, at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.13 30-DAY PERFORMANCE TEST

A. Prior to Substantial Completion of the installation, the Contractor shall oversee a 30-

day, process performance test of the completed facility. During the 30-day process

performance test the completed construction shall be operated by Construction

Manager and Owner staff under the direction of Contractor and shall continuously

meet all performance requirements established by the Contract Documents and Project

requirements and shall operate without fault, failure or defect for a continuous period

of 30 calendar days. Individual equipment failures that are corrected within 24 hours

and do not prevent the entire Project from continuously satisfying the established

performance requirements shall not require the 30 day consecutive test to be re-started

unless the failure recurs.

1. Any failure of the complete Project construction to meet all performance

requirements, or any individual equipment failure that (a) requires more than 24

hours to correct, (b) recurs during the 24 hour correction period requiring

further correction, or (c) occurs more than once during the test period, shall

require the 30 day consecutive test period to be restarted. (NOTE: All O&M

manuals shall be approved and turned over and field training shall be

completed no sooner than 15 days prior to start of 30-day Performance Test).

B. Contractor Responsibilities

1. Review performance test requirements and procedures.

2. Correct any outstanding punchlist items prior to the test.



3. Provide specified start-up materials and operating supplies for the 30-day tests

duration.

4. Provide Supplier’s authorized representative to supervise placing equipment or

systems in operation and provide guidance during performance testing per

applicable specification section.

5. Provide to the Construction Manager a list of 24-hour “on call” representative

supervisory persons who will monitor the performance testing and serve as

liaison for the Construction Manager and Owner.

6. Provide the necessary craft or labor assistance, in the event of an emergency

equipment failure requiring immediate attention (emergency is defined as a

failure of function which precludes the further operation of a critical segment

of; or the whole of the work) with a response time of not less than four hours

from the time of notification.

7. Provide necessary Supplier’s representatives and operating supplies for

retesting systems that fail to pass the initial performance tests due to

deficiencies in products or workmanship at no additional cost to the

Construction Manager and Owner.

8. Provide to the Construction Manager a performance test report for approval

which details all testing conducted and any problems experienced and how

problems were corrected. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the

Performance Test Report prior to requesting project substation completion.

C. If other unrelated Work by other Contractors is incomplete and is necessary to

complete 30-Day Performance Testing of any equipment or systems, Contractor shall

reschedule their test, within their Contract Times, at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FUNCTIONAL TESTING

A. Field Test Participation: Provide competent and experienced technical representatives

of all equipment manufacturers and system suppliers as necessary to participate in

field testing of the equipment.

B. Trouble-Free Operation: Provide competent and experienced technical

representatives of all equipment manufacturers and system suppliers as necessary to

place the equipment in trouble-free operation after completion of start-up and field

tests.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 01722

LINES AND GRADES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. General

B. Surveys

C. Datum Plane

D. Protection of Survey Data

1.2 GENERAL

A. Construct all work in accordance with the lines and grades shown on the

Drawings. Assume full responsibility for keeping all alignment and grade.

1.3 SURVEYS

A. Control Points: Perform all survey, layout, and measurement work.

1. Keep Construction Manager informed, sufficiently in advance, of the times

and places at which survey, layout, and measurement work is to be

performed.

2. Provide an experienced survey crew including an instrument operator,

competent assistants, and any instruments, tools, stakes, and other materials

required to complete the survey, layout, and measurement of work

performed by the Contractor.

1.4 DATUM PLANE

A. All elevations indicated or specified refer to the Datum indicated on the Drawings

and are expressed in feet and decimal parts thereof, or in feet and inches.

Mean Low Water Datum (U.S.C. & G.S.) = City Datum - 1.36

Mean Sea Level Datum (U.S.C. & G.S.) = City Datum - 0.19

Zero of U.S. Weather Bureau Gauge = City Datum +2.15

B. Horizontal coordinates are based on the coordinate system indicated on the

Drawings.



1.5 PROTECTION OF SURVEY DATA

A. General: Safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, known property corners,

monuments, and bench marks made or established for the Work. Reestablish them

if disturbed, and bear the entire expense of checking reestablished marks and

rectifying work improperly installed.

B. Records: Keep neat and legible notes of measurements and calculations made in

connection with the layout of the Work. Furnish copies of such data to the

Construction Manager for use in checking the Contractor's layout. Data considered

of value to the Owner will be transmitted to the Owner by the Construction

Manager with other records on completion of the Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION



SECTION 01740

CLEANING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Final Cleaning

B. Final Inspection

1.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. Requirements: At the completion of work and immediately prior to final

inspection, clean the entire project as follows:

1. Thoroughly clean, sweep, wash, and polish all work and equipment provided

under the Contract, including finishes. Leave the structures and site in a

complete and finished condition to the satisfaction of the Construction

Manager.

2. Direct all subcontractors to similarly perform, at the same time, an

equivalent thorough cleaning of all work and equipment provided under

their contracts.

3. Remove all temporary structures and all debris, including dirt, sand, gravel,

rubbish and waste material.

4. Should the Contractor not remove rubbish or debris or not clean the

buildings and site as specified above, the Owner reserves the right to have

the cleaning done at the expense of the Contractor.

B. Employ experienced workers, or professional cleaners, for final cleaning.

C. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be

cleaned.

D. In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct final inspection of

sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and of concealed spaces.

E. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials

from sight-exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces. Polish surfaces so

designated to shine finish.



F. Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent

surfaces.

G. Remove snow and ice from access to buildings.

H. Vacuum clean all interior spaces, including inside cabinets.

I. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible. Do not

drop or throw materials from heights.

J. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from

cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly-painted surfaces.

K. Clean interior of all panel cabinets, pull boxes, and other equipment enclosures.

L. Wash and wipe clean all lighting fixtures, lamps, and other electrical equipment

which may have become soiled during installation.

M. Perform touch-up painting.

N. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of the grounds.

O. Remove erection plant, tools, temporary structures and other materials.

P. Remove and dispose of all water, dirt, rubbish or any other foreign substances.

1.3 FINAL INSPECTION

A. After cleaning is complete the final inspection may be scheduled. The inspection

will be done with the Owner and Construction Manager.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION



SECTION 01745

SHUTDOWNS AND TIE-INS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. General Requirements

B. Scheduling of Shutdown

C. Connections to Existing Mains, Sewers and Pipelines

D. Notice of Operational Impact (NOI)


A. Section 01110 - Summary of Work

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination Work: Perform all cutting, fitting or patching of the Work that may be

required to make the several parts thereof join in accordance with the Contract

Documents. Perform restoration with competent workmen skilled in the trade.

B. Coordination of Shutdowns: Coordinate shutdown of existing facilities with Owner.

Shutdowns may include, but not be limited to, connections, tie-ins, or anything that

will affect the Owner’s normal operations.

1.4 SCHEDULING OF SHUTDOWN

A. Connections to Existing Facilities: If any connections, replacement, or other work

requiring the shutdown of an existing facility is necessary, schedule such work at

times when the impact on the Owner's normal operation is minimal. Overtime, night

and weekend work without additional compensation from the Owner, may be required

to make these connections, especially if the connections are made at times other than

those specified.

B. Request for Shutdowns: Submit a final written request for each shutdown and tie-in

to the Owner and the Construction Manager at least seven City working days in

advance of any required shutdown. Written requests for each shutdown shall be made

by means of a Notice of Operational Impact (NOI). Section 1.6 below summarizes



requirements of NOIs. Contractor shall adjust the scheduled shutdown dates as

directed by the Owner and Construction Manager. After the shutdown schedule is

approved, the Contractor shall confirm the shutdown with the Owner 48 hours in

advance of the scheduled shutdown.

C. All shutdowns shall be performed during the typical low demand period from October

1 to March 31 unless otherwise directed by the Owner.

D. All shutdowns to existing plant and pumping facilities shall be kept to an absolute

minimum duration. Shutdowns and tie-ins to existing facilities and to new work to be

done under this construction contract, shall be done in a manner and at a time

approved by the Construction Manager. A detailed plan of each shutdown and tie-in

shall be submitted by the Contractor (including procedure and time table) for the

Construction Manager's approval. The detailed plan shall be submitted well in

advance of the date scheduled for starting such work to allow time for review by the

Construction Manager and for making revisions to the plan as may be required.

E. No shutdowns shall be made to any part of the existing facilities without the

permission of the Construction Manager.

F. To keep shutdowns to an absolute minimum time:

1. Do all preparatory work possible at each place of work prior to the specified

facility being taken out of service.

2. Have adequate personnel and equipment to work simultaneously, if required, at

more than one location of shutdown work.

3. Work continuously more than the regularly scheduled working day or work

double shifts, if directed by the Construction Manager.

4. Perform work at a time of day, night or on weekends when the least water

demand on the plant or pumping facility exists if directed by the Construction

Manager.

5. Use non-shrink grout or high early-strength concrete at those connection points

which may require new concrete work to be joined to existing.

G. Provide all temporary connections and/or controls to operate equipment which may be

necessary until final connections and/or controls are complete.

H. The "maximum permissible shutdown", as referred to hereinafter, shall be the total

number of consecutive hours or days that normal plant or pumping operation may be



interrupted for the performance of that portion of the work. Schedule a work force of

sufficient number and shifts to complete the work within the allowed time. If no

maximum permissible shutdown time is given, it shall be understood that it will be

kept at the absolute minimum duration required to perform the work and within the

time frame established by the approved Progress Schedule.

1.5 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING MAINS, SEWERS AND PIPELINES

A. Connections to existing piping shall be governed by the following conditions:

1. Locations of existing piping shown on the Plans should be considered

approximate.

2. The Contractor is responsible for determining exact location of existing piping

to which he shall make connections, or which he may disturb during earth-

moving operations, or which may be affected by his work in any way.

3. The Contractor shall coordinate the removal of any pipelines from service to fit

the needs of the Owner. This could require the performance of certain

connections at night.

4. The contents of all pipes and conduits to be removed, replaced, or relocated (or

dewatered for a specific purpose) shall be transferred to a suitable facility in a

manner approved by the Owner and Construction Manager through hoses or

piping, or by using pumps if hydraulic conditions so require them. The

Contractor shall provide the pumps, piping and hoses at no additional cost to

the Owner. No uncontrolled spillage of a pipe or conduit shall be permitted.

5. Cut pipes as shown or required with machines specifically designed for this

work.

6. Install temporary plugs to keep out all mud, dirt, water and debris.

7. Provide all necessary adapters, fittings, pipe and appurtenances required.

8. Linestops shall be installed for isolation as shown on the Drawings. Temporary

bypass pipelines shall be utilized to maintain continuous as shown on the

Drawings.

9. Connections to existing piping shall be carefully done to avoid damage to the

portion of the main remaining in place and shall be in accordance with the pipe

manufacturer’s recommendations.



10. Submit to the Construction Manager for approval a detailed, dimensioned

drawing and laying schedule showing laying lengths of all pipe, fittings, and

specials proposed for each connection prior to performing the work.

11. Scheduling connections to the existing piping shall be coordinated with the

Owner. The work shall be performed when water demands are not critical, as

directed by the Owner. Existing valves shall be operated by the Owner’s

personnel only.

12. The Contractor shall submit to the Construction Manager for approval a

detailed schedule of operations for each connection, at least fourteen (14) days

prior to beginning the work. After receiving approval, the Contractor shall

provide the Engineer with at least 48 hours notice prior to beginning work.

13. Provide as-built record drawings for all existing pipeline connections.

B. All work and costs associated with conditions governing connections to existing

piping shall be included with the prices bid for the various classified unit price and

lump sum Contract Items, and no separate payment will be made therefor.

1.6 NOTICE OF OPERATIONAL IMPACT (NOI)

A. Format: Written requests for shutdowns or other impacts on existing facilities shall be

accompanied by a NOI. An example of a NOI is attached at the end of this section.

The format of the NOI shall include:

1. Location

2. Activity

3. Impacts

4. Schedule

5. Procedure

6. Support Requirements

7. Personnel

B. Procedure for Development of Final NOI: Submit a draft NOI to the Construction

Manager at least three weeks prior to the written request for shutdown or for

notification of operational impacts on existing facilities. The draft NOI will include

the following sections prepared by the Contractor: Location, Activity, Impacts,

Schedule, Procedure, and Support Requirements. It will also include Contractor

Personnel proposed for the impact. Include supporting information with the draft NOI.

Examples of supporting information include Figures and Confined Space Entry plan.

C. The Owner and the Construction Manager will review the draft plan and provide

comments to the Contractor. Revise the draft NOI and re-submit for comment. Make



necessary submittals until an acceptable NOI is developed. The Construction Manager

will assist the Contractor to revise the NOI drafts.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Safeguards: Provide all shoring, bracing, supports, and protective devices necessary

to safeguard all work and existing facilities during shut downs and tie-in operations.

END OF SECTION

NOI EXAMPLE





SECTION 01783

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Submittals

B. Format and Contents

C. Payment

D. Asset Management Data Forms


A. Section 01330 - Submittals

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Construction Manager five

(5) hard copies and four (4) electronic copies on CD of the final Operation and

Maintenance Manuals for all equipment and associated control systems furnished

and installed under this Contract.

B. Submittal Schedule:

1. Prior to the installation of equipment, submit to the Construction Manager for

approval one (1) electronic draft copy (PDF format ONLY) of each set of

manuals with all specified material. The Construction Manager will retain the

draft copy. Make corrections as necessary and submit any missing material

for the manuals.

2. Prior to requesting the substantial completion, submit to the Construction

Manager, for approval, one (1) electronic copy (PDF format ONLY) of the

entire manual.

3. Revised copies of the preliminary Manual shall be submitted to the

Construction Manager at the time of training or thirty (30) days prior to

system start-up, whichever comes first.



4. Furnish to the Construction Manager, after final manual approval, all final

copies of the accepted manual configuration. All copies shall be submitted

prior to requesting certification of substantial completion.

1.4 FORMAT AND CONTENTS

A. Provide space for a reduced set of record Contract Drawings, size approximately 11

by 17 inches and folded to 8-1/2 by 11 inches and an electronic copy on CD.

Drawings and CD will be furnished by the Construction Manager. Provide space in

the manual for a reduced set of Contractor’s As-Built Drawings, size approximately

11 by 17 inches and folded to 8-1/2 by inches.

B. One copy of all approved and as-built working drawings and diagrams for all

equipment furnished. The working drawings and diagrams shall be reduced to either

8-1/2 by 11 inches or to 11 inches in the vertical dimension and as near as practicable

to 17 inches in the horizontal dimension. Such sheets shall be folded to 8-1/2 by 11

inches.

C. One copy of all specified material certifications, test data, curves and test reports on

8-1/2 by 11-inch size paper or 11 inches maximum vertical dimension by

approximately 17 inches in the horizontal dimension. Such sheets shall be folded to

8-1/2 by 11 inches.

D. One copy of each manufacturer's installation and storage instructions, technical

bulletins, lubrication and maintenance instructions, and spare parts lists. This

material shall include such printed matter as diagrams, prints and drawings

necessary to provide full information required for the proper storage, installation,

operation, maintenance, and repair of the equipment and the ordering of spare parts,

except for equipment that may be furnished by the Owner. All instruction material

and parts lists shall be furnished on 8-1/2 by 11 inch commercially printed or typed

forms. Such forms shall include equipment name, serial number, and other

identifying references. The manual shall contain only that information which applies

to the equipment provided. Unnecessary information, advertising and theoretical

data not directly pertaining to the equipment being supplied shall not be included in

the manual.

E. One valve schedule, giving the valve number, location, fluid and fluid destination

for each valve to be provided, prepared on 8-1/2 by 11-inch printed or typed forms

as specified. All valves in the same piping system shall be grouped together in the

schedule. A sample of the valve numbering system to be used will be furnished by

the Construction Manager. Valve numbers may include up to a six digit alpha-

numeric designation.

F. List of final electrical relay settings and control and alarm contact settings and device

calibration reports shall be included in a separate section of the manual.



G. Calibration reports for all instrumentation and control equipment and devices

including but not limited to pressure, level, temperature, and flow transmitters and

switches. The manual shall include a master list of equipment and devices with the

calibrated range of operation, set-points, trip set-points, and rest set-points shown in

the tables.

H. Provide the manual with the following certifications and equipment data summaries:

1. Equipment Data Summary Sheet (Acquisition) (see attached form)

2. Equipment Data Summary – (Disposals, Surplus or Transfers) (see attached

form)

3. Preventive Maintenance Summary (see attached form)

4. Certification of installation, inspections and start-up services (see attached

form)

5. Certification of post start-up services (see attached form)

6. Certification of instruction services (see attached form)

I. Each copy of the manual shall be assembled in one or more binders, each with title

page, typed table of contents and heavy section dividers with copper reinforced holes

and numbered plastic index tabs. Each manual shall be divided into sections

paralleling the equipment specifications sections. Binders shall be 3-ring, hard-

backed. All data shall be punched for binding, and composition and printing shall

be arranged so that punching does not obliterate any data. The cover and binding

edge of each manual shall have the project title, Division designation and manual

title printed thereon, all as furnished and approved by the Construction Manager.

J. Where more than one binder is required, they shall be labeled Volume 1, Volume 2,

and so on. The table of contents for the entire set, identified by volume number, shall

appear in each binder.

K. CD-ROM Based Documentation: Provide three (3) complete sets of manufacturer’s

documentation on CD-ROM media for all equipment, including operation and

maintenance information, drawings, and catalogue literature.

1.5 PAYMENT

The costs of the Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be included in the contract

item for all equipment and associated control systems furnished and no separate

payment will be made therefor.



1.6 ASSET MANAGEMENT DATA FORMS

A. The operation and maintenance manual shall include completed asset management

data and maintenance data forms for all tangible assets for those assets where:

1. Maintenance is recommended

2. Assets have a value greater than $1,000

3. Assets are complete and useable, and perform a distinct function

independently.

4. Assets have a useful life of 2 or more years are controllable tangible items.

Examples of the Contractor asset management data and maintenance data forms are

furnished at the end of this section.

B. The Owner will provide the Contractor with blank data collection forms. Examples

of the form are attached at the end of this section. The Contractor shall complete

forms including all items.

C. The Contractor shall provide a completed form for each new equipment element.

D. The Contractor shall also provide a completed form for each equipment element

with a salvage cost of $1,000 or more that is removed from the facility by this

Contract. All assets that are removed due to impairment (physical damage or

changed in manner or duration of use) and cannot be salvaged shall be identified and

the impairment shall be assessed.

The Contractor shall provide an Excel spreadsheet list of itemized assets acquired,

delivered, installed and removed. The impairment and salvage cost shall be included

in the spreadsheet for removed items.

E. The Contractor shall provide an Excel spreadsheet list of itemized assets disposed,

transferred or surplus. Any asset identified as stolen shall require a Police Report.

1.7 SCHEDULE OF ASSET VALUES

A. For each asset listed, provide a constructed cost which will include an allocation of

construction activities including but not limited to, demolition, sitework, specialties,

materials, labor, general conditions, and overhead and profit associated with the

construction of the asset.

B. The combined value of the assets will equal the bid price for the project and will

require adjustments as necessary due to change orders.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL CHECK LIST

A. The Operation and Maintenance manual shall include the information shown in the

check list at the end of this section.





Asset Management

Equipment Data Summary (Acquisition)

Project Name:

City of Richmond Project Financial Work Order Number:

Equipment Name:

Equipment Description:

Equipment Location (Building, Floor and Room Number/Name):

Specification Reference:

Manufacturer

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Number Supplied:

Location/Service:

Model No: Serial No(s):

Type:

Size/Speed/Capacity/Range (as applicable):

Power Requirement (Phase/Volts/Hertz):

Local Representative

Name:

Address:



Telephone:

Date of Manufacture:

Installation Date:

Expected Equipment Life (years):

Warranty Period (From/To):

Equipment Cost:

Total Installed Equipment Cost:

Tangible or Intangible Item:

Project DPU Drawing Name & Number:

City of Richmond Financial Fixed Asset Number Assigned:





Asset Management

Equipment Data Summary – (Disposals, Surplus or Transfers)

Project Name:



DPU Asset ID Number:

Equipment Name:


Equipment Location (Building, Floor and Room Number/Name):

Manufacturer

Location Description:

Asset Service provided:

Model No:

Serial No:

Type:

Size/Speed/Capacity/Range (as applicable):

Power Requirement (Phase/Volts/Hertz):

Condition:

Condition Assessment Method:

Date of Condition Assessed:

Asset Trade-In (Yes/No):

Trade-In Value:

Method (Disposal, Transfer, or Surplus):



Reason no longer in Service (Retirement, Transfer, Disposal, Theft/Stolen/Lost, Destroyed,

Scrapped, Donated, Sold, Obsolete, Surplus, Other (Recycled or Dissembled)):

Disposal Impairment reason:

• Physical damage to the asset

• Obsolete due to technological advancement

• New regulations (not used in this form)

Impairment

• Permanent or Temporary

Surplus reason:

• Excess of useful life

• Lack of need

• Obsolescence

• Wear, damage, or deterioration

• Excess cost of maintenance

Salvage Value:

Asset Junk (scrap, rubbish, or unwanted items by the City)

• Damaged items judged unsafe or too costly to repair

Transfer:

Transfer Entity Information:

COR (Yes/No):

Department:

Name:

Company:

Address:

Contract Information:

Receipt Provided:

Group Asset? (Yes/No):

Date of Manufacture:

Installation Date:

Estimated Asset Age:

Expected Equipment Life (years):

Warranty Period (From/To):

Estimated Equipment Cost:

Tangible or Intangible Item:

Project DPU Drawing Name & Number:



CITY OF RICHMOND VIRGINIA


EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION, TESTING

AND INSTRUCTION

Project Name:



DPU Asset ID Number:

Equipment Name:


I______________________________________________,Authorized representative of

(Print Name)

________________________________________________________________________

(Print Manufacturer's Name)

hereby CERTIFY that______________________________________________________

(Print equipment name and model with serial No.)

installed for the subject project [has] [have] been installed in a satisfactory manner, [has]

[have] been satisfactorily tested, [is] [are] ready for operation, and that City assigned

operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication, and care of

the unit[s] on Date: ________ Time: _______.

CERTIFIED BY: ___________________________________________ DATE: _________

(Signature of Manufacturer's Representative)



CITY OF RICHMOND VIRGINIA


Asset Management

Preventive Maintenance Summary

Equipment Name:

Location:

Manufacturer:

Address:

Telephone:

Model No: Serial No:

Maintenance Task Lubricant/Part D W M Q SA A

O&M Manual

Reference

NOTES:



Operation and Maintenance Manual Check List

1. Equipment operation and maintenance information

2. Approved and as-built working drawings and diagrams

3. Material certification, test data, test curves, and test reports

4. Manufacturers installation and storage instructions

5. Valve schedule

6. Electrical relay settings

7. Electrical control and alarm settings

8. Electrical interconnection wiring diagrams (point-to-point diagrams)

9. I&C equipment calibration reports

10. I&C equipment lists with calibrated signal ranges and trip and reset set-points data

11. PLC final application program

12. PLC system operational profiles

13. GDP, HMI and OMI screens

14. PLC system logic diagrams and completed point-to-point check lists

15. Short circuit and coordination study

16. Warranty start and completion dates

17. Asset Management data summary (forms)

18. Preventive Maintenance summary (forms)

19. Certification of installation, inspection and start-up services

20. Certification of post start-up services

21. Certification of instructional services

22. Completed and approved field testing check list

23. Approved functional testing reports

24. Approved 30-day performance test reports

25. Other information and data required in the technical specification sections

END OF SECTION



SECTION 01789

CONTRACT CLOSE OUT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Submittals

B. Record Drawings

C. Warranties and Bonds

D. Spare Parts, Special Tools, and Maintenance Products

E. Substantial Completion

F. Releasing Completed Work for Use

G. Final Cleaning

H. Final Inspection

I. Certificate of Final Completion.


A. Section 01450 - Quality Control

B. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment

C. Section 01783 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Certificates: Prior to conducting the project performance test,

submit manufacturer's certificates confirming that materials and products have

been properly installed and are ready to be placed in service.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Prior to conducting the project performance

test, submit all operation and maintenance manuals and data required for proper

operation and maintenance of products and equipment.



C. Project Record Documents: Project record documents required by this Section

shall be submitted prior to beginning the Substantial Completion Inspection.

D. Prior to Final Inspection:

1. Provide submittals to the Owner that are required by governing or other

authorities.

2. Submit Bonds, Warranties, Guarantees and similar documents.

3. Submit spare parts in accordance with this section.

4. Submit evidence of compliance with requirement of governing authorities.

E. Upon receipt of the Certificate of Final Completion submit Final Application for

Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum

remaining due.

F. Submit to the Owner, with the Final Application for Payment, a sworn affidavit

that all labor, service, materials, and Subcontractors have been paid and that there

are no suits pending in connection with the Work done or labor and materials

furnished under the Contract.

1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. At the site keep and maintain one record copy of the following Contract

Documents, reference documents and all technical documents.

1. Drawings.

2. Specifications.

3. Addenda.

4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.

5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.

6. Manufacturer's instructions for assembly, installation, and adjusting.

B. Using drafting symbols and standards consistent with the original documents,

annotate Contract Drawings neatly and clearly in color to show all changes made

during the construction period.

C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.

D. On Record Drawings, legibly mark each item to record actual construction,

including:

1. Location, size and material for piping, concealed and exposed.

2. Size and routing of conduits.



3. Size and location of pull boxes and number and type of conductors installed

therein.

4. Changes in product and equipment dimensions, structural openings,

foundations.

5. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in

construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the work.

6. Measure horizontal location of building, concrete pads, fencing and other

project facilities. Locations shall be referenced to Virginia State Plane

Coordinate System.

7. Provide field measurement location and pipe elevation drawings for all

outside pipelines, valves, and pipe fittings on 8-1/2 x 11 inch sheets. Provide

facility locations in Virginia State Plane Coordinates and field measurement

reference to visible and accessible site features.

8. Field changes of dimensions and details.

9. Details not on original drawings.

10. Any other variations between the work actually provided and that shown on

the Contract Drawings.

11. GPS coordinates for new underground pipe, fittings, and valves.

12. Change Order Work.

E. Annotated drawings are to be made available to Construction Manager for

reference at all times. Provide annotated drawings to be reviewed monthly at the

time of payment application. Provide copies of field measurement drawings to

Construction Manager showing the GPS coordinates and site field measurements

and elevations for new underground pipe, fitting and valves that have been placed

into service or operation. Contractor partial payments will be withheld if this data

is not provided within four weeks of the new work being placed into service to

perform its design functions. Copies so provided will be retained by the

Construction Manager. Should the annotated drawings be found not current with

the work, an additional retainage of one percent of the total application amount

will be deducted from the monthly payment. Such additional retainage will be

released in future payments if the drawings are brought current.

F. Contractor to provide final as-built site survey drawings. The final site survey

drawings shall show all permits requirements including but not limited to:



1. All the storm tops/rims, pipe sizes, inverts, and slopes so that the City can

see that they were constructed per the design plans.

2. The as-built record drawings shall also show all storm water quantity/quality

devices.

3. Surveyed as-built dimensions of storm water ponds topography shall be

provided. Surveyor to provide certification of the pond volume is within

reasonable tolerance of the design plans. In certain instances where the pond

is not constructed within reasonable tolerance of the design drawings, the

Engineer may be required to review the pond routing with the as-built

volume to verify the pond meets the design intent and requirements. Any

costs associated with the Engineer’s review and recalculation of the pond

volume will be at the Contractor’s expense.

4. Certified site survey at 1 inch = 50 ft scale or larger but not greater than 1

inch = 20 ft scale, on reproducible 24-inch by 36-inch sheets and electronic

format, indicating the building corners, sidewalks, paved areas and location

of all above-ground structures. The site survey shall include both new and

existing facilities and shall be conducted from a common horizontal control

point. These drawings shall be included with, and made a part of, the project

record documents.

5. Certified topographical surveys at 1 inch = 50 ft scale or larger but not

greater than 1 inch = 20 ft on reproducible 24-inch by 36-inch sheets and

electronic format with 1-foot contour intervals. The certified topographical

site survey shall be in accordance with national map accuracy standards for

the scale selected.

6. Contractor shall submit computer generated drawing files in AutoCAD 2018

(or later) format on CD-ROM. All entries shall be placed on layers named to

describe the entity being mapped. All elevation information in the AutoCAD

file shall be in an appropriate three-dimensional format.

7. Provide top and bottom structure elevations, pipe invert(s) and rim

elevations on manholes and all structures and buildings.

G. At completion of the Contract and before final payment is made, deliver to the

Construction Manager one set of clearly readable, reproducible Contract Drawings

reflecting all changes made during construction. Mark each drawing "Record

Drawing" in ink. Include copies of the Record Drawings in the Operation and

Maintenance Manuals. Also provide a complete set of the field measured pipeline,

fitting and valve location drawings and as-built site survey drawings.



1.5 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

A. Prior to Final Inspection deliver to the Owner the original and one copy of all

bonds, warranties, guarantees and similar documents, including those customarily

provided by manufacturers and suppliers which cover a period greater than one

year. Show Owner as beneficiary of these documents. Begin warranty periods from

the Date of Substantial Completion or the Date of Final Completion when

Substantial Completion is not required by the Owner.

1.6 SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS, AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS

A. Furnish spare parts in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

Arrange for delivery of these items to the Owner immediately prior to final

inspection of the work. Provide to the Construction Manager an itemized list on

delivery of each spare part or special tool which matches the identification tag

attached to each item. At this time, the Owner will inventory the spare parts and

special tools. If the inventory is not complete or some items are damaged, provide

the missing items and replace damaged items.

B. No spare parts or special tools will be accepted by the Owner until notice of final

inspection unless the Construction Manager expressly requests the advance

delivery of items. When so requested, deliver such items to the Owner. Deduct

items delivered in advance from the inventory and furnish the Construction

Manager with signed receipts for items delivered in advance along with the final

inventory list.

C. Furnish special tools and lubricating equipment in accordance with this Section

and individual specification sections. Special tools are considered to be those tools

which, because of their limited use, are not normally available but which are

necessary for maintenance of particular equipment.

D. For each type of equipment provided under this Contract, furnish a complete set of

all special tools which may be needed for the adjustment, operation, maintenance,

and disassembly of such equipment. Furnish only tools of high grade, smooth

forged alloy tool steel. Manufacture grease guns of the lever type.

E. The Contractor shall provide an enclosed weatherproof and lighted facility for

storage of spare parts and special tools during the construction period.

F. Store and be responsible for spare parts and special tools until acceptance by the

Owner.

G. Deliver all items to a location as directed by the Construction Manager.

H. Include the cost of all spare parts and special tools and the storage and delivery

thereof in the Contract Item for each material and equipment item. No separate

payment will be made therefor.



1.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. When the Contractor considers the entire work sufficiently completed in

accordance with the Contract Documents so that the work may be beneficially

occupied for the purposes for which it was intended, the Contractor shall, in

writing to the Owner and Construction Manager, certify that the entire work is

substantially complete and request that the Construction Manager issue a

Certificate of Substantial Completion. Within a reasonable time thereafter, the

Owner, the Contractor and Construction Manager shall make an inspection of the

work to determine the status of completion. If the Construction Manager does not

consider the work substantially complete, the Construction Manager will notify the

Contractor in writing giving his reasons therefor. If the Construction Manager

considers the work substantially complete, the Construction Manager will prepare

and deliver to the Owner a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix

the date of Substantial Completion. The certificate shall include the project

equipment and any special warranty periods that apply to the project work. There

shall be attached to the certificate a list of tentative items to be completed or

corrected before final payment. This list shall be identified as the PUNCH LIST

OF OPEN ITEMS and may be added to at the Owner's discretion for work not

completed in conformance with the Contract Documents. This tentative PUNCH

LIST OF OPEN ITEMS shall be cost loaded as determined by the Owner based on

the estimated value of work involved to complete the associated items. This

retained value shall be reduced monthly as a basis for payment to the Contractor

based on the difference between outstanding retained value during the invoice

period and the value of the PUNCH LIST OF OPEN ITEMS provided record

drawings have been received in accordance with the General Conditions of the

Contract. No payment made therefor shall be less than one thousand dollars

($1,000.00) except for final payment. When it has been determined by the Owner

that all items identified in the PUNCH LIST OF OPEN ITEMS are complete in

accordance with the Contract Documents, final payment shall be made.

B. Inspection

1. General: The work shall be subjected to continuous inspection and in

addition to the formal Substantial Completion inspections for each Phase of

the work requiring Substantial Completion. Each inspection shall be

performed by the Contractor in the presence of the Construction Manager.

The inspection shall be conducted in accordance with the requirement of

Section 01450 - Quality Control and field testing check lists completed for

all equipment and systems provided. All required labor, materials,

equipment, instruments, lubricants and incidentals necessary to perform

these inspections shall be furnished by the Contractor. Before proceeding to

the next inspection, all discrepancies and deficiencies observed during each

inspection shall be noted and corrected and, if directed by the Construction

Manager, the inspection shall be rescheduled and repeated at no additional

cost to the Owner.



a. The Contractor shall not request the Substantial Completion

inspection until after the 30-day performance test has been completed

and the test report approved by the Construction Manager.

b. Refer to individual specification sections for specific requirements for

placing equipment and systems in operation.

c. Notification: When the Contractor considers the Work ready for each

inspection, the Contractor shall so notify the Construction Manager in

writing for each inspection. Each inspection shall be performed by the

Construction Manager within 10 days after receipt of the request.

2. Substantial Completion Inspection:

a. Perform a SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION to fully

demonstrate to the Construction Manager that all individual project

components function as required by the Contract Documents and that

all systems are internally coordinated, as well as coordinated with

other systems. In addition, it shall demonstrate that all major site

work has been brought to final configurations and restoration

initiated.

b. All equipment and system functional and performance tests shall be

completed and their test reports provided from the Contractor and

approved by the Construction Manager prior to the Substantial

Completion Inspection being scheduled.

c. The Construction Manager will prepare a LIST OF DEFICIENT

ITEMS to be accomplished prior to performing the Final Inspection.

1.8 RELEASING COMPLETED WORK FOR USE

A. It is the intent of these Specifications that all newly constructed Work be placed in

use as rapidly as it can be constructed, inspected and accepted and placed in

service for its intended use. Arrange operations to permit access to all such parts of

the Work by the Owner and other contractors for the Owner.

B. Taking over of parts of the Work for operation before completion of the entire

Contract shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility for proper integrated

operations of all parts of the Work, nor shall it act to relieve him of any

responsibilities under the Contract except as follows:

1. When parts of the Work are accepted by the Construction Manager in

advance of the date of acceptance of all the Work and such Work is taken

over for use by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide maintenance on



Work taken over for use by the Owner. The warranty for this Work shall

begin at the date of Substantial Completion of the entire project.

2. The Construction Manager will issue certificates describing the Work which

is taken over for use by the Owner and the Contractor shall furnish all

maintenance and guarantee information of manufacturers or suppliers that is

applicable to the Work being taken over for use.

1.9 FINAL CLEANING

A. Removal of Contractor's Materials: At the conclusion of the Work, promptly take

away all erection plant, tools, temporary structures and materials belonging to the

Contractor. Remove and promptly dispose of all water, dirt, rubbish or any other

foreign substances.

B. Cleaning Materials and Equipment: Thoroughly clean all materials installed and

clean all existing structures, materials or equipment soiled during construction and

deliver over such materials and equipment undamaged in a bright, clean and

polished condition.

1.10 FINAL INSPECTION

A. When the Contractor considers the entire work complete in accordance with the

Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, in writing to the Owner and

Construction Manager, certify that the entire work is complete and request that the

Construction Manager issue a Certificate of Final Completion for all work

included in the Contract Documents. Within ten calendar days thereafter, the

Owner, the Contractor and Construction Manager shall make a FINAL

INSPECTION of the work to determine the status of completion. If the

Construction Manager considers the work complete, the Construction Manager

will prepare and deliver to the Owner a Certificate of Final Completion which shall

fix the Date of Final Completion for all work identified in the Contract

Documents.

B. If the Construction Manager does not consider the work complete, the

Construction Manager will issue to the Contractor a LIST OF DEFICIENT ITEMS

to be completed in accordance with the Contract Documents to achieve Final

Completion. This list identified as the LIST OF DEFICIENT ITEMS may be

added to at the Owner's discretion for work not completed in conformance with the

contract documents and shall include all incomplete work items previously

identified in the LIST OF DEFICIENT ITEMS issued with the Certificate of

Substantial Completion for the entire work.

C. The LIST OF DEFICIENT ITEMS shall be cost loaded as determined by the

Owner based on the estimated value of work involved to complete the associated

items. This retained value shall be reduced monthly as a basis for payment to the

Contractor based on the difference between the outstanding retained value during



the invoice period and the value of the LIST OF DEFICIENT ITEMS provided

record drawing have been received in accordance with the General Conditions of

the Contract. No payment made therefor shall be less than one thousand dollars

($1,000.00) except for final payment. When the Contractor verifies to the Owner's

and Construction Manager's satisfaction that all items identified in the LIST OF

DEFICIENT ITEMS have been corrected in accordance with the Contract

Documents final payment shall be made. This inspection shall demonstrate that all

elements of the project are ready to be placed in operation and all work has been

completed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.11 CERTIFICATE OF FINAL COMPLETION

A. The Work will be deemed complete as of the date set by the Contractor if, upon

Final Inspection, the Construction Manager determines that no further work,

physical or otherwise, is required to complete the Work in accordance with the

Contract Documents. Upon determination that all Work is completed, the

Construction Manager will issue a Certificate of Final Completion. This Certificate

of Final Completion shall serve as Contractor’s authorization to generate a

requisition for final payment. The Certificate of Final Completion shall include the

project, equipment and any special warranty periods.

B. However, if such inspection, in the opinion of the Construction Manager, reveals

items of Work still to be performed, the Contractor shall promptly perform them

and then request a reinspection. In the event the Construction Manager then

determines that the Work is complete, the date of final completion shall be deemed

to be the last day of such reinspection.

C. The Owner may at its sole discretion issue a Certificate of Final Completion for

signature by the Owner, Construction Manager and Contractor; following the

expiration of the time fixed for completion in the Contract or the time for

completion as modified through a change order to the contract even though such

items of work as identified in the LIST OF DEFICIENT ITEMS are not complete

in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any items identified on the LIST OF

DEFICIENT ITEMS which have not been completed in accordance with the

contract documents within the time fixed for completion in the Contract or the time

for completion as modified through a change order to the contract shall be

identified on the Certificate of Final Completion as incomplete and shall be

credited to the Owner based solely on the Owner's determination of the cost of

such items; and, an adjustment to the total contract value shall be made via a

change order to the contract at the Owner's discretion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACT CLOSE OUT CHECK LIST

A. Table 01789-1 is a contract close out check list that will be used to coordinate

contract close out activities.

END OF SECTION

August 2019 Byrd Park Reservoir Zone 1N Supply 01789-11 Main and Inlet Valve Replacement

Table 01789-1

PROJECT CLOSE OUT CHECK LIST

Item Requirement Date

to CM

Date

Approved

Date

Completed

Date Provided

to City

Coded

Notes

1. Functional Testing Report 1

2. Training 2

3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

4. Manufacturer’s Certification of Proper Installation

5. Spare Parts Transfer Log

6. Completed Building and Other Permits

7. Building Occupancy Certificate

8. Performance Testing Report

9. Tapes, Pictures and Videos

10. Substantial Completion

11. Preliminary Punch List

12. Final Punch List

13. Contractor Notice of Completion

14. Final Inspection

15. Final Completion

16. Record Drawings

17. Final MBE-3 Form

18. Final Payment Request for Close Out

19. Project Close Out Recommendation (CM)

August 2019 Byrd Park Reservoir Zone 1N Supply 01789-12 Main and Inlet Valve Replacement

PROJECT CLOSE OUT CHECK LIST

Item Requirement Date

to CM

Date

Approved

Date

Completed

Date Provided

to City

Coded

Notes

20. Project Close Out Recommendation (Engineer)

21. Miscellaneous Close Out Support Information

22. Release of Claims from Contractor

23. Final Affidavit of Payment of Claims

24. Final Affidavit of Release of Liens

25. Contractor Performance Evaluation

26. Close Out Letter to City Procurement Services

27. Contract Close Out Notice

Coded Notes:

1. Including field inspection check lists for all work

2. Including Certificate of Instructional Services



SECTION 01820

TRAINING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Submittals

B. Training

C. Hours of Training

D. Training Outline

E. Certificate

F. Substantial Completion

G. Equipment Use

H. Forms

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit training outline and other information described for approval at

least 45 days prior to the proposed date for the training sessions. Provide the

training in two phases with phase one provided before the work is started up and

tested and phase two provided after the work has been in service for 6 months.

Also provide additional training at the end of the warranty period.

B. Credentials: Submit for approval credentials of equipment manufacturer

representatives who are to be course instructors. Submit credentials at least 30 days

prior to a proposed training session.

C. Training Manual: Provide a proposed training manual including the topics

presented in this Section shall be submitted for approval.

1. Identify specific components and procedures in the proposed training

outline.



2. Detail specific training topics. Describe "hands-on" demonstrations planned

for the training.

3. Reference training aids to be utilized in the training (i.e. video tapes, slides,

transparencies) and attach where applicable.

4. Include training materials.

5. Indicate the duration of each training segment.

1.3 TRAINING

A. Scheduling: Verify scheduling with the Owner at least 14 days prior to beginning

training sessions.

B. Number of Copies: For each training class, provide instructional material for at

least fifteen attendees plus five extra copies, plus duplicate copies of all audio-

visual aids utilized during each training course.

C. The Contractor shall bear all costs of the training program. Salaries, fringe

benefits, payroll taxes, and unemployment compensation costs for City personnel

will be borne by the Owner. The cost of training shall be included in the lump sum

Contract Item for which each item of equipment or system is included and no

separate payment will be made therefor.

D. Taping of Training: Provide audio and color recording of all classroom instruction

sessions, including manufacturers' representatives' hand-on equipment instruction

and classroom sessions.

1. Use only DVD or other alternative digital format, suitable for playback on

equipment commercially available in the United States.

2. Include all of the manufacturer's training session on each DVD.

3. DVDs shall be produced by a qualified, professional recording company,

unless the Contractor demonstrates satisfactory skills acceptable to the

Owner.

4. Furnish Owner with two (2) complete sets of DVDs fully indexed and

cataloged with printed labels stating sessions and dates taped.

5. Owner to furnish DVD playback equipment.

E. Provide the services of knowledgeable, technically competent, factory trained

specialists to instruct City personnel in the operation and maintenance of the



equipment and system components listed in this Section. The Owner will furnish

training classroom space.

1. Coordinate utility services with the Owner, with a minimum of 30 days prior

notice.

2. Provide a combination of classroom and "hands-on" instruction designed to

completely familiarize operating and maintenance personnel with the

systems theory, standard operating procedures, safety features and

emergency procedures, and general maintenance of all components.

3. Conduct all training during regular hours on weekdays at a time required by

the Owner. Anticipate at least one nighttime training session for each

equipment and system listed below.

1.4 HOURS OF TRAINING

A. The equipment and systems for which training is to be given are indicated in the

Specifications.

B. Length of Training: The minimum lengths of specified training sessions are for

actual classroom time, excluding additional time required for preparation and lag-

time between sessions.

1.5 TRAINING OUTLINE

A. Equipment Operation

1. Describe equipment's operating (process) function.

2. Describe equipment's fundamental operating principles and dynamics.

3. Identify equipment's mechanical, electrical and electronic components and

features.

4. Identify all support equipment associated with the operation of the subject

equipment.

B. Detailed Component Description

1. Identify and describe in detail each component's function.

2. Where applicable, group related components into subsystems.



3. Identify, and describe in detail, equipment safety features and control

interlocks.

C. Equipment Preventive Maintenance

1. Describe preventive maintenance inspection procedures required to perform

and inspect the equipment in operation, and spot potential trouble symptoms

(anticipate breakdowns).

2. Outline recommended routine lubrication and adjustments (preventive

maintenance).

D. Equipment Troubleshooting

1. Define recommended systematic troubleshooting procedures.

2. Provide component specific troubleshooting checklists.

3. Describe applicable equipment testing and diagnostic procedures to facilitate

troubleshooting.

E. Equipment Corrective Maintenance

1. Describe recommended equipment preparation requirements.

2. Identify and describe the use of special tools required for maintenance of the

equipment.

3. Describe component removal/installation and disassembly/assembly

procedures. Perform “hands on” disassembly/assembly of common

disassembly/assemble procedures for the equipment.

4. Perform “hands-on” demonstrations of at least two common corrective

maintenance repairs.

5. Describe recommended measuring instruments and procedures, and provide

instruction on interpreting alignment measurements, as appropriate.

6. Define recommended torquing, mounting, calibration, and alignment

procedures and settings, as appropriate.

7. Describe recommended procedures to check/test equipment following

corrective repair.



1.6 CERTIFICATE

A. Provide "Certificate of Instructional Services" signed by Construction Manager

and equipment representative, verifying that training has been accomplished to

satisfaction of all parties. Use form provided in this section and furnish

Construction Manager with three copies.

1.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Training provided by manufacturers' representative, Construction Manager and

Owner does not constitute substantial completion.

1.8 EQUIPMENT USE

A. Use of equipment for training will not void manufacturers' or contract warranties.

1.9 FORMS

A. Complete and submit three copies of the following form to Construction Manager

upon completion of training as required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION



CERTIFICATE OF INSTRUCTIONAL SERVICES

Project

Equipment

Specification Section

Contract

I hereby certify the equipment Manufacturers' Representative has instructed Owner's

personnel in startup operation and maintenance of this equipment as required in the Contract

Documents.

MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE

Signature Date

Name (print)

Title

Representing

CONTRACTOR

Signature Date

Name (print)

Title

CONSTRUCTION MANAGER

Signature Date

Name (print)

Title

COMMENTS:



SECTION 01900

SPECIAL PROJECT PROVISIONS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Subcontracts and Assignments

B. Contractor's Employees

C. Clarification Requests

D. Area of Operations

E. Work Adjacent to Existing Facilities

F. Existing Facilities Shown on Contract Drawings

G. Relocation of Existing Facilities

H. Diagrammed Pipelines

I. Photographs or Video Recording

J. Permits


A. Section 01325 - Progress Schedule

B. Section 01330 - Submittals

C. Section 01789 - Contract Close Out

1.3 SUBCONTRACTS AND ASSIGNMENTS

A. If the Owner finds that the proposed subcontractor is qualified, the Contractor will be

notified in writing. The Owner may revoke approval of any subcontractor when such

subcontractor evidences an unwillingness or inability to perform his work in strict

accordance with these Contract Documents. Notice of such revocation of approval

will be given in writing to the Contractor.

B. The Contractor shall promptly, upon request, file with the Owner a conformed copy of

the subcontract. The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all

subcontracts relative to the work to bind subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms

of these Contract Documents, insofar as applicable to the work of subcontractors, and

to give the Contractor the same power as regards terminating any subcontract that the

Owner may exercise over the Contractor under provisions of these Contract

Documents.

C. Each subcontract and each lower tier subcontract shall include appropriate provisions

to bind all subcontracting tiers to the requirements of this Contract.



D. No assignment will receive approval unless the instrument of assignment contains a

clause to the effect that it is agreed that the funds to be paid the assignee under the

assignment are subject to a prior lien for services rendered or materials supplied for

the performance of the work called for in the Contract in favor of all persons, firms, or

corporations rendering such services or supplying such materials.

1.4 CONTRACTOR'S EMPLOYEES

A. Character and Competency: The Contractor and his subcontractors shall employ upon

all parts of the work herein contracted for only competent, skillful, and trustworthy

employees. Should the Owner at any time give notice, in writing, to the Contractor or

his duly authorized representative on the work that any employee in his opinion is

incompetent, disorderly, careless, unobservant of instructions, or in any way a

detriment to the satisfactory progress of the work, such employee shall immediately

be dismissed and not again allowed upon the "Site".

1.5 CLARIFICATION REQUESTS

A. During the work the Contractor may request clarification of the information presented

of the Contract Documents. Such requests for information shall be in writing on a

Clarification Request Form. The final format for the Clarification Request Form will

be provided to the Contractor at the preconstruction meeting.

1.6 AREA OF OPERATIONS

A. The Contractor shall limit his operations generally to the area around the facilities

included in the Contract.

B. Access or work required in other areas of the site shall be arranged and coordinated

with the Construction Manager.

1.7 WORK ADJACENT TO EXISTING FACILITIES

A. All existing facilities, construction or adjacent property shall be adequately protected,

to the satisfaction of the Engineer, during all work under the Contract. Such facilities

include but are not limited to structure, building, utilities, process pipelines, plant yard

piping, storm and sanitary sewerage, excavations, ditches, tress, conduits and

electrical systems, any existing facilities and any appurtenances thereto.

B. Any existing facilities, construction or adjacent property which are damaged,

disturbed, destroyed or otherwise, in the opinion of the Construction Manager, have

their usefulness or operation impaired by work under this Contract shall be replaced

by new and equal items or restored, all to the satisfaction of the Construction

Manager, by the Contractor at his own expense and no separate payment will be made

therefor.



1.8 EXISTING FACILITIES SHOWN ON CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. The Contract Drawings are not guaranteed to be absolutely accurate with respect to

the types and locations of existing facilities .

B. It is the Contractor's responsibility to make his own investigations to fully inform

himself of the location, character, condition and extent of all existing facilities as may

be encountered and as may affect the construction operations.

1.9 RELOCATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

A. The work shall include all labor, materials, equipment and all work necessary to

relocate any existing facilities (including lights, ductwork, electrical conduit and

wiring, small piping and the like), whether shown or not, that interfere with the proper

installation of the new and relocated piping and equipment as required.

1.10 DIAGRAMMED PIPELINES

A. Various pipelines are shown on the Contract Drawings in diagram form. Where such

pipelines are shown only in diagram, they shall be arranged clear of other pipelines,

equipment and walking areas, and be accessible for maintenance. Such pipelines shall

be fitted and installed in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with approved

shop drawings. An adequate number of unions shall be provided in main pipe and

branch pipe runs to facilitate dismantling or removal of pipeline sections without

disturbing adjacent branch or connecting lines.

B. The final locations of hose valves, pipe drain valves, and other such appurtenances

included as a part of diagrammed pipelines shall be as shown on approved shop

drawings or as approved in the field by the Construction Manager.

C. The cost of furnishing, fabricating, locating, erecting and otherwise completely and

properly installing all diagramed pipelines shall be included in the lump sum Contract

Item for Structures and Equipment Work and no separate payment will be made

therefor.

1.11 PHOTOGRAPHS OR VIDEO RECORDING

A. From time to time during progress of the work, photographs or video record of the

work will be taken by the Construction Manager, the Owner or their authorized

representatives at no expense to the Contractor. The Contractor shall, however,

furnish access to the work at all times for this purpose and shall furnish such

assistance as may be required.

B. The photographs or video recording thus taken shall be the property of the Owner.

Nothing herein outlined shall be construed as prohibiting the taking of photographs or



videotapes by the Contractor or his agents provided it is done at no expense to the

Owner.

1.12 PERMITS

A. The Contractor shall obtain permits from various City agencies necessary for the

work. This will include but not be limited to:

• Richmond Stormwater Management Program (RSMP) Permit

• Work In Streets Permit (WISP)

B. The Contractor shall complete all permit applications and take complete responsibility

for these permits and all other permits needed.

C. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the permit application and approved permit to

the Construction Manager prior to starting any work that involves land disturbance or

work in the street.

D. The Contractor shall obtain any other permits required from any Federal, State, or

City agencies having jurisdiction for the work. The Contractor shall be required to

comply with all provisions of such permits regarding workmanship, schedules,

maintenance of existing operations, notification of starting construction time

restrictions upon closing streets, traffic control, and other conditions under which the

permit is issued.

E. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all other permits, licenses and other

authorizations required from the prosecution of the work, including the cost of all

work performed in compliance with the terms and conditions of such permits, licenses

and authorizations, whether by himself or others. The Contractor's cost to obtain any

required permits shall be included under the various unit price or lump sump Contract

Items and no separate payment will be made therefor.

F. The Contractor shall provide copies of all permits to the Construction Manager prior

to commencing any work associated with a required permit. The Contractor shall

abide by all requirements of all permits.

G. Compliance with any permit does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to

complete the work as shown, specified and required for a complete operating system.

H. City requirement to obtain water service permits for making connections and

improvements to the water system are shown in Table 01900-1.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used

END OF SECTION

Table 01900-1



City of Richmond Department of Public Utilities

General Water Construction Notes

1. All water construction and materials shall be in accordance with the City of

Richmond Water Distribution System Design Guidelines and Standard

Specifications and Details.

2. Final acceptance of the water utility improvements by the City of Richmond

Department of Public Utilities shall not be made until all work shown on the

approved utility plans is complete, including all pipeline work, paving, grading, and

any necessary adjustments.

3. The contractor must provide as-builts with requisite information depicting the

horizontal and vertical location of all proposed mains, services, bends, and

appurtenances with ties to right-of-way, curb\pavement lines, or alternate objects as

needed to locate the mains in the field. The improvements will not be accepted until

the as-built information has been reviewed and accepted by the City Water Utility

Inspector and Technical Services.

4. The contractor must contact the City of Richmond Department of Public Utilities

Construction Inspector at (804) 646-8497 to schedule a preconstruction meeting at

least 72 hours prior to beginning any water related construction activity.

5. The contractor is responsible for obtaining all required permits for the work. Water

Utility permits may be obtained through the Department of Public Utilities

Development Services office located in room 115 in City Hall.

6. The contractor shall not operate any existing valves and must request valve

operation by City forces no less than 48 hours in advance of any planned work.

7. Unless otherwise noted, the minimum cover for water mains is 42 inches.

8. Water for use by the contractor from a public water main or hydrant within the City

of Richmond shall require a City issued portable water meter with backflow device.

The contractor should contact the utility Cross Connection Specialist located at 400

Jefferson Davis Highway (Rm. 143), Tuesday through Friday (9 a.m. to 11 a.m.) to

make an application, contractor may call (804) 646-8502 for any questions related

to this program.

Table 01900-1



9. All water pipe used within the City’s distribution system shall be ductile-iron,

meeting the requirements of AWWA C151 – Latest Revision with mechanical or

push-on joints. The pipe shall be asphaltic coat outside and cement-lined and seal-

coated inside in accordance with AWWA C104. Pipes shall be furnished in nominal

lengths of 18 or 20 feet and shall include all jointing materials. All pipe must meet

the minimum thickness class as noted below:

Diameter (in) Thickness Class

3 51

4 53

6 54

8 54

12 & larger 52


SECTION 02050

DEMOLITION PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment in accordance with the requirements of Section 01745 – Shutdowns and Tie-ins.

B. In addition, the Contractor shall demolish and remove all piping, concrete and asphaltic

paving, curbs, sidewalk, and miscellaneous yard structures as required and shown on the Contract Drawings during the construction work.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards

B. Section 01745 – Shutdowns and Tie-Ins 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS

A. References shall be in accordance with reference standards, codes, and specifications as set forth herein and in Section 02100 - Clearing, Grubbing, and Site Preparation.

PART 2 -- EXECUTION 2.01 DEMOLITION

A. Existing concrete and asphaltic paving, curbs, sidewalk and miscellaneous yard structures within the areas designated for new construction work shall be completely demolished and all debris removed from the site.

B. Excavation caused by demolition shall be backfilled with fill free from rubbish and debris.

C. Work shall be performed in such manner as not to endanger the safety of the workmen or

the public or cause damage to nearby structures.

D. Provide all barriers and precautionary measures in accordance with Owner's requirements and other authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Where parts of existing structures are to remain in service, demolish the portions to be

removed, repair damage, and leave the structure in proper condition for the intended use. Remove concrete and masonry to the lines designated by drilling, chipping, or other suitable methods. Leave the resulting surfaces reasonably true and even, with sharp straight corners that will result in neat joints with new construction and be satisfactory for the purpose intended. Where existing reinforcing rods are to extend into new construction,

04

13

11

BR


remove the concrete so that the reinforcing is clean and undamaged. Cut off other reinforcing 1/2-inch below the surface and fill with epoxy resin binder flush with the surface.

F. Prior to the execution of the work, the Contractor, Owner and Engineer shall jointly survey

the condition of the adjoining and/or nearby structures. Photographs and records shall be made of any prior settlement or cracking of structures, pavements, and the like, that may become the subject of possible damage claims.

2.02 DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL

A. All debris resulting from the demolition and removal work shall be disposed of by the Contractor as part of the work of this Contract. Material designated by the Engineer to be salvaged shall be stored on the construction site as directed. All other material shall be disposed of off site by the Contractor at his expense.

B. Burning of any debris resulting from the demolition will not be permitted at the site.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 02100

CLEARING, GRUBBING, AND SITE PREPARATION PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Includes all labor, material, equipment and appliances required for the complete execution of new construction work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

B. Principal items of work include:

1. Notifying all authorities owning utility lines running to or on the property. Protecting

and maintaining all utility lines to remain and capping those that are not required in accordance with instructions of the Utility Companies, and all other authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Clearing the site as necessary for construction within the limits of disturbance

shown on the Drawings, including removal of grass, brush, shrubs, trees, loose debris and other encumbrances except for trees marked to remain.

3. Boxing and protecting all trees, shrubs, lawns and the like within areas to be

preserved. Relocating trees and shrubs, so indicated on the Drawings, to designated areas.

4. Repairing all injury to trees, shrubs, and other plants caused by site preparation

operations shall be repaired immediately. Work shall be done by qualified personnel in accordance with standard horticultural practice and as approved by the Engineer.

5. Removing topsoil to its full depth from designated areas and stockpiling on site

where directed by the Engineer for future use.

6. Disposing from the site all debris resulting from work under this Section. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Section 02200 - Earthwork 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS

A. Virginia Department of Transportation Road and Bridge Standards, latest edition.

B. Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook. 1.04 STREET AND ROAD BLOCKAGE

08

29

05

BR


A. Closing of streets and roads during progress of the work shall be in compliance with the requirements of the Owner and other authorities having jurisdiction. Access shall be provided to all facilities remaining in operation.

1.05 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

A. All work shall be performed in such a manner to protect all personnel, workmen, pedestrians and adjacent property and structures from possible injury and damage.

B. All conduits, wires, cables and appurtenances above or below ground shall be protected

from damage.

C. Provide warning and barrier fence where shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. PART 2 -- EXECUTION 2.01 CLEARING OF SITE

A. Before removal of topsoil and start of excavation and grading operations, the areas within the limits of disturbance shall be cleared and grubbed. The area of clearing shall be minimized to the extent possible to only those areas necessary for construction.

B. Contact City Arborist prior to initiating clearing, or removing or pruning of any trees. Submit

written approval from the City Arborist before commencing work on trees.

C. Clearing shall consist of cutting, removal, and satisfactory disposal of all trees, fallen timber, brush, bushes, rubbish, sanitary landfill material, fencing, and other perishable and objectionable material within the areas to be excavated or other designated areas. Should it become necessary to remove a tree, bush, brush or other plants adjacent to the area to be excavated, the Contractor shall do so only after permission has been granted by the Engineer and Owner.

D. Excavation resulting from the removal of trees, roots and the like shall be filled with

suitable material, as approved by the Engineer, and thoroughly compacted per the requirements contained in Section 02200, Earthwork.

F. Only those trees and shrubs shall be removed which are in actual interference with

excavation or grading work under this Contract, and removal shall be subject to approval by the Engineer and Owner. However, the Engineer reserves the right to order additional trees and shrubs removed at no additional cost to the Owner, if such, in his opinion, are too close to the work to be maintained or have become damaged due to the Contractor's operations.

2.02 STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING EXISTING TOPSOIL

A. Existing topsoil and sod on the site within areas designated on the Drawings shall be stripped to whatever depth it may occur, and stored in locations directed by the Engineer.

B. The topsoil shall be free of stones, roots, brush, rubbish, or other unsuitable materials

before stockpiling the topsoil.


C. Care shall be taken not to contaminate the stockpiled topsoil with any unsuitable materials.

2.03 GRUBBING

A. Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of all stumps, roots, logs, sticks and other perishable materials to a depth of at least 6-inches below ground surfaces.

B. Large stumps located in areas to be excavated may be removed during grading

operations, subject to the approval of the Engineer. 2.04 DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL

A. All debris resulting from the clearing and grubbing work shall be disposed of by the Contractor as part of the work of this Contract. Material designated by the Engineer to be salvaged shall be stored on the construction site as directed by the Engineer for reuse in this Project or removal by others.

B. Burning of any debris resulting from the clearing and grubbing work will not be permitted

at the site.

C. For all approved tree removals, grind stumps to at least 12 inches below grade and remove all tree and stump debris from the site, unless otherwise directed by the Owner or Engineer.

2.05 WARNING AND BARRIER FENCE

A. The fence shall be made of a visible, lightweight, flexible, high strength polyethylene material. The fence shall be MIRASAFE as manufactured by Mirafi, Inc., or equal.

B. Physical Properties

Fence:

Color: International Orange Roll Size: 4' x 164' Roll weight: 34 lbs. Mesh opening: 1-1/2" x 3"

Posts:

ASTM Designation: ASTM 702 Length: 5 feet long (T-Type) Weight: 1.25 #/Foot (min) Area of Anchor Plate: 14 Sq. In.

C. Drive posts 12 to 18 inches into ground every 10' to 12'. Wrap fence material around first

terminal post allowing overlap of one material opening. Use metal tie wire or plastic tie wrap to fasten material to itself at top, middle and bottom. At final post, cut with utility knife or scissors at a point halfway across an opening. Wrap around and tie at final post in the same way as the first post.


D. Use tie wire or tie wrap at intermediate posts and splices as well. Thread ties around a vertical member of the fence material and the post, and bind tightly against the post. For the most secure fastening, tie at top, middle and bottom. Overlap splices a minimum of four fence openings, tie as above, fastening both edges of the fence material splice overlap.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 02200

EARTHWORK PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish all labor, equipment and materials required to complete all work associated with excavation, including off-site borrow excavation, dewatering, backfill, drainage layers beneath and around structures, foundation and backfill stone, filter fabric, stockpiling topsoil and any excess suitable material in designated areas, backfill and subgrades beneath foundations and roadways, excavation support, disposing from the site all excess materials and all unsuitable materials, providing erosion and sedimentation control grading, site grading and preparation of pavement and structure subgrade, and other related and incidental work as required to complete the work shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

B. All excavations shall be in conformity with the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on

the Drawings or established by the Engineer.

C. It is the intent of this Specification that the Contractor conduct the construction activities in such a manner that erosion of disturbed areas and off-site sedimentation be absolutely minimized.

D. All work under this Contract shall be done in conformance with and subject to the

limitations of the latest editions of the Virginia Department of Transportation Road and Bridge Standards and the Virginia Department of Environmental Quality Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.


A. Requirements of related work are included in Division 1 and Division 2 of these Specifications.

1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS

A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the Specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced Specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid.

1. Virginia Department of Transportation Road and Bridge Standards, latest edition.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

ASTM C 127 Test for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate.

02

19

14

BR


ASTM C 136 Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. ASTM D 422 Particle Size Analysis of Soils.

ASTM D 423 Test for Liquid Limit of Soils. ASTM D 424 Test for Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils. ASTM C 535 Test for Resistance to Degradation of Large Size Coarse

Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. ASTM D 698 Standard Method of Test for the Moisture - Density Relations of

Soils Using a 5.5 lb. (2.5 kg) Rammer and a 12-inch (305 mm) Drop.

ASTM D1556 Test for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. ASTM D1557 Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate

Mixtures Using 10-lbs. (4.5 kg) Rammer and 18-inch (457 mm) Drop.

ASTM D2049 Test Method for Relative Density of Cohesionless Soils. ASTM D2167 Test for Density of Soil in Place by the Rubber-Balloon Method. ASTM D2216 Test for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content

of Soil, Rock, and Soil Aggregate Mixtures. ASTM D2487 Test for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes. ASTM D2922 Test for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear

Methods (Shallow Depth). 1.04 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Information on subsurface conditions is referenced under Division 1, General Requirements.

B. Attention is directed to the fact that there are water pipes and other utilities located in the

area of proposed excavation. Perform all repairs to same in the event that excavation activities disrupt service.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01330 - Submittals, the Contractor shall submit the following:

1. Name and location of all material suppliers.


2. Certificate of compliance with the standards specified above for each source of each material.

3. List of disposal sites for waste and unsuitable materials and all required permits

for use of those sites.

4. Plans and cross sections of open cut excavations showing side slopes and limits of the excavation at grade.

5. Samples of synthetic filter fabric and reinforced plastic membrane with

manufacturer's certificates or catalog cuts stating the mechanical and physical properties. Samples shall be at least one (1) foot wide and four (4) feet long taken across the roll with the warp direction appropriately marked.

6. Construction drawings and structural calculations for any types of excavation

support required. Drawings and calculations shall be sealed by a currently registered Professional Engineer in the State of Virginia.

7. Monitoring plan and pre-construction condition inspection and documentation of

all adjacent structures, utilities, and roadways near proposed installation of excavation support systems and near areas where dewatering is required to facilitate construction.

8. Dewatering procedures.

1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Soil and rock material shall be excavated, transported, placed, and stored in a manner so as to prevent contamination, segregation and excessive wetting. Materials which have become contaminated or segregated will not be permitted in the performance of the work and shall be removed from the site.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 SELECT FILL

A. Soils from the excavations meeting requirements stipulated herein with the exceptions of topsoil and organic material may be used as select fill for backfilling, constructing embankments, reconstructing existing embankments, and as structural subgrade support.

B. Select fill used for backfilling shall either be material as described in Paragraph B above

or a granular soil material with a Maximum Plasticity Index (PI) of 6. C. Regardless of material used as select fill, materials shall be compacted at a moisture

content satisfactory to the Engineer, which shall be approximately that required to produce the maximum density except that the moisture content shall not be more than 1% below nor more than 4% above the optimum moisture content for the particular material tested in accordance with the ASTM D698.


D. Select fill used as subgrade support shall be a coarse aggregate material meeting the gradation requirements of #57 or #78 aggregates in accordance with ASTM C-33, or Aggregate Base Course (ABC) as defined in Section 02207 – Aggregate Materials.

F. Where excavated material does not meet requirements for select fill, Contractor shall

furnish off-site borrow material meeting the specified requirements herein. Determination of whether the borrow material will be paid for as an extra cost will be made based on Article 4 of the General Conditions, as amended by the Supplementary Conditions. When the excavated material from required excavations is suitable for use as backfill, bedding, or embankments, but is replaced with off-site borrow material for the Contractor’s convenience, the costs associated with such work and material shall be borne by the Contractor.

2.02 TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil shall be considered the surface layer of soil and sod, suitable for use in seeding and planting. It shall contain no mixture of refuse or any material toxic to plant growth.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL

A. In all areas to be excavated, filled, paved, or graveled the topsoil shall be stripped to its full depth and shall be deposited in storage piles on the site, at locations designated by the Engineer, for subsequent reuse. Topsoil shall be kept separated from other excavated materials and shall be piled free of roots and other undesirable materials.

3.02 EXCAVATION

A. All material excavated, regardless of its nature or composition, shall be classified as UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION. Excavation shall include the removal of all soil, rock, weathered rock, rocks of all types, boulders, conduits, pipe, and all other obstacles encountered and shown to be removed within the limits of excavation shown on the Drawings or specified herein. The cost of excavation shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid Price and no additional payment will be made for the removal of obstacles encountered within the excavation limits shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

B. All suitable material removed in the excavation shall be used as far as practicable in the

formation of embankments, subgrades, and shoulders, and at such other places as may be indicated on the Drawings or indicated by the Engineer. No excavation shall be wasted except as may be permitted by the Engineer. Refer to the drawings for specific location and placement of suitable excavated materials in the formation of embankments, backfill, and structural and roadway foundations. THE ENGINEER AND/OR MATERIALS TESTING CONSULTANT WILL DESIGNATE MATERIALS THAT ARE UNSUITABLE. The Contractor shall furnish off site disposal areas for the unsuitable material. Where suitable materials containing excessive moisture are encountered above grade in cuts, the Contractor shall construct above grade ditch drains prior to the excavation of the cut material when in the opinion of the Engineer and/or materials testing consultant such measures are necessary to provide proper construction.


C. All excavations shall be made in the dry and in such a manner and to such widths as will

give ample room for properly constructing and inspecting the structures and/or piping they are to contain and for such excavation support, pumping and drainage as may be required. Excavation shall be made in accordance with the grades and details shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

D. Excavation slopes shall be flat enough to avoid slides that will cause disturbance of the

subgrade or damage of adjacent areas. Excavation requirements and slopes shall be as indicated in the Drawings. The Contractor shall intercept and collect surface runoff both at the top and bottom of cut slopes. The intersection of slopes with natural ground surfaces, including the beginning and ending of cut slopes, shall be uniformly rounded as shown on the Drawings or as may be indicated by the Engineer. Concurrent with the excavation of cuts the Contractor shall construct intercepting berm ditches or earth berms along and on top of the cut slopes at locations shown on the Drawings or designated by the Engineer. All slopes shall be finished to reasonably uniform surfaces acceptable for seeding and mulching operations. No rock or boulders shall be left in place which protrude more than 1 foot within the typical section cut slope lines, and all rock cuts shall be cleaned of loose and overhanging material. All protruding roots and other objectionable vegetation shall be removed from slopes. The Contractor shall be required to submit plans of open-cut excavation for review by the Engineer before approval is given to proceed.

E. It is the intent of these Specifications that all structures shall bear on an aggregate base,

crushed stone or screened gravel bedding placed to the thickness shown on the Drawings, specified in these Specifications, or not less than 6-inches. Bedding for process piping shall be as specified in Section 15000 - Basic Mechanical Requirements, or as shown on the Drawings.

F. The bottom of all excavations for structures and pipes shall be examined by the Engineer

and/or materials testing consultant for bearing value and the presence of unsuitable material. If, in the opinion of the Engineer and/or materials testing consultant, additional excavation is required due to the low bearing value of the subgrade material, or if the in-place soils are soft, yielding, pumping and wet, the Contractor shall remove such material to the required width and depth and replace it with thoroughly compacted select fill, and/or crushed stone or screened gravel as indicated by the Engineer. Payment for such additional work ordered by the Engineer shall be made as an extra by a Change Order in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1. No payment will be made for subgrade disturbance caused by inadequate dewatering or improper construction methods.

G. All cuts shall be brought to the grade and cross section shown on the Drawings, or

established by the Engineer, prior to final inspection and acceptance by the Engineer.

H. Slides and overbreaks which occur due to negligence, carelessness or improper construction techniques on the part of the Contractor shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor as indicated by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. If grading operations are suspended for any reason whatsoever, partially completed cut and fill slopes shall be brought to the required slope and the work of seeding and mulching or other required erosion and sedimentation control operations shall be performed.


I. Where the excavation exposes sludge, sludge contaminated soil or other odorous materials, the Contractor shall cover such material at the end of each workday with a minimum of 6-inches and a maximum of 24-inches of clean fill. The work shall be an odor abatement measure and the material shall be placed to the depth deemed satisfactory by the Engineer for this purpose.

3.03 EXCAVATION SUPPORT

A. The Contractor shall furnish, place, and maintain such excavation support which may be required to support sides of excavation or to protect pipes and structures from possible damage and to provide safe working conditions. If the Engineer is of the opinion that at any point sufficient or proper supports have not been provided, he may order additional supports put in at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for the adequacy of all supports used and for all damage resulting from failure of support system or from placing, maintaining and removing it.

B. Selection of and design of any proposed excavation support systems is exclusively the

responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor shall submit drawings and calculations on proposed systems sealed by a Professional Engineer currently registered in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

C. The Contractor shall exercise caution in the installation and removal of supports to insure

that excessive or unusual loadings are not transmitted to any new or existing structure. The Contractor shall promptly repair at his expense any and all damage that can be reasonably attributed to installation or removal of excavation support system.

D. Contractor shall monitor movement in the excavation support systems as well as

movement at adjacent structures, utilities and roadways near excavation supports. Contractor shall submit a monitoring plan developed by the excavation support design engineer. All pre-construction condition assessment and documentation of adjacent structures on-site and off-site shall be performed by the Contractor. If any sign of distress such as cracking or movement occurs in any adjacent structure, utility or roadway during installation of supports, subsequent excavation, service period of supports, subsequent backfill and construction, or removal of supports, Engineer shall be notified immediately. Contractor shall be exclusively responsible for repair of any damage to any roadway, structure, utility, pipes, etc. both on-site and off-site, as a result of his operations.

E. All excavation supports shall be removed upon completion of the work except as indicated herein. The Engineer may permit supports to be left in place at the request and expense of the Contractor. The Engineer may order certain supports left permanently in place in addition to that required by the Contract. The cost of the materials so ordered left in place, less a reasonable amount for the eliminated expense of the removal work omitted, will be paid as an extra by a Change Order in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1. Any excavation supports left in place shall be cut off at least two (2) feet below the finished ground surface or as directed by the Engineer.

3.04 PROTECTION OF SUBGRADE

A. To minimize the disturbance of bearing materials and provide a firm foundation, the Contractor shall comply with the following requirements:


1. Use of heavy rubber-tired construction equipment shall not be permitted on the

final subgrade unless it can be demonstrated that drawdown of groundwater throughout the entire area of the structure is at least 3 feet below the bottom of the excavation (subgrade). Even then, the use of such equipment shall be prohibited should subgrade disturbance result from concentrated wheel loads.

2. Subgrade soils disturbed through the operations of the Contractor shall be

excavated and replaced with compacted select fill or crushed stone at the Contractor's expense as indicated by the Engineer.

3. The Contractor shall provide positive protection against penetration of frost into

materials below the bearing level during work in winter months. This protection can consist of a temporary blanket of straw or salt hay covered with a plastic membrane or other acceptable means.

3.05 PROOFROLLING

A. The subgrade of all structures and all areas that will support pavements or select fill shall be proofrolled. After stripping of topsoil, excavation to subgrade and prior to placement of fills, the exposed subgrade shall be carefully inspected by probing and testing as needed. Any topsoil or other organic material still in place, frozen, wet, soft, or loose soil, and other undesirable materials shall be removed. The exposed subgrade shall be proofrolled with a heavily loaded tandem-wheeled dump truck to check for pockets of soft material hidden beneath a thin crust of better soil. Any unsuitable materials thus exposed shall be removed and replaced with an approved compacted material.

3.06 DEWATERING

A. The Contractor shall complete all dewatering as required for the completion of the work. Procedures for dewatering proposed by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to any earthwork operations. All water removed by dewatering operations shall be disposed of in accordance with the Virginia Department of Environmental Quality guidelines.

B. The dewatering system shall be of sufficient size and capacity as required to control

groundwater or seepage to permit proper excavation operations, embankment construction and reconstruction, subgrade preparation, and to allow concrete to be placed in a dry condition. The system shall include a sump system or other equipment, appurtenances and other related earthwork necessary for the required control of water. The Contractor shall drawdown groundwater to at least 3 feet below the bottom of excavations (subgrade) at all times in order to maintain a dry and undisturbed condition.

C. The Contractor shall control, by acceptable means, all water regardless of source. Water

shall be controlled and its disposal provided for at each berm, structure, etc. The entire periphery of the excavation areas shall be ditched and diked to prevent water from entering the excavation. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for disposal of the water and shall provide all necessary means at no additional expense to the Owner. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for proper design, installation, proper operation, maintenance, and any failure of any component of the system.


D. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall repair without cost to the Owner, any

damage to work in place and the excavation, including damage to the bottom due to heave and including removal of material and pumping out of the excavated area. The Contractor shall be responsible for damages to any other area or structure caused by his failure to maintain and operate the dewatering system proposed and installed by the Contractor.

E. The Contractor shall take all the steps that he considers necessary to familiarize himself

with the surface and subsurface site conditions, and shall obtain the data that is required to analyze the water and soil environment at the site and to assure that the materials used for the dewatering systems will not erode, deteriorate, or clog to the extent that the dewatering systems will not perform properly during the period of dewatering. Copies of logs of borings and laboratory test results are available to the Contractor. This data is furnished for information only, and it is expressly understood that the Owner and Engineer will not be held responsible for any interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor.

F. Prior to the execution of the work, the Contractor, Owner and Engineer shall jointly survey

the condition of adjoining structures. Photographs and records shall be made of any prior settlement or cracking of structures, pavements, and the like, that may become the subject of possible damage claims.

3.07 BACKFILLING

A. All structures and pipes shall be backfilled with the type of materials shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Select fill shall be deposited in successive, uniform, approximately horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inches in compacted depth for the full width. Stones or fragmentary rock larger than 4-inches in their greatest dimension will not be allowed within the top 6-inches of the ground nor within 6 inches of pipes. No stone or fragmentary rock larger than 12-inches in their greatest dimension will be allowed for any portion of backfill. Compaction shall be in accordance with the requirements of Paragraph 3.09, COMPACTION.

B. Where excavation support is used, the Contractor shall take all reasonable measures to

prevent loss of support beneath and adjacent to pipes and existing structures when supports are removed. If significant volumes of soil cannot be prevented from clinging to the extracted supports, the voids shall be continuously backfilled as rapidly as possible. The Contractor shall thereafter limit the depth below subgrade that supports will be installed in similar soil conditions or employ other appropriate means to prevent loss of support.


3.08 COMPACTION

A. The Contractor shall compact embankments, backfill, crushed stone, aggregate base, and in place subgrade in accordance with the requirements of this Section. The densities specified herein refer to percentages of maximum density as determined by the noted test methods. Compaction of materials on the project shall be in accordance with the following schedule:

Density %

Std. Proctor

(D698)

Density %

Mod. Proctor

(D1557)

Max. Lift Thickness as Compacted

Inches

Backfill Around Structures 95 92 8

Backfill in Pipe Trenches 95 92 8

Crushed Stone Beneath Structures * * 12

Aggregate Base Course (ABC) Beneath Pavements and Structures

-- 98 8

Crushed Stone Backfill

*

*

12

Crushed Stone Pipe Bedding

*

*

12

In place Subgrade Beneath Structures

98

95

Top 12-inches

* The aggregate shall be compacted to a degree acceptable to the Engineer by use of a vibratory compactor and/or crawler tractor.

B. Field density tests will be made by the materials testing consultant to determine if the

specified densities have been achieved, and these tests shall be the basis for accepting or rejecting the compaction. In-place density tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, or ASTM D 2922. The Engineer in conjunction with the materials testing consultant will be the judge as to which test method will be the most appropriate. Failure to achieve the specified densities shall require the Contractor to re-compact the material or remove it as required. The Contractor shall, if necessary, increase his compactive effort by increasing the number of passes, using heavier or more suitable compaction equipment, or by reducing the thickness of the layers. The Contractor shall adjust the moisture contents of the soils to bring them within the optimum range by drying them or adding water as required.

C. Testing will be performed as frequently as deemed necessary by the Engineer and/or

materials testing consultant. As a minimum, one in-place density test shall be performed for each 1000 cubic yards of embankment placed and 500 cubic yards of backfill placed or one test performed each day for either.

3.09 UTILITY CROSSINGS

A. Rebed, in compacted select fill material, utilities which cross over the new pipe or which cross under the new pipe with less than 12 inches clear vertical separation. Compact the


bedding to densities required for new pipeline construction and extend bedding below the utility to undisturbed earth.

1. Furnish and install all materials and do all work necessary for the reconstruction

or repairs of utility crossings. 3.10 REMOVAL OF EXCESS MATERIALS AND UNSUITABLE MATERIALS

A. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of off-site all excess materials and all unsuitable materials. Within thirty (30) consecutive days after Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review all required permits and a list of disposal sites for the unsuitable materials. If the disposal site is located on private property, the submittal shall also include written permission from the owner of record.

B. All excess materials and unsuitable materials shall be disposed of in locations and under

conditions that comply with federal, state and local laws and regulations. C. The Contractor shall obtain an off-site disposal area prior to beginning demolition or

excavation operations.

D. All excess materials and unsuitable materials shall be hauled in trucks of sufficient capacity and tight construction to prevent spillage. Trucks shall be covered to prevent the propagation of dust.

E. When all excess materials and unsuitable material disposal operations are completed, the

Contractor shall leave the disposal sites in a condition acceptable to the Owner and Owner(s) of the disposal site(s).

3.11 BORROW EXCAVATION

A. Description

The work covered by this section consists of the excavation of approved material from borrow sources and the hauling and utilization of such material as required on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer. It shall also include the removing, stockpiling, and replacement of topsoil on the borrow source; the satisfactory disposition of material from the borrow source which is not suitable for use; and the satisfactory restoration of the borrow source and haul roads to an acceptable condition upon completion of the work.

Borrow excavation shall not be used before all available suitable unclassified excavation has been used for backfill and incorporated into the embankments.

B. Coordination with Seeding Operations

The Contractor shall coordinate the work covered by this section with the construction of embankments so that the requirements of Section 02200 are met.

C. Materials

All material shall meet the requirements of Division 2 shown below:


Borrow Material ................................ Section 02200, Subsection 2.01 - Select Fill

D. Construction Methods

1. General

The surface of the borrow area shall be thoroughly cleared and grubbed and cleaned of all unsuitable material including all organics, topsoil, etc., before beginning the excavation. Disposal of material resulting from clearing and grubbing shall be in accordance with Section 02100.

Each borrow operation shall not be allowed to accumulate exposed, erodible slope area in excess of 1 acre at any one given time without the Contractor's beginning permanent seeding and mulching of the borrow source or other erosion control measures as may be approved by the Engineer.

The topsoil shall be removed and stockpiled at locations that will not interfere with the borrow operations and that meet the approval of the Engineer. Temporary erosion control measures shall be installed as may be necessary to prevent the erosion of the stockpile material. Once all borrow has been removed from the source or portion thereof, the stockpiled topsoil shall be spread uniformly over the source.

Where it is necessary to haul borrow material over existing roads, the Contractor shall use all necessary precautions to prevent damage to the existing roads. The Contractor shall also conduct his hauling operations in such a manner as to not interfere with the normal flow of traffic and shall keep the traffic lanes free from spillage at all times.

2. Contractor Furnished Sources

Prior to the approval of any off-site borrow source(s) developed for use on this project, the Contractor shall obtain certification from the State Historic Preservation Officer of the State Department of Cultural Resources certifying that the removal of the borrow material from the borrow source(s) will have no effect on any known district, site building, structure, or object that is included or eligible for inclusion in the National Register of Historic Places. A copy of this certification shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to performing any work on the proposed borrow source.

The approval of borrow sources furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to the following conditions:

a. The Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring the right to take the

material and any rights of access that may be necessary; for locating and developing the source; and any clearing and grubbing and drainage ditches necessary.


Such right shall be in writing and shall include an agreement with the Owner that the borrow source may be dressed, shaped, seeded, mulched, and drained as required by these Specifications after all borrow has been removed.

b. Except where borrow is to be obtained from a commercial source, the

Contractor and the property owner shall jointly submit a borrow source development, use, and reclamation plan to the Engineer for his approval prior to engaging in any land disturbing activity on the proposed source other than material sampling that may be necessary. The Contractor's plan shall address the following: (1) Drainage

The source shall be graded to drain such that no water will collect or stand and a functioning drainage system shall be provided. If drainage is not practical, and the source is to serve as a pond, the minimum average depth below the water table shall be 4 feet or the source graded so as to create wetlands as appropriate.

(2) Slopes

The source shall be dressed and shaped in a continuous manner to contours which are comparable to and blend in with the adjacent topography, but in no case will slopes steeper than 3:1 be permitted.

(3) Erosion Control

The plan shall address the temporary and permanent measures that the Contractor intends to employ during use of the source and as a part of the reclamation. The Contractor's plan shall provide for the use of staged permanent seeding and mulching on a continual basis while the source is in use and the immediate total reclamation of the source when no longer needed.

4. Maintenance

During construction and until final acceptance the Contractor shall use any methods approved by the Engineer which are necessary to maintain the work covered by this section so that the work will not contribute to excessive soil erosion.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 02207

AGGREGATE MATERIALS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials required to complete all work associated with the installation of aggregate material beneath foundations, as backfill and as roadway subgrades and other related and incidental work as required to complete the work shown on the Drawings and specified herein.


A. Section 01422 - References

B. Section 02200 - Earthwork

C. Section 02276 - Erosion and Sedimentation Control

D. Section 02510 - Paving and Surfacing

E. Section 02910 - Final Grading and Landscaping 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the Specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid.

1. Virginia Department of Transportation (VDOT) Road and Bridge Specifications. 2. ASTM C 127 Test for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate. 3. ASTM C 136 Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 4. ASTM C 535 Test for Resistance to Degradation of Large Size Coarse

Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

1. Materials gradation and certification.

2. ASTM C127, ASTM C136, and ASTM C535 test results

08

29

05

BR


PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 CRUSHED STONE AND SCREENED GRAVEL

A. Crushed stone or screened gravel shall meet the requirements of Aggregate Standard Size No. 57 or No. 67 as defined by VDOT Standard Specifications.

B. Crusher run shall be as defined by Section 205 of the VDOT Standard Specifications.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 CRUSHED STONE AND SCREENED GRAVEL

A. Contractor shall install crushed stone, screened gravel and aggregate base materials in accordance with the VDOT Standard Specifications and as shown on the Drawings and indicated in the Contract Documents.

1. Unless otherwise stated herein or shown on the Drawings, all mat foundations

(bottom slabs) for the proposed structures shall have a blanket of screened gravel or crushed stone 6-inches thick minimum placed directly beneath the proposed mat. The blanket shall extend a minimum of 12 inches beyond the extremities of the mat.

2. For subgrade preparation at structures and structural fill, the foundation material

shall be crushed stone or screened gravel unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

3. For pipe bedding, and drainage layers beneath structures the coarse aggregate

shall meet the requirements of aggregate standard Size No. 57 or No. 67, as defined by VDOT Standard Specifications.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 02276

EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall employ a Responsible Land Disturber certified in the Commonwealth of Virginia who is responsible for implementing Best Management Practices (BMP’s) to prevent and minimize erosion and resultant sedimentation in all cleared and grubbed areas during and after construction. This item covers the Work necessary for the installation of structure and measures for the prevention and control of soil erosion. The Contractor shall furnish all material, labor and equipment necessary for the proper installation, maintenance, inspection, monitoring, reporting, and removal (where applicable) of erosion prevention and control measures and to cause compliance with the General Virginia Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (VPDES) Permit Regulation for Discharges of Storm Water From Construction Activities (9 VAC 25-180) and VPDES General Permit No. VAR10 under this Section.

B. All excavations shall be in conformity with the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on

the Drawings or established by the Engineer.

C. It is the intent of this Specification that the Contractor conduct the construction activities in such a manner that erosion of disturbed areas and off site sedimentation be absolutely minimized.

D. All Work under this Contract shall be done in conformance with and subject to the

limitations of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook (VESCH) and the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Law, Regulations and Certification Regulations, as adopted in the Code of Virginia Title 10-1, Chapter 5, Article 4 and Sections 4VAC30-50 and 4VAC50-50 of the Virginia Administration Code.

E. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable minimum standards set in the Virginia

Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook. The following excerpts from the VESCH Minimum Standards are particularly important:

1. Permanent or temporary soil stabilization shall be applied to denuded areas within

seven days after final grade is reached on any portion of the site. Temporary soil stabilization shall be applied within seven days to denuded areas that may not be at final grade but will remain dormant (undisturbed) for longer than 30 days. Permanent stabilization shall be applied to areas that are to be left dormant for more than one year.

2. A permanent vegetative cover shall be established on denuded areas not

otherwise permanently stabilized. Permanent vegetation shall not be considered established until a ground cover is achieved that, in the opinion of the local program

12

20

04

BR


administrator or his designated agent, is uniform, mature enough to survive and will inhibit erosion.

3. Stabilization measures shall be applied to earthen structures such as dams, dikes

and diversions immediately after installation.

4. All temporary erosion and sediment control measures shall be removed within 30 days after final site stabilization or after the temporary measures are no longer needed, unless otherwise authorized by the local program administrator. Trapped sediment and the disturbed soil areas resulting from the deposition of temporary measures shall be permanently stabilized to prevent further erosion and sedimentation.

F. Due to the nature of the Work required by this Contract, it is anticipated that the location

and nature of the erosion and sedimentation control devices will be adjusted on several occasions to reflect the current phase of construction. The construction schedule adopted by the Contractor will impact the placement and need for specific devices required for the control of erosion. The Contractor shall develop and implement such additional techniques as may be required to minimize erosion and off-site sedimentation. The location and extent of erosion and sedimentation control devices shall be revised at each phase of construction that results in a change in either the quantity or direction of surface runoff from constructed areas. All deviations from the erosion and sedimentation control provisions shown on the Drawings shall have the prior acceptance of the Engineer.


A. Section 02100 – Clearing, Grubbing, and Site Preparation

B. Section 02200 – Earthwork C. Section 02910 – Final Grading and Landscaping

1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of these specifications, all Work hereunder shall conform to the applicable requirements of the referenced portions of the following documents, to the extent that the requirements therein are not in conflict with the provisions of this Section.

1. Code of Virginia, Title 10.1, Chapter 5, Article 4 2. Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook (VESCH), latest edition. 3. General Virginia Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (VPDES) Permit

Regulation for Discharges of Storm Water From Construction Activities (9 VAC 25-180) and VPDES General Permit No. VAR10.

4. Erosion and Sediment Control Plan as required by the VPDES Permit.


5. Maintenance and Inspection Procedures as required by the VPDES Permit

B. See Specification Section 01422 - References 1.04 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE

A. Land disturbance activities are not authorized to begin until after all required erosion and sediment control permits are obtained from the United States, Commonwealth of Virginia, and the City of Richmond. Contractor is the Co-Primary Permittee and Operator under the provisions of the VPDES Permit. As such, Contractor will be required to sign certain certifications as described in the VPDES Permit. Contractor shall comply with requirements specified in the Contract Documents or by the Engineer. Contractor shall also comply with all other laws, rules, regulations, ordinances and requirements concerning soil erosion and sediment control established in the United States, the Commonwealth of Virginia, and the City of Richmond. The following documents and the documents referenced therein define the regulatory requirements for this Section 02276.

1. VPDES PERMIT: The Virginia Pollution Discharge Elimination System (VPDES)

General Permit (VAR 10) for Discharges of Storm Water from Construction Activity governs land disturbance or construction activities of one (1) acre or more. On applicable sites, Contractor is responsible for complying with terms and conditions of this permit.

2. Manual for Erosion and Sediment Control: Contractor shall follow Practices and

Standards of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook (VESCH), Third Edition, or latest.

3. SWPPP: When a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) is provided in

the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall follow the practices described in the SWPPP.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to the start of the Work, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a plan for applying the temporary and permanent erosion and siltation control measures as shown on the Owner's approved Erosion and Sediment Control Plan. Construction Work shall not commence until the schedule of Work and the methods of operations have been reviewed and approved.

B. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions

Division 1 and Section 01330, the Contractor shall submit the following:

1. Name and location of all material suppliers.

2. Certificate of compliance with the standards specified above for each source of each material.

3. List of disposal sites for waste and unsuitable materials and all required permits

for use of those sites.


1.06 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL DEVICES

A. The following erosion and sedimentation control devices shall be incorporated into the Work. Other devices, as necessary and acceptable to the Engineer shall be installed as required.

1. Silt Fence shall be constructed at the locations shown on the Drawings, and at

other locations indicated by the Engineer. Silt fence shall not be installed across streams, ditches or waterways. Silt Fence shall be designed, installed and maintained in accordance with requirements of Section 3.05 of the VESCH.

2. Block and Gravel Drop Inlet Sediment Filters shall be constructed at the locations

shown on the Drawings, and at other locations indicated by the Engineer. Dimensions shall be as shown on the Drawings. Block and Gravel Drop Inlet Sediment Filters shall be designed, installed and maintained in accordance with the requirements of Section 3.07 of the VESCH.

3. Block and Gravel Curb Inlet Sediment Filters shall be constructed at the locations

shown on the Drawings, and at other locations indicated by the Engineer. Gravel Curb Inlet Sediment Filters shall be designed, installed and maintained in accordance with the requirements of Section 3.07 of the VESCH.

4. Temporary Construction Entrances shall be located at points where vehicles enter

and leave a construction site and at other locations indicated by the Engineer. Temporary Construction Entrances shall be designed, installed and maintained in accordance with the requirements of Section 3.02 of the VESCH.

1.07 GUARANTEE

A. All restoration and revegetation Work shall be subject to the one-year guarantee period of the Contract as specified in the General Conditions.

PART 2 -- MATERIALS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Materials for use in erosion and sedimentation control devices shall be in accordance with the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.

2.02 SILT FENCE

A. Silt Fence shall be installed and maintained in accordance with the Maintenance paragraph, and Section 3.05 of the VESCH, to the satisfaction of the Engineer until the site has been stabilized. The cost of Silt Fence shall include the fabric, posts, wire fabric, excavation and all maintenance and restoration activities required.

B. Silt Fence shall be a woven geotextile filter fabric made specifically for sediment control.

Filter fabric shall not rot when buried and shall resist attack from soil chemicals, alkalies


and acids in the pH range from 2 to 13, and shall resist damage due to prolonged ultraviolet exposure. Filter fabric shall be Type FX-11, as manufactured by Carthage Mills, Type 910SC, as manufactured by Synthetic Industries, Inc., Amoco 2130 as manufactured by Amoco Fabrics & Fibers Co.

C. Filter fabric for the silt fence shall have the following minimum properties:

Value Test Method Grab Tensile Strength 100 lbs ASTM D 4632 Grab Elongation 15% ASTM D 4632 Trapezoid Tear Strength 50 lbs ASTM D 4533 Mullen Burst Strength 265 lbs ASTM D 3786 Puncture Strength 58 lbs ASTM D 4833 Retained Strength (500 hrs. accelerated UV exposure) 80% ASTM D 4355 Filtration Efficiency 75% VTM-51 Flow Rate 10/gal/min/ft.2 ASTM D 4491 Height 36 inches

D. Posts for silt fence shall be steel and shall have the following properties:

ASTM Designation: ASTM A702 Length: 5-Feet Long (T-Type) Weight: 1.25 lbs/foot (min.) Area of Anchor Plate: 14 Sq. In.

Note: Five (T) Fasteners shall be furnished with each post.

E. Wire Fabric for the silt fence shall have the following properties:

Wire Fabric Designation: 832-12-10-12.5 Class 1 Designation: ASTM A116 Width: 32" Number of Line Wires: 8 Stay Wire Spacing: 12" Line and Stay Wires: 12.5 Ga. Top and Bottom Wires: 10 Ga. Wire Coating: ASTM Class 1 Zinc Coating


2.03 TEMPORARY GRAVEL CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCES

A. Temporary gravel construction entrances shall be constructed as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Temporary gravel construction entrances shall be maintained in accordance with Part 3 of this Section, and Section 3.02 of the VESCH, to the satisfaction of the Engineer until the site has been stabilized. The cost of temporary gravel construction entrances shall include the gravel and all maintenance activities required.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE

A. Erosion and sedimentation control devices shall be established prior to the clearing operations in a given area. Where such practice is not feasible, the erosion and sedimentation control device(s) shall be established immediately following completion of the clearing operation.

B. The Contractor shall furnish the labor, materials and equipment required for routine

maintenance of all erosion and sedimentation control devices. Maintenance shall be scheduled as required for a particular device to maintain the removal efficiency and intent of the device. Maintenance shall include but not be limited to 1) the removal and satisfactory disposal of trapped sediments from traps or silt barriers and 2) replacement of filter fabrics used for silt fences. Sediment removed from erosion and sedimentation control devices shall be disposed of in locations that will not result in off site sedimentation as acceptable to the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Silt fence shall be erected as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Silt fence shall

be erected and maintained to the satisfaction of the Engineer until a vegetative ground cover has been established. Replacement of the filter fabric, if required by the Engineer, will be at the Contractor's expense.

1. Inspect silt fence at least once every 14 days and within 48 hours after each runoff

producing rainfall event. Make required repairs immediately.

2. Should the fabric of a silt fence collapse, tear, decompose or become in-effective, replace it promptly.

3. Remove sediment deposits as necessary to provide adequate storage volume for

the next rain and to reduce pressure on the fence. Take care to avoid undermining the fence during cleanout.

4. Remove all fencing materials and unstable sediment deposits and bring the area

to grade and stabilize it after the contributing drainage area has been properly stabilized. Removal of silt fence shall be permitted only with the prior approval of the Engineer, or the local governing agency.


G. Riprap and stone for erosion control shall be dumped and placed in such manner that the larger rock fragments are uniformly distributed throughout the rock mass and the smaller fragments fill the voids between the larger fragments. Rearranging of individual stones by equipment or by hand shall only be required to the extent necessary to secure the results specified above, to protect structures from damage when rock material is placed against the structures or to protect the underlying Filter Fabric from damage during installation.

K. The Contractor shall provide temporary construction entrances at all locations noted on the Contract Drawings, and at all other locations as may be directed by the Engineer.

1. Maintain the gravel pad in a condition to prevent mud or sediment from leaving the

construction site. This may require periodic topdressing with VDOT #1 course aggregate. Inspect each construction entrance at least once every 14 days and within 48 hours after each runoff producing rainfall event and clean out as necessary. Immediately remove all objectionable materials spilled, washed, or tracked onto public roadways.

L. Permanent or temporary soil stabilization shall be applied to denuded areas within seven

days after final grade is reached on any portion of the site. Temporary soil stabilization shall be applied within seven days to denuded areas that may not be at final grade but will remain dormant (undisturbed) for longer than 30 days. Permanent stabilization shall be applied to areas that are to be left dormant for more than one year. Preparation of areas for permanent stabilization shall be performed in accordance with Section 2.32 of the VESCH.

1. Reseed and mulch temporary seeding areas where seedling emergence is poor,

or where erosion occurs, as soon as possible. Do not mow. Protect from traffic as much as possible.

2. Generally, a stand of vegetation cannot be determined to be fully established until

soil cover has been maintained for one full year from planting. Inspect seeded areas for failure and make necessary repairs and reseedings within the same season, if possible.

3. Reseeding – If a stand has inadequate cover, re-evaluate choice of plant materials

and quantities of lime and fertilizer. Re-establish the stand after seedbed preparation or over-seed the stand. Consider seeding temporary, annual species if the time of year is not appropriate for permanent seeding.

4. If vegetation fails to grow, soil must be tested to determine if acidity or nutrient

imbalance is responsible. 5. Fertilization – On the typical disturbed site, full establishment usually requires

refertilization in the second growing season. Fine turf requires annual maintenance fertilization. Use soil tests if possible or follow the guidelines given for the specific seeding mixture.

M. Additional Requirements


1. All streets around the construction area shall be scraped as necessary to prevent accumulation of dirt and debris.

2. The Contractor shall provide adequate means to prevent sediment from entering

storm drains, curb inlets (curb inlet filter box), ditches, streams, or bodies of water downstream of any area disturbed by construction. Excavation materials shall be placed upstream of trench or other excavation to prevent sedimentation of offsite areas. In areas where a natural buffer area exists between the Work area and the closest stream or water course, this area shall not be disturbed.

3. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to place additional sediment and erosion

control devices at other locations not shown on the Drawings.

4. The Contractor agrees to hold the Owner or any of its agents harmless from any and all liability, loss or damage that may arise out of a violation to the Erosion and Sediment Control Ordinance.

5. The Contractor shall monitor and take precautions to control dust, including, but

not limited to, use of water or chemical dust palliative, limiting the number of vehicles allowed on site, minimizing the operating speed of all vehicles.

3.02 INSPECTIONS AND MAINTENANCE

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the implementation of the Maintenance and Inspection Procedures as written by the Engineer. The implementation must comply with guidelines as set forth in General Virginia Pollutant Discharge Elimination System Permit Regulation for Discharges of Storm Water From Construction Activities (9 VAC 25-180) and VPDES General Permit No. VAR10.

B. The Contractor shall designate a Qualified Person to perform inspections required by this

Section 02276. The following areas are to be inspected and maintenance performed, if needed, at least once every 14 calendar days and within 48 hours of the end of runoff producing storm event.

1. Disturbed areas of the construction site that have not undergone final stabilization

2. Erosion and sediment control structures

3. All locations where vehicles enter or exit the site

4. Material storage and construction laydown areas that are exposed to precipitation

and have not been finally stabilized

C. When a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) is provided in the Contract Documents, the Qualified Person shall follow the practices inspection and maintenance requirements described in the SWPPP. All appropriate records required by the SWPPP shall be maintained on site.

D. Immediate action will be taken to correct deficiencies to BMP’s. The State reserves the


right to stop all construction activities not related to maintaining BMP’s until such deficiencies are repaired.

E. In areas that have been finally stabilized, inspections and, if necessary, maintenance by

Contractor will occur at least once per month for the duration of the contract or project, whichever is longer.

F. During inspections the following will be observed and appropriate maintenance

procedures taken:

1. The conformance to specifications and current condition of all erosion and sediment control structures.

2. The effectiveness and operational success of all erosion and sediment control

measures.

3. The presence of sediments or other pollutants in storm water runoff at all runoff discharge points.

4. If reasonably accessible, the presence of sediments or other pollutants in receiving

Waters.

5. Evidence of off-site tracking at all locations where vehicles enter or exit the site.

G. An inspection checklist is included in the SWPPP. This checklist must be completed during each inspection, dated, and signed by the Qualified Person conducting the inspection. Completed inspection checklist shall be kept on-site with the Contract Documents and submitted to the Engineer on a monthly basis. The Contractor will repair deficiencies within 24 hours of inspection.

3.03 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY SEDIMENT CONTROL STRUCTURES

A. At such time that temporary erosion and control structures are no longer required under this item, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the City of Richmond of its intent and schedule for the removal of the temporary structures, and obtain the Engineer’s approval in writing prior to removal. Once the Contractor has received such written approval from the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove, as approved, the temporary structures and all sediments accumulated at the removed structure shall be returned upgrade. In areas where temporary control structures are removed, the site shall be left in a condition that will restore original drainage. Such areas shall be evenly graded and seeded as specified in Section 02910, Final Grading and Landscaping.

3.04 NOTICE OF TERMINATION

A. When all construction activities have ceased, final stabilization has been implemented by the Contractor, and the site is in compliance with the VPDES permit, the Contractor, together with the Engineer shall submit a Notice of Termination.


- END OF SECTION -

(NO TEXT THIS PAGE)


SECTION 02500

SURFACE RESTORATION PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Provide all labor, equipment, and materials necessary for final grading, topsoil placement, and miscellaneous site work not included under other Sections but required to complete the work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.


A. Section 02200 - Earthwork

B. Section 02276 - Erosion and Sedimentation Control

C. Section 02910 - Final Grading and Landscaping PART 2 -- MATERIALS 2.01 TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil shall meet the requirements of Section 02200 – Earthwork. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 FINAL GRADING

A. Following approval of rough grading the subgrade shall be prepared as follows:

1. For riprap, bare soil 24 inches below finish grade or as directed by Engineer.

2. For topsoil, scarify 2-inches deep at 4 inches below finish grade. 3.02 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT

A. Topsoil shall be placed over all areas disturbed during construction under any contract except those areas which will be paved, graveled or rip rapped.

B. Topsoil shall be spread in place for lawn and road shoulder seed areas at a 4-inch

consolidated depth and at a sufficient quantity for plant beds and backfill for shrubs and trees.

C. Topsoil shall not be placed in a frozen or muddy condition.

08

29

05

BR


D. Final surface shall be hand or mechanically raked to an even finished surface to finish

grade as shown on Drawings. E. All stones and roots over 4-inches and rubbish and other deleterious materials shall be

removed and disposed of.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 02510

PAVING AND SURFACING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials and perform all operations in connection with the construction of asphalt concrete pavement, asphalt concrete overlay, concrete curb and gutter, repair and reconstruction of existing asphalt concrete pavement, repair of existing gravel roads, and pavement markings complete as specified herein and as detailed on the Drawings.

B. All new roads including the replacement of portions of the existing roads shall be to the

limits, grades, thicknesses and types as shown on the Drawings. Patches for pipe crossings and areas damaged during the construction work shall be asphalt and/or gravel, depending upon the material encountered, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Requirements of related work are included in Division 1, Division 2 and Division 3 of these Specifications.


A. Section 02200 - Earthwork

B. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.04 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Except as otherwise provided in the Specifications or on the plans, all work shall be in accordance with the Virginia Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Roads and Structures, 2016 except that any reference to "VDOT", "Department" or "Unit" shall mean the "Owner". When reference to these Specifications is intended, the description will be VDOT Section or VDOT Specifications.

B. Except with the approval of the Engineer, the placing of asphalt concrete surface paving

shall be subject to the Seasonal and Weather Restrictions set forth in VDOT Specifications.


PART 2 -- MATERIALS 2.01 SELECT FILL

A. The Contractor shall place select fill as necessary to complete the embankments, shoulders, subgrade foundation and replacement for removed unsuitable material in accordance with VDOT Section 303, and Section 02200, Earthwork.

2.02 GRAVEL

A. All work, including materials, associated with gravel shall be in accordance with VDOT Section 207, Select Material, except that Articles 207.07 shall be deleted.

2.03 AGGREGATE STABILIZATION

A. All work, including materials, associated with Aggregate Stabilization shall be in accordance with VDOT Sections 306 and 307, Lime and Hydraulic Cement Stabilization, except that Articles 306.04 and 307.06, shall be deleted.

2.04 AGGREGATE BASE MATERIAL

A. All work, including materials, associated with Aggregate Base Material shall be in accordance with VDOT Section 208, Aggregate Base Material, except that Article 208.08 shall be deleted. Type 21-A or Type 21-B aggregate shall be acceptable for this project.

2.05 ASPHALT BINDER FOR PLANT MIX

A. All work, including materials, associated with asphalt binder shall be in accordance with Section 210, Asphalt Materials, Grade PG 64H-22, of the VDOT Standard Specifications for Roads and Structures, except Article 210.09shall be deleted.

2.06 ASPHALT PAVEMENTS

A. All work, including materials, associated with asphalt pavement shall be in accordance with Section 211, Asphalt Concrete, of the VDOT Standard Specifications for Roads and Structures.

B. Surface Course shall be Superpave S-9.5A and Base Course shall be Superpave B-25.0A. Asphalt pavement mix designs shall be in accordance with TABLE II-14 of the VDOT Specifications.

C. The job mix formulas shall be delivered to the Engineer at least two (2) weeks prior to

beginning paving operations. 2.07 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERS

A. Concrete shall be Class B in accordance with the requirements of Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete, except that concrete shall be air-entrained to provide an air content of 6% ± 1.5%.


B. Premolded expansion joint filler for expansion joints shall conform to ASTM D 1751 and

shall be 1/2-inch thick, minimum. 2.08 ASPHALT TACK COAT

A. All work, including materials, associated with asphalt tack coat shall be in accordance with Section 310 - Tack Coat, of the VDOT Standard Specifications for Roads and Structures, except that Article 310.04 shall be deleted.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 SUBGRADE

A. The subgrade, where shown on the Drawings, shall be aggregate stabilized by the addition and mixing of coarse aggregate with the top 3-inches of subgrade in accordance with VDOT Section 308 – Subbase Coarse. Aggregate stabilization shall be applied to the subgrade at a rate of 300-pounds per square yard. Following the application of stabilizer aggregate, the subgrade shall be formed true to crown and grade, and shall be compacted with a minimum of four (4) passes of a 15-ton vibratory roller to conform to the maximum densities determined by AASHTO T99 Standard Specifications.

3.02 AGGREGATE BASE MATERIAL

A. The finished base course of all paving shall be Aggregate Base Material and shall be of the thickness shown on the Drawings, formed true to crown and grade.

3.03 ASPHALT BASE COURSE (OR INTERMEDIATE COURSE)

A. Asphalt Concrete Base (or Intermediate) Course shall be placed in accordance with VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications Section 315 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement. Asphalt Concrete Base (or Intermediate) Course shall be compacted in accordance with VDOT Specifications. Thicknesses shall be as shown on the Drawings.

3.04 ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE

A. Prior to placement of the asphalt concrete surface course, the base/intermediate course shall be inspected for damage or defects and repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The surface of the base/intermediate course shall be approved by the Engineer.

B. The asphalt tack coat shall be applied to the surface of the approved base/binder course

as described in VDOT Section 310. Equipment for applying the tack coat shall be power-oriented pressure spraying or distributing equipment suitable for the materials to be applied and approved by the Engineer.

C. The Asphalt Concrete Surface Course shall be placed and compacted on the

base/intermediate course in layers not to exceed 2-inches and at the rate of 110-pounds per square yard per inch. Surface Course shall be compacted in accordance with VDOT Specifications. Thicknesses shall be as shown on the Drawings.


3.05 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER

A. The expansion joint filler for concrete curb and gutters shall be cut to conform with the cross section of the curb. Expansion joints shall be spaced at intervals of not more than 25-feet. Formed control joints shall be installed at intervals not exceeding 10 feet. Depth of joint shall be 1/3 the thickness. Curved forms shall be used where radii are indicated; straight segments shall not be permitted. Upon removal of the forms, exposed curb faces shall be immediately rubbed down to a smooth and uniform surface. No plastering shall be permitted.

3.06 UNDERGROUND UTILITY LINES

A. Where an underground utility line is beneath the new roadway, the backfilling shall be carried out with special care, and the final consolidation shall be accomplished by a vibratory roller. Construction of the roadway over the trench shall be deferred as long as practicable.

3.07 JUNCTION WITH OTHER PAVING

A. Where new asphalt concrete pavement abuts existing asphalt concrete pavement, the existing pavement shall be cut back to insure obtaining the specified compaction of the new pavement courses and interlocking adjoining courses. Existing subbase courses shall be cut back from the subgrade level of the new pavement on a one-on-one slope into the existing pavement, and the asphalt courses of the existing pavement shall be removed for an additional 6-inches back from the slope. The edge of the existing asphalt courses shall be saw cut straight and true. The faces between new and existing asphalt courses shall receive an application of tack coat. The surface elevation of new pavement shall match the elevation of existing pavement.

B. Where new rigid concrete pavement abuts existing rigid concrete or asphalt concrete

paving, the existing paving shall be saw cut straight and true. An expansion joint of a 1/2-inch minimum thickness with filler material and sealant shall be placed between the new concrete pavement and the existing rigid concrete or asphalt concrete paving.

3.08 ASPHALT CONCRETE OVERLAY

A. Where asphalt concrete is proposed to be placed over an existing asphalt or rigid concrete surface, the surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by power brooming and a tack coat shall be applied in accordance with VDOT Section 310 – Tack Coat, of the Roads and Bridge Specifications, prior to installing the overlay. The overlay shall be applied in accordance with Subsections 2.06 and 3.05 and Standard Details shown on the Drawings.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 02604

UTILITY STRUCTURES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, and tools required for the design, fabrication, delivery and installment of utility structures and appurtenances in accordance with the Drawings and as specified herein.


A. Section 02200 – Earthwork

B. Section 03250 – Concrete Accessories

C. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete

D. Section 03400 – Precast Concrete 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid.

1. ASTM C478 – Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole

Sections 2. ASTM C857 – Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast

Concrete Utility Structures 3. ASTM C990 - Specifications for Joints in Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and

Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit samples and/or Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

B. In addition to items listed in Section 03400, Precast Concrete, Shop Drawings shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Complete layout and installation Drawings and schedules with clearly marked

dimensions.

04

11

13

BR


2. Material certificates on all piping materials.

3. Structural design calculations sealed by a P.E. registered in the Commonwealth of Virginia. Design calculations for precast manholes and vaults shall include confirmation structures adequately resist flotation when they are totally empty and subjected to groundwater full height of structure.

4. Results of leakage test

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 PRECAST MANHOLES, VAULTS, AND METER BOXES

A. Precast utility structures shall be furnished with waterstops, sleeves and openings as noted on the Drawings. Box out for wall pipes shall conform accurately to the sizes and elevations of the adjoining pipes. Precast utility structures shall be watertight and conform to the requirements of ASTM C 478 and ASTM C857 with the following modifications there to:

1. Materials shall conform to Section 03400, Precast Concrete.

2. The date and name of manufacturer shall be marked inside each precast section.

3. No more than two lift holes may be cast or drilled in each section.

4. Dimensions shall be as shown on the Drawings.

5. Covers and frames shall be as specified in Section 2.10.

6. Mechanical Details such as piping, electrical, and other details shall be as shown

on the Drawings.

B. Joints between manhole and utility structures riser sections and at base slabs shall be groove type.

2.02 CONCRETE

A. Concrete shall conform to Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2.03 PRECAST CONCRETE

A. Precast concrete shall conform to Section 03400, Precast Concrete. 2.04 CONCRETE BLOCK

A. Concrete block shall be solid, rectangular concrete masonry units conforming to ASTM C139.

2.05 STEPS


A. Steps shall be constructed of Grade 60 steel reinforcing rod (min. 1/2-inch) and completely

encapsulated with a wear resistant and chemical resistant rubber.

B. Each step shall have a minimum vertical load resistance of 800 pounds and a minimum pull-out resistance of 400 pounds.

C. The steps shall have 11-inch minimum tread width and shall be placed at 16-inches on

center, as shown on the Drawings.

D. Steps shall be cast in place with the concrete.

E. Steps shall only be installed as shown on the Drawings or required in the Specifications. 2.06 JOINT SEALANT

A. Joint sealant shall be a preformed flexible sealant conforming to the requirements of ASTM C990, paragraph 6.2, Butyl Rubber Sealant. Joint sealant shall be Pro-Stik Butyl Sealant by Press-Seal, Butyl-Nek Join Sealant by Henry ,CS-102 Butyl Rubber Sealant for all Precast Structures by ConSeal, or equal.

2.07 FLEXIBLE RUBBER SLEEVE

A. The spring set type shall have a stainless steel interior power sleeve or expander and shall be the PSX assembly by Press-Seal Gasket Corporation, the Kor-N-Seal assembly by National Pollution Control Systems, or Lock Joint Flexible Manhole Sleeve by Interpace Corp.

B. The cast-in-place type shall conform to ASTM C923 and shall include stainless steel take

up clamps.

C. Flexible seal assemblies shall permit at least an eight (8) degree deflection from the center line of the opening in any direction while maintaining a watertight connection.

2.08 COVERS AND FRAMES

A. Vault covers shall have lifting handles and shall be bolted with stainless steel bolts. B. Stainless steel bolts shall conform to ASTM F-593. All underwater fasteners, fasteners in

confined areas containing fluid, and fasteners in corrosive environments shall be Type 316 stainless steel unless noted otherwise. Fasteners for aluminum and stainless steel members not subject to the above conditions shall be Type 304 stainless steel unless otherwise noted.

C. Stainless steel bolts shall have hexagonal heads with a raised letter or symbol on the bolts

indicating the manufacturer, and shall be supplied with hexagonal nuts meeting the requirements of ASTM F594. Nuts shall be of the same alloy as the bolts.

D. All frames and covers shall be given one shop coat of asphalt or coal tar varnish, unless

otherwise specified.


E. Frames and covers shall be identical throughout the Contract.

2.09 CONCRETE BALLAST

A. Concrete ballast shall be Class B concrete in conformance with Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. Ballast shall be provided as necessary to insure manhole resists flotation when empty and subjected to full height groundwater conditions.

2.10 FLEXIBLE JOINT SEALER

A. Flexible joint sealer shall be a rubber ring waterstop as manufactured by Fernco Joint Sealer Co., or equal.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Minimum structural design loading for underground precast concrete vaults shall be as indicated in ASTM C857, unless otherwise noted herein. Precast items subjected to vehicular traffic shall be designed for H-20 traffic loading. Other precast items shall be designed for a vertical live load of 300 psf.

B. Walls of precast items shall be designed for a vertical surcharge of 100 psf. C. Precast manholes and vaults shall be designed to resist flotation when totally empty and

subjected to groundwater full height of the manhole/vault. 3.02 FABRICATION AND CASTING

A. Fabrication and casting shall conform to Section 03400, Precast Concrete, and to Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. All base sections designated to receive concrete ballast and all electrical manholes shall

extend monolithically a minimum of 6 inches beyond the outside face of the wall for the entire periphery. All other utility structures shall have a standard base.

3.03 HANDLING, TRANSPORTING, AND STORING

A. Handling, transporting and storing of precast items shall comply with Section 03400, Precast Concrete.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall conform with Section 03400, Precast Concrete and with the manufacturer's recommendations or to Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.


B. Frames and covers or grates shall be set so that tops are at elevations indicated on the Drawings or flush with finished grade where no elevation is indicated.

C. Joints between riser sections shall be sealed with joint sealant.

D. All openings in utility structures shall have flexible rubber sleeves sized to fit the

connecting pipe and installed to provide watertight joints in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The interior of the sleeve shall be filled with Class B concrete.

E. Openings that are too large for flexible rubber sleeves shall utilize rubber bladder seals

which are expanded by water injected using a pressure pump.

F. All units shall be installed plumb and level.

G. All lift holes and joints shall be filled with non-shrink grout conforming to Section 03600, grout inside and out.

H. Concrete ballast shall be placed so that it bears directly on the utility structure base against

the outer wall monolithically encircling the structure for the full height indicated on the Drawings. Additional ballast may be required where the depth or elevation of the structure varies from the Drawings.

I. Backfill structures in accordance with Section 02200, Earthwork.

J. Clean all structures of any accumulation of silt, debris, or foreign matter and keep clean

until final acceptance of the work.

K. Excavation shall conform to Section 02200, Earthwork.

L. Structure bases shall bear on a minimum of 8 inches of compacted stone unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

- END OF SECTION -


(NO TEXT THIS PAGE)


SECTION 02910

FINAL GRADING AND LANDSCAPING

PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish all labor, equipment, and materials necessary for final grading, topsoiling, seeding, and miscellaneous site work not included under other Sections, but required to complete the work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Under this Section, all areas of the project site disturbed by excavation, materials storage, temporary roads, etc., shall be reseeded as specified herein.


A. Section 02276 - Erosion and Sedimentation Control.

B. Section 02500 - Surface Restoration. 1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data

2. Certification of all materials

3. Three (3) copies of composition and germination certification and of test results for grass seed.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Furnish and submit certification for the materials used as specified in the General Conditions, Division 1 and Division 2.

2.02 TOPSOIL

A. Upon completion and Engineer’s approval of the rough grading, the Contractor shall place the topsoil over all areas disturbed during construction under any contract except those areas which will be paved, graveled or rip rapped. Topsoil shall not be placed in a frozen or muddy condition and shall contain no toxic materials harmful to grass growth. Topsoil shall be as defined under Section 02200, Earthwork.

2.03 WATER

083005BR


A. Water shall be furnished to the Contractor by the Owner from existing facilities as directed by the Engineer.

B. The Contractor shall furnish all hoses and connections necessary to complete the

landscaping work. 2.04 FERTILIZER

A. Fertilizer shall be a complete commercial fertilizer with components derived from commercial sources. Fertilizer composition shall be determined from field soil sampling in appropriate number taken by the Contractor and analyzed by the Cooperative Extension Service Soil Testing Laboratory at VPI & SU or by a reputable commercial laboratory. Contractor shall furnish fertilizer in accordance with the recommendations of the testing laboratory and Section 3.32 of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook (VESCH).

B. Fertilizer shall be delivered in standard size bags marked with the weight, analysis of

contents, and the name of the manufacturer. Fertilizer shall be stored in weatherproof storage areas and in such a manner that its effectiveness will not be impaired.

2.05 LIME

A. Contractor shall use an agricultural grade of limestone. Quantity shall be determined from field soil sampling in appropriate number taken by the Contractor and analyzed by the Cooperative Extension Service Soil Testing Laboratory at VPI & SU or by a reputable commercial laboratory. Contractor shall furnish lime in accordance with the recommendations of the testing laboratory and Section 3.32 of the VESCH.

B. At least 50% shall pass a No. 200 U.S.S. mesh sieve. At least 90% shall pass a No. 100

U.S.S. mesh sieve and 100% shall pass a No. 10 U.S.S. mesh sieve. Total carbonates shall not be less than 80% or 44.8% Calcium Oxide equivalent. For the purpose of calculation, total carbonates shall be considered as Calcium Carbonate.

2.06 GRASS SEED

A. Provide the kinds and amounts of seed to be seeded in areas disturbed by the construction work. All seed shall bear an official “Certified Seed” labeled and meet the requirements in Section 3.32 of the VESCH. All seed must have been certified by Virginia Crop Improvement Association within twelve (12) months immediately preceding the planting of such material on the job.

B. The inoculant for treating legume seed mixture shall be a pure culture of nitrogen-fixing

bacteria prepared specifically for the species. Inoculants shall not be used later than the date indicated on the container. Inoculants should be applied at two times the supplier’s recommended rate on dry seedings and five times the recommended rate when included in hydroseeder slurry. The quality of the seed shall conform to the following:


Type

Minimum Seed Purity

(%)

Minimum Germination

(%)

Maximum Weed Seed

(%)

Kentucky 31 Tall Fescue 97 85 0.50

Perennial Ryegrass 98 90 0.50

Kentucky Bluegrass 97 85 0.50

Annual Ryegrass 97 90 0.50

Weeping Lovegrass 98 87 0.50

German Millet 98 85 0.50

Cereal (Winter) Rye 98 85 0.50

Redtop 94 80 0.50

C. Seed mixtures to be used on the project shall be as shown on the Drawings.

2.07 WOOD CELLULOSE FIBER MULCH

A. For use in hydroseeding grass seed in combination with fertilizers and other approved additions, shall consist of especially prepared wood cellulose fibers such as "Conwed", "Silva-Fiber", or approved substitute, and have no growth or germination inhibiting factors, and be dyed green.

B. The wood cellulose fiber shall have the additional characteristic of dispersing rapidly in

water to form a homogeneous slurry and remain in such state when agitated in the hydraulic mulching unit, or adequate equal, with the specified materials.

C. When applied, the wood cellulose fiber with additives will form an absorptive mat but not

a plant inhibiting membrane, which will allow moisture, natural or mechanical, to percolate into underlying soil.

D. Fiber mulch can be applied over top of newly seeded areas immediately after seed mixture

is applied to soil bed or applied as part of the hydroseeded slurry containing the seed mixture. Anchored straw mulch shall be used in place of fiber mulch during hot and dry summer months and late fall. Fiber mulch can be used to tack (anchor) straw mulch. All fiber mulch shall adhere to requirements set forth in Section 3.35 of the VESCH.


E. The mulch shall be supplied, compressed in packages containing 50 pounds of material having an equilibrium air dry moisture content at time of manufacture of 12% plus or minus 2%. Wood cellulose fiber mulch shall be stored in a weatherproof storage area and in such a manner that effectiveness will not be impaired.

2.08 STRAW MULCH

A. Straw used for mulch shall be wheat or oats. Straw shall be undamaged, air dry, threshed straw, free of undesirable weed seed. Straw mulch shall be spread by hand or machine and must be anchored or tacked down. Straw mulch is not required for seeded areas treated with a temporary soil stabilizer. All straw mulch shall adhere to requirements set forth in Section 3.35 of the VESCH.

2.09 TEMPORARY SOIL STABILIZER

A. The temporary agent for soil erosion control shall consist of an especially prepared highly concentrated powder which, when mixed with water, forms a thick liquid such as "Enviroseal 2001" by Enviroseal Corporation, "Terra Control" by Quattro Environmental, Inc., or "CHEM-CRETE ECO-110” by International CHEM-CRETE Corporation, and having no growth or germination inhibiting factors. The agent shall be used for hydroseeding grass seed in combination with other approved amendments resulting in a highly viscous slurry which, when sprayed directly on the soil, forms a gelatinous crust.

2.10 TREE SHRUB PLANTING

A. Provide trees and shrubs as shown on the Drawings and as specified in Section 3.37 of VESCH.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 GRADING

A. After approval of the rough grading, the Contractor shall commence his preparations of the subgrade for the various major conditions of the work as follows:

1. Bare soil for riprap area at subgrade (24-inches below final grade, or as directed

by the Engineer).

2. Topsoil for lawn and road shoulder seed area - scarify 2-inch depth of subgrade (4-inches below final grade) prior to placing topsoil.

B. Final surface grading of the topsoiled, landscape graveled, and riprapped areas shall be

mechanically raked or hand raked to an even finished surface alignment. 3.02 TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil shall be spread in place for quantity required for lawn and road shoulder seed areas at 4-inch consolidated depth, and sufficient quantity for certain plant beds and backfill for shrubs and trees as specified.


B. Topsoil shall be hospitable as a growth medium meeting all requirements as indicated by

Sections 3.30 & 3.32 of VESCH. 3.03 HYDROSEEDING AND GRASS

A. The Contractor shall grow a stand of grass on disturbed areas. The Contractor shall be responsible for the satisfactory growth of grass throughout the period of the one-year guarantee from Contract Closeout.

B. The Contractor's work shall include the preparation of the topsoil and bare soil seed bed,

application of fertilizer, limestone, mulching, inoculant, temporary soil stabilizer, watering, and other operations necessary to provide a satisfactory growth of sod at the end of the one-year maintenance period.

C. When hydraulic seeding method is used, include all additives and amendments required.

A "Reinco", "Finn", or "Bowie" type hydromulcher with adjustable nozzles and extension hoses, or approved substitute, shall be utilized. General capacity of tank should range from 500 to 2,500 gallons, or as approved by the Engineer.

D. Hydraulic seeding shall be carried out in three steps. Step one shall consist of the

application of lime. In step two the seed mixture shall be mixed with the fertilizer, wood cellulose fiber mulch, and any required inoculants and applied to the seed bed. The seed mixture can be applied as a separate process prior to the application of the slurry mixture. Step three shall consist of application of top dressing during the first spring or fall, whichever comes first, after step two.

E. Top dressing shall consist of a commercial grade fertilizer plus Nitrogen or other analysis

as may be recommended by soil testing. Types and application rates of seed mixtures shall be as shown in the Seeding Schedule.

F. Ingredients for the mixture and steps should be dumped into a tank of water and

thoroughly mixed to a homogeneous slurry and sprayed out under a minimum of 300-350 pounds pressure, in suitable proportions to accommodate the type and capacity of the hydraulic machine to be used. Applications shall be evenly sprayed over the ground surface. The Contractor shall free the topsoil of stones, roots, rubbish, and other deleterious materials and dispose of same off the site. The bare soil, except existing steep embankment area, shall be rough raked to remove stones, roots, and rubbish over 4-inches in size, and other deleterious materials and dispose of same off the site.

G. No seeding should be undertaken in windy or unfavorable weather, when the ground is

too wet to rake easily, when it is in a frozen condition, or too dry. Any bare spots shown in two to three weeks shall be recultivated, fertilized at half the rate, raked, seeded, and mulched again by mechanical or hand broadcast method acceptable to the Engineer.

H. Areas that have been seeded with a temporary seed mixture shall be mowed to a height

of less than 2-inches and scarified prior to seeding with the permanent seed mixture.

I. The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, protection for all seeded areas against trespassing and damage at all times until acceptance of the work. Slopes shall be


protected from damage due to erosion, settlement, and other causes and shall be repaired promptly at the Contractor's expense.

J. The Contractor shall water newly seeded areas of the lawn and road shoulder mix once a

week until the grasses have germinated sufficiently to produce a healthy turf, or unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Each watering shall provide three (3) gallons per square yard. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary hoses, sprinklers, and connections.

K. The first and second cutting of the lawn grasses only shall be done by the Contractor. All

subsequent cuttings will be done by the Owner's forces in a manner specified by the Contractor.

3.05 MAINTENANCE

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all seeded areas through the end of his warranty period. Maintenance shall include but not be limited to, annual fertilization, repair of seeded areas, irrigation (until permanent vegetation is fully established), and weed control. The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, protection for all seeded areas against trespassing and damage at all times until acceptance of the work. Slopes shall be protected from damage due to erosion, settlement, and other causes and shall be repaired promptly at the Contractor's expense.

B. Annual fertilization shall consist of an application of 500#/acre of 10-10-10 commercial

grade fertilizer, or its equivalent and 60#/acre of nitrogen in early fall, or other analysis as may be determined by soil test. Annual fertilization shall be in addition to top dressing and shall be performed by the Contractor each fall season after planting until the work is substantially complete.

C. Mowing shall be scheduled so as to maintain a minimum stand height of 4-inches or as

directed by the Engineer. Stand height shall be allowed to reach 8 to 10-inches prior to mowing.

D. All seeded areas shall be inspected on a regular basis and any necessary repairs or

reseedings made within the planting season, if possible. If the stand should be over 60% damaged, it shall be re-established following the original seeding recommendations.

E. Weed growth shall be maintained mechanically and/or with herbicides. When chemicals

are used, the Contractor shall follow the current Virginia Agricultural Experiment Stations' weed control recommendations and adhere strictly to the instructions on the label of the herbicide. No herbicide shall be used without prior approval of the Engineer.

3.06 CLEANUP

A. The Contractor shall remove from the site all subsoil excavated from his work and all other debris including, but not limited to, branches, paper, and rubbish in all landscape areas, and remove temporary barricades as the work proceeds.


B. All areas shall be kept in a neat, orderly condition at all times. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall clean up the entire landscaped area to the satisfaction of the Engineer.


3.07 SEEDING SCHEDULE

A. All seeding and mulching to be completed by the Contractor shall conform to Sections 3.32 and 3.35 of the VESCH. No permanent seeding shall be performed from May 1 - August 31 and November 1 – February 31. Temporary seed mixtures will be used during these times if seeding is necessary. Areas seeded with temporary seed mixtures shall be reseeded by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner with permanent seed as directed by the Engineer.

B. Application rates of seed mixtures, lime, fertilizer, mulch and top dressing are shown on

the Drawings.


SEEDING SCHEDULE

Application Rates (Pounds/Acre)

Seedb Mixture

Planting Season Limea Seed Fertilizera,d

Strawe Mulch Topdressinga

Annual Fertilizer Comments

P Feb. 15-April 30 Sept. 1-Oct. 31

4000 200 1000 of

10-20-10

4000 500 of 10-10-10 60 of Nitrogen

Same as Topdressing

Preferred planting seasons are Sept. 1 – Sept. 30 and Feb. 15 – March 30.

TW Sept. 1-Feb. 15 -c 100 600 4000 - - Over seed with Type P seed mixture during next planting season.

TSP Feb. 16-Apr. 30 -c 100 600 4000 - - Over seed with Type P seed mixture during next planting season.

TSU May 1-Aug. 31 -c 50 600 4000 - - Over seed with Type P seed mixture during next planting season.

Footnotes: a. Application rates and/or chemical analysis shall be confirmed or established by soil test.

b. On cut and fill slopes 2:1 or steeper add 20#/acre of Weeping Lovegrass to the P seed mixture in the Spring and add 20#/acre Annual Ryegrass in Fall and Winter.

c. Lime requirements for temporary seeding shall be based on pH test results for site, according to the following table:

pH Test Recommended Application Below 4.2 3 tons/acre 4.2 to 5.2 2 tons/acre 5.2 to 6 1 ton/acre

d. Fertilizer shall be a 10-20-10 mix or equivalent nutrients.

e. Alternative methods of mulching may be utilized. Alternative methods shall conform to requirements in the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 02960

TRAFFIC CONTROL PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. The Contractor shall develop a maintenance of traffic plan and obtain appropriate Work-in-Streets Permit prior to prosecution of the work.

B. The Contractor shall plan work sequence to minimize the duration of traffic impacts and traffic control activities.

1.02 STREET SIGNS AND MARKERS AND ROUTE MARKERS

A. The Contractor shall move any existing street signs and markers and route markers out of the construction limits of the project and install the street signs and markers and route markers so that they will be visible to the traveling public if there is sufficient right of way for these signs and markers outside of the construction limits.

B. Near the completion of the project and when so directed by the Engineer, the Contractor

shall move the signs and markers and install them in their proper location in regard to the finished pavement of the project.

C. Any signs or markers which cannot be relocated due to lack of right-of-way, or any signs

and markers which will no longer be applicable after the construction of the project, shall be stockpiled at locations directed by the Engineer for removal by others.

D. The Contractor will be responsible to the Owner for any damage to any street signs and

markers or route markers during the above described operations.

E. No direct payment will be made for relocating, reinstalling, and/or stockpiling the street signs and markers and route markers as such work will be considered incidental.

PART 2 -- MATERIALS 2.01 CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES

A. Description - The work covered by this Section consists of furnishing, erecting, maintaining, relocating, and removing traffic control devices in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, MUTCD, or as directed by the Engineer. The MUTCD referred to in this provision shall be the current edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways, as prepared by the National Advisory Committee on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, including all standard documents referred to in the second paragraph of Section 1A-7 of the MUTCD. The current edition shall be the edition current on the date of advertisement for the Project. All traffic control devices furnished by the Contractor shall remain the property of the Contractor, unless otherwise required by the Contract. Traffic control devices shall include, but not be limited to signs, non-

10

22

08

BR


metallic drums, barricades, cones, delineators, temporary guardrail, temporary pavement marking, raised reflective pavement markers, flaggers and pilot vehicles, as required.

B. Materials - General - Unless otherwise required, materials used in the fabrication and

installation of construction traffic control devices shall be in accordance with the applicable provision of the MUTCD. When traffic control devices are no longer required for traffic handling in the initial phase of construction requiring their use, they may be reused at various locations throughout the project provided the device is not defaced, is structurally sound, clean, and otherwise conforms to the above requirements.

C. Traffic control devices which do not meet the requirements of this Section shall not be

used; and, when during the life of a project, a device ceases to meet the requirements of this Section it shall be promptly removed and replaced with a conforming device at no additional compensation. The Engineer shall have the authority to determine the acceptability of the traffic control devices.

D. Construction Methods - General - Traffic control devices shall be installed at the inception

of construction operations, and shall be properly maintained, relocated as necessary, cleaned, and operated during the time they are in use. They shall remain in place only as long as they are needed and shall be immediately removed thereafter. Where operations are performed in stages, only those devices that apply to the conditions present shall be left in place.

E. The location, legends, sheeting, dimensions, number of supports, and horizontal and

vertical placement of warning signs, barricades, and other traffic control devices shall be as required by the MUTCD. The Contractor may submit for the Engineer's consideration a method for handling traffic other than as shown on the Drawings. The alternate traffic handling plans shall not be used until they are approved by the Engineer in writing. During periods when not warranted, warning signs and other devices shall be removed from the work area, covered with specified material, or otherwise positioned so they do not convey their message to the traveling public. If covered, the covering material shall be exterior plywood and shall cover the entire face of the sign panel. The covering material shall be installed in such a manner that the sign panel will not be defaced. Covering material shall be maintained in a neat and workmanlike manner during its use.

F. Weeds, brush, trees, construction materials, equipment, etc., shall not be allowed to

obscure any traffic control device in use.

G. If cones are used for delineation at night, each cone shall have any appropriate white reflectorized cone collar.

H. Competent and properly trained flaggers, properly attired and equipped, shall be provided

when directed by the Engineer or when the Contractor deems it necessary to safely handle traffic through the construction area.

I. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the continuous and expeditious

maintenance of all construction warning signs, barricades, and other traffic control devices. Maintenance shall include repair and replacement of traffic control devices which, in the opinion of the Engineer, are damaged by traffic or other means, or deteriorated beyond effectiveness. Conditions covered under maintenance shall include but not be limited to replacement due to loss of reflectivity; replacement of broken supports; plumbing


of leaning signs; cleaning of dirty signs, barricades, and other devices; repair of defaced sheeting and legend; and replacement of stolen or vandalized items. All items used for traffic control shall be maintained in a satisfactory condition. Failure to maintain all traffic control devices in a satisfactory condition may be cause for suspension of construction operations until proper traffic control is re-established.

J. The Contractor shall continuously review and maintain all traffic handling measures to

assure that adequate provisions have been made for the safety of the public and workers. 2.02 STATIONARY CONSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Description - The work covered by this Section consists of furnishing, erecting, relocating, maintaining, and removing stationary signs necessary for controlling traffic.

B. Materials - Reflective sheeting shall be used on all sign facing and shall meet the

requirements of AASHTO M268. The reflective sheeting shall be enclosed lens (Engineers grade) sheeting and shall have a smooth, sealed outer surface which will display the same color both day and night. The reflective sheeting on each sign shall have a smooth appearance. The reflective sheeting shall be applied in a workmanlike manner so that there are no bubbles or wrinkles in the material.

1. The Contractor shall furnish a material certification in accordance with VDOT

Standard Specifications for all new and used reflective sheeting as required by the Engineer.

C. Construction Methods - All work shall be in accordance with requirements of Section 2.01.

2.03 TYPE III BARRICADES

A. Description - The work covered by this Section consists of furnishing, erecting, maintaining, and removing Type III Barricades.

B. Construction Methods - All work shall be in accordance with requirements of Section 2.01.

2.04 PORTABLE TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES

A. Description - The work covered by this Section consists of furnishing erecting, relocating, maintaining, and removing portable temporary traffic control devices necessary for controlling traffic. Portable temporary traffic control devices shall include but not be limited to portable signs, non-metallic drums, barricades, cones, delineators, flaggers, pilot vehicles, and any other traffic control device not covered by any other Sections included in this Contract.

B. Portable Signs - Reflective sheeting shall be used on all sign facing and shall meet the

requirement of AASHTO M268. The reflective sheeting shall be enclosed lens (Engineers grade) sheeting and shall have a smooth, sealed outer surface which will display the same color both day and night. The reflective sheeting on each sign shall have a smooth appearance. The reflective sheeting shall be applied in a workmanlike manner so that there are no bubbles or wrinkles in the material.


1. The Contractor shall furnish a material certification in accordance with VDOT Standard Specifications for all new and used reflective sheeting as required by the Engineer.

C. Non-Metallic Drums - The drums shall be made of plastic impact resistant material. The

drums shall have a two-piece, breakaway design that will maintain its integrity upon impact throughout a temperature range of –20°F to 125°F. Upon impact the upper portion of the drum shall deform and breakaway from the base, minimizing damage to drums or vehicles. The base and ballast shall remain in position and vehicle shall easily pass over it.

1. The drums shall be designed to have two TYPE "A" or "C" light wells located on

the top surface of the drums. The drums shall be designed with a top to completely seal the drums to prevent water from accumulating and freezing in the bottom of the drums. The base shall be designed to accommodate a sandbag of 40 lbs. to 60 lbs. A sandbag with 50 lbs. of sand shall be supplied with each drum.

2. The drums shall have an assembled minimum height of 36", a minimum outside

base diameter of 21", and a combined minimum weight of 12 lbs.

3. The Contractor shall be required to furnish the Engineer a sample drum and its specifications for approval prior to the delivery of drums of the project.

4. The markings on drums shall be horizontal, circumferential, orange and white

stripes six to eight inches wide, covering entire outside. The entire area of orange and white shall be reflectorized with the enclosed lens (Engineers grade) sheeting, except for the corrugation area where a 2" non-reflectorized band will be allowed. There shall be at least two orange and two white stripes on each drum. Reflectorized material shall have a smooth, sealed outer surface which will display the same approximate color day and night. The reflective sheeting shall meet the requirement os AASHTO M268.

D. Construction Methods - All work shall be in accordance with the requirements of

Section 2.01. 2.05 FLASHING ARROW PANELS

A. Description - The work covered by this Section consists of furnishing, maintaining, moving, and relocating flashing arrow panels mounted on a trailer, truck, or other mobile unit.

B. Materials - The flashing arrow panels shall meet the requirements of the MUTCD

(Section 6E) for a Type A panel.

C. Construction Methods - All work shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 2.01.

D. During periods of times that traffic is shifted from its normal pattern, a mobile flashing

arrow panel shall be used.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 03100

CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Provide materials, labor, and equipment required for the design and construction of all concrete formwork, bracing, shoring and supports in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents.


A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS


1. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete

2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings

3. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork

4. U.S. Product Standard for Concrete Forms, Class I, PS 1

5. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and

Materials 1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer's data on proposed form release agent

2. Manufacturer's data on proposed formwork system including form ties 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Concrete formwork shall be in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 318, and ACI 347.

05

02

17

BR


PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMS AND FALSEWORK

A. All forms shall be smooth surface forms unless otherwise specified.

B. Wood materials for concrete forms and falsework shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Lumber for bracing, shoring, or supporting forms shall be Douglas Fir or Southern

Pine, construction grade or better, in conformance with U.S. Product Standard PS20. All lumber used for forms, shoring or bracing shall be new material.

2. Plywood for concrete formwork shall be new, waterproof, synthetic resin bonded,

exterior type Douglas Fir or Southern Pine high density overlaid (HDO) plywood manufactured especially for concrete formwork and shall conform to the requirements of PS1 for Concrete Forms, Class I, and shall be edge sealed. Thickness shall be as required to support concrete at the rate it is placed, but not less than 5/8-inch thick.

C. Other form materials such as metal, fiberglass, or other acceptable material that will not

adversely affect the concrete and will facilitate placement of concrete to the shape, form, line and grade indicated may be submitted to the Engineer for approval, but only materials that will produce a smooth form finish equal or better than the wood materials specified will be considered.

2.02 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Form ties shall be provided with a plastic cone or other suitable means for forming a conical hole to insure that the form tie may be broken off back of the face of the concrete. The maximum diameter of removable cones for rod ties, or of other removable form-tie fasteners having a circular cross-section, shall not exceed 7/8-inch, and all such fasteners shall be such as to leave holes of regular shape for reaming.

B. Form ties for water-retaining structures shall have integral waterstops. Removable taper

ties may be used when acceptable to the Engineer. A preformed mechanical EPDM rubber plug shall be used to seal the hole left after the removal of the taper tie. Plug shall be X-Plug by the Greenstreak Group, Inc., or approved equal. Friction fit plugs shall not be used.

C. Form release agent shall be a blend of natural and synthetic chemicals that employs a

chemical reaction to provide quick, easy and clean release of concrete from forms. It shall not stain the concrete and shall leave the concrete with a paintable surface. Formulation of the form release agent shall be such that it would minimize formation of "bug holes" in cast-in-place concrete.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION


3.01 FORM DESIGN

A. Forms and falsework shall be designed for total dead load, plus all construction live load as outlined in ACI 347. Design and engineering of formwork and safety considerations during construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Forms shall be of sufficient strength and rigidity to maintain their position and shape under

the loads and operations incident to placing and vibrating the concrete. The maximum deflection of facing materials reflected in concrete surfaces exposed to view shall be 1/240 of the span between structural members.

C. All forms shall be designed for predetermined placing rates per hour, considering expected

air temperatures and setting rates. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION

A. The type, size, quality, and strength of all materials from which forms are made shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. No falsework or forms shall be used which are not clean and suitable. Deformed, broken or defective falsework and forms shall be removed from the work.

B. Forms shall be smooth and free from surface irregularities. Suitable and effective means

shall be provided on all forms for holding adjacent edges and ends of panels and sections tightly together and in accurate alignment so as to prevent the formation of ridges, fins, offsets, or similar surface defects in the finished concrete. Joints between the forms shall be sealed to eliminate any irregularities. The arrangement of the facing material shall be orderly and symmetrical, with the number of seams kept to a practical minimum.

C. Forms shall be true to line and grade, and shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent displacement

and sagging between supports. Curved forms shall be used for curved and circular structures. Straight panels joined at angles will not be acceptable for forming curved structures. Forms shall be properly braced or tied together to maintain their position and shape under a load of freshly-placed concrete. Facing material shall be supported with studs or other backing which shall prevent both visible deflection marks in the concrete and deflections beyond the tolerances specified.

D. Forms shall be mortar tight so as to prevent the loss of water, cement and fines during

placing and vibrating of the concrete. Specifically, the bottom of wall forms that rest on concrete footings or slabs shall be provided with a gasket to prevent loss of fines and paste during placement and vibration of concrete. Such gasket may be a 1 to 1-1/2 inch diameter polyethylene rod held in position to the underside of the wall form.

E. All vertical surfaces of concrete members shall be formed, and side forms shall be

provided for all footings, slab edges and grade beams, except where placement of the concrete against the ground is called for on the Drawings. Not less than 1-inch of concrete shall be added to the thickness of the concrete member as shown where concrete is permitted to be placed against trimmed ground in lieu of forms. Such permission will be granted only for members of comparatively limited height and where the character of the ground is such that it can be trimmed to the required lines and will stand securely without caving or sloughing until the concrete has been placed.


F. All forms shall be constructed in such a manner that they can be removed without

hammering or prying against the concrete. Wood forms shall be constructed for wall openings to facilitate loosening and to counteract swelling of the forms.

G. Adequate clean-out holes shall be provided at the bottom of each lift of forms. Temporary

openings shall be provided at the base of column forms and wall forms and at other points to facilitate cleaning and observation immediately before the concrete is deposited. The size, number and location of such clean-outs shall be as acceptable to the Engineer.

H. Construction joints shall not be permitted at locations other than those shown or specified,

except as may be acceptable to the Engineer. When a second lift is placed on hardened concrete, special precautions shall be taken in the way of the number, location and tightening of ties at the top of the old lift and bottom of the new to prevent any unsatisfactory effect whatsoever on the concrete. For flush surfaces at construction joints exposed to view, the contact surface of the form sheathing over the hardened concrete in the previous placement shall be lapped by not more than 1 inch. Forms shall be held against hardened concrete to prevent offset or loss of mortar at construction joints and to maintain a true surface.

I. The formwork shall be cambered to compensate for anticipated deflections in the

formwork due to the weight and pressure of the fresh concrete and due to construction loads. Set forms and intermediate screed strips for slabs accurately to produce the designated elevations and contours of the finished surface. Ensure that edge forms and screed strips are sufficiently strong to support vibrating screeds or roller pipe screeds if the nature of the finish specified requires the use of such equipment. When formwork is cambered, set screeds to a like camber to maintain the proper concrete thickness.

J. Positive means of adjustment (wedges or jacks) for shores and struts shall be provided

and all settlement shall be taken up during concrete placing operation. Shores and struts shall be securely braced against lateral deflections. Wedges shall be fastened firmly in place after final adjustment of forms prior to concrete placement. Formwork shall be anchored to shores or other supporting surfaces or members to prevent upward or lateral movement of any part of the formwork system during concrete placement. If adequate foundation for shores cannot be secured, trussed supports shall be provided.

K. Runways shall be provided for moving equipment with struts or legs. Runways shall be

supported directly on the formwork or structural member without resting on the reinforcing steel.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, formwork shall be constructed so that the concrete surfaces will conform to the tolerance limits listed in ACI 117.

B. Structural framing of reinforced concrete around elevators and stairways shall be

accurately plumbed and located within 1/4 in. tolerance from established dimensions.


C. The Contractor shall establish and maintain in an undisturbed condition and until final completion and acceptance of the project, sufficient control points and bench marks to be used for reference purposes to check tolerances. Plumb and string lines shall be installed before concrete placement and shall be maintained during placement. Such lines shall be used by Contractor's personnel and by the Engineer and shall be in sufficient number and properly installed. During concrete placement, the Contractor shall continually monitor plumb and string line form positions and immediately correct deficiencies.

D. Regardless of the tolerances specified, no portion of the building shall extend beyond the

legal boundary of the building. 3.04 FORM ACCESSORIES

A. Suitable moldings shall be placed to bevel or round all exposed corners and edges of beams, columns, walls, slabs, and equipment pads. Chamfers shall be 3/4 inch unless otherwise noted.

B. Form ties shall be so constructed that the ends, or end fasteners, can be removed without

causing appreciable spalling at the faces of the concrete. After ends, or end fasteners of form ties have been removed, the embedded portion of the ties shall terminate not less than 2 inches from the formed face of the concrete that is exposed to water or enclosed surfaces above the water surface, and not less than 1 inch from the formed face of all other concrete. Holes left by the removal of form tie cones shall be reamed with suitable toothed reamers so as to leave the surface of the holes clean and rough before being filled with mortar as specified in Section 03350 - Concrete Finishing. No form-tying device or part thereof, other than metal, shall be left embedded in the concrete. Ties shall not be removed in such manner as to leave a hole extending through the interior of the concrete member. The use of snap-ties which cause spalling of the concrete upon form stripping or tie removal will not be permitted. No snap ties shall be broken off until the concrete is at least three days old. If steel panel forms are used, rubber grommets shall be provided where the ties pass through the form in order to prevent loss of cement paste.

3.05 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT

A. Forms for concrete surfaces that will not be subsequently waterproofed shall be coated with a form release agent. Form release agent shall be applied on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.06 INSERTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Sleeves, pipe stubs, inserts, anchors, expansion joint material, waterstops, and other embedded items shall be positioned accurately and supported against displacement prior to concreting. Voids in sleeves, inserts, and anchor slots shall be filled temporarily with readily removable material to prevent the entry of concrete into the voids.

3.07 FORM CLEANING AND REUSE

A. The inner faces of all forms shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to concreting. Forms may be reused only if in good condition and only if acceptable to the Engineer. Light sanding between uses will be required wherever necessary to obtain uniform surface texture.


Unused tie rod holes in forms shall be covered with metal caps or shall be filled by other methods acceptable to the Engineer.

3.08 FORM REMOVAL AND SHORING

A. Forms shall not be disturbed until the concrete has attained sufficient strength. Sufficient strength shall be demonstrated by structural analysis considering proposed loads, strength of forming and shoring system, and concrete strength data. Shoring shall not be removed until the supported member has acquired sufficient strength to support its weight and the load upon it. Members subject to additional loads during construction shall be adequately shored to sustain all resulting stresses. Forms shall be removed in such manner as not to impair safety and serviceability of the structure. All concrete to be exposed by form removal shall have sufficient strength not to be damaged thereby.

B. Provided the strength requirements specified above have been met and subject to the

Engineer's approval, forms may be removed at the following minimum times. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the strength of all such components from which forms are removed prior to the concrete attaining its full design compressive strength. Shoring may be required at the option of the Engineer beyond these periods.

Ambient Temperature (°F.) During Concrete Placement

Over 95° 70°-95° 60°-70° 50°-60° Below 50°

Walls 5 days 2 days 2 days 3 days Do not remove until directed by Engineer (7 days minimum)

Elevated Slabs 12 days 7 days 7 days 7 days

C. When, in the opinion of the Engineer, conditions of the work or weather justify, forms may be required to remain in place for longer periods of time.

D. An accurate record shall be maintained by the Contractor of the dates of concrete placings

and the exact location thereof and the dates of removal of forms. These records shall be available for inspection at all times at the site, and two copies shall be furnished the Engineer upon completion of the concrete work.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 03300

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Provide all labor, equipment, materials and services necessary for the manufacture, transportation and placement of all plain and reinforced concrete work, as shown on the Drawings or as ordered by the Engineer.

B. The requirements in this section shall apply to the following types of concrete:

1. Class A2 Concrete: Normal weight structural concrete in all structures, thrust

blocks/collars, tapping sleeve encasement, and for all sidewalks and pavement.

2. Class B Concrete: Normal weight structural concrete used for duct bank encasements, catch basins, fence and guard post embedment, concrete fill, and other areas where specifically noted on Contract Drawings.


A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork

B. Section 03370 - Concrete Curing C. Section 03600 - Grout


A. Without limiting the generality of the Specifications, all work herein shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid.

1. International Building Code 2. ACI 214 Guide to Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete 3. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete 4. ACI 304 Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing

Concrete 5. ACI 305 Guide to Hot Weather Concreting 6. ACI 306 Guide to Cold Weather Concreting

07

31

18

BR


7. ACI 309 Guide for Consolidation of Concrete 8. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and

Comentary 9. ACI 350 Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete

Structures 10. ASTM C 31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test

Specimens in the Field 11. ASTM C 33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates 12. ASTM C 39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens 13. ASTM C42 Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores

and Sawed Beams of Concrete 14. ASTM C 88 Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by use of

Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate 15. ASTM C 94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete 16. ASTM C 114 Standard Test Method for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic

Cement 17. ASTM C 136 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse

Aggregates 18. ASTM C 138 Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air

Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete 19. ASTM C 143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete 20. ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement 21. ASTM C 172 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete 22. ASTM C 192 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test

Specimens in the Laboratory 23. ASTM C 231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed

Concrete by the Pressure Method 24. ASTM C 260 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for

Concrete


25. ASTM C 295 Standard Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for Concrete

26. ASTM C 457 Standard Test Method for Microscopical Determination of the

Air-Void System in Hardened Concrete 27. ASTM C 494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 28. ASTM C 595 Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements 29. ASTM C 618 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined

Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete 30. ASTM C 989 Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and

Mortars 31. ASTM C 1077 Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete

Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation

32. ASTM C 1260 Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates

(Mortar Bar Method) 33. ASTM C 1567 Standard Test Method for Determining the Potential Alkali-Silica

Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)

34. ASTM C 1602 Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production

of Hydraulic Cement Concrete 35. ASTM C 1778 Reducing the Risk of Deleterious Alkali – Aggregate Reaction

in Concrete 1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Sources of all materials and certifications of compliance with specifications for all materials.

2. Certified current (less than 1 year old) chemical analysis of the Portland Cement

or Blended Cement to be used.

3. Certified current (less than 1 year old) chemical analysis of fly ash or slag cement to be used.

4. Aggregate test results showing compliance with required standards, i.e., sieve

analysis, potential reactivity, aggregate soundness tests, petrographic analysis, mortar bar expansion testing, etc.


5. Manufacturer's data on all admixtures stating compliance with required standards.

6. Concrete mix design for each class of concrete specified herein.

7. Field experience records and/or trial mix data for the proposed concrete mixes for each class of concrete specified herein.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Tests on materials used in the production of concrete shall be required as specified in PART 2 -- PRODUCTS. These tests shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Trial concrete mixes shall be tested when required in accordance with Article 3.01 at no

additional cost to the Owner.

C. Field quality control tests, as specified in Article 3.10, unless otherwise stated, will be performed by a materials testing consultant employed by the Owner. However, the Contractor shall be charged for the cost of any additional tests and investigation on work performed which does not meet the Specifications. Any individual who samples and tests concrete to determine if the concrete is being produced in accordance with this Specification shall be certified as a Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade I, in accordance with ACI CP-2. Testing laboratory shall conform to requirements of ASTM C-1077.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 HYDRAULIC CEMENT

A. Portland Cement

1. Portland Cement shall be Type II conforming to ASTM C 150. Type I cement may be used provided either fly ash or slag cement is also included in the mix in accordance with Articles 2.02 or 2.03 respectively.

2. When potentially reactive aggregates as defined in Article 2.05 are to be used in

concrete mix, cement shall meet the following requirements:

a. For concrete mixed with only Portland Cement, the total alkalies in the cement (calculated as the percentage of NA2O plus 0.658 times the percentage of K2O) shall not exceed 0.40%.

b. For concrete mixed with Portland Cement and an appropriate amount of fly ash (Article 2.02) or slag cement (Article 2.03) the total alkalies in the Portland Cement (calculated as the percentage of NA2O plus 0.658 times the percentage of K2O) shall not exceed 0.85%.

3. When non-reactive aggregates as defined in Article 2.05 are used in concrete mix,

total alkalies in the cement shall not exceed 1.0%.


4. The proposed Portland Cement shall not contain more than 8% tricalcium

aluminate and more than 12% tetracalcium aluminoferrite.

B. Blended Cement

1. Blended cements shall be Type IP (Portland Fly Ash Cement) or Type IS (Portland Slag Cement) conforming to ASTM C 595.

2. Type IP cement shall be an interground blend of Portland Cement and fly ash in

which the fly ash constituent is between 15% and 25% of the weight of the total blend.

3. Type IS cement shall be an interground blend of Portland Cement and slag cement

in which the slag constituent is between 35% and 50% of the weight of the total blend.

4. Fly ash and slag cement used in the production of blended cements shall meet the

requirements of Articles 2.02 and 2.03, respectively. 5. When reactive aggregates as defined in Article 2.05 are used in concrete mix, the

total alkalies in the Portland Cement (calculated as the percentage of Na2O plus 0.658 times the percentage of K2O) shall not exceed 0.85%. The percentage of fly ash or slag cement shall be set to meet provisions of Article 2.05.G.2.

C. Different types of cement shall not be mixed nor shall they be used alternately except

when authorized in writing by the Engineer. Different brands of cement or the same brand from different mills may be used alternately. A resubmittal will be required if different cements are proposed during the Project.

D. Cement shall be stored in a suitable weather-tight building so as to prevent deterioration

or contamination. Cement which has become caked, partially hydrated, or otherwise damaged will be rejected.

2.02 FLY ASH

A. Fly ash shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 618 for Class F, except that the loss on ignition shall not exceed 4%. Fly ash shall also meet the optional physical requirements for uniformity as shown in Table 3 of ASTM C 618.

B. For fly ash to be used in the production of type IP cement, the Pozzolan Activity Index

shall be greater than 75% as specified in Table 3 of ASTM C 595.

C. Where reactive aggregates as defined in Article 2.05 are used in concrete mix, the fly ash constituent shall be between 15% and 25% of the total weight of the combined Portland Cement and fly ash. The percentage of fly ash shall be set to meet the mean mortar bar expansion requirements in provisions of Article 2.05.G.2.

D. Additional fly ash shall not be included in concrete mixed with Type IS or IP cement.


2.03 SLAG CEMENT

A. Slag cement shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 989 including tests for effectiveness of slag in preventing excessive expansion due to alkali-aggregate reactivity as described in Appendix X-3 of ASTM C 989.

B. Where reactive aggregates as defined in Article 2.05 are used in concrete mix, the slag

cement constituent shall be between 35% and 40% of the total weight of the combined Portland Cement and slag. The percentage of slag cement shall be set to meet the mean mortar bar expansion requirements in provisions of Article 2.05.G.2.

C. Additional slag cement shall not be included in concrete mixed with type IS or IP cement.

2.04 WATER

A. Water used for mixing concrete shall be clear, potable and free from deleterious substances such as objectionable quantities of silty organic matter, alkali, salts and other impurities.

B. Water shall not contain more than 100 PPM chloride.

C. Water shall not contain more than 500 PPM dissolved solids.

D. Water shall have a pH in the range of 4.5 to 8.5. E. Water shall meet requirements of ASTM C 1602.

2.05 AGGREGATES

A. All aggregates used in normal weight concrete shall conform to ASTM C 33. B. Fine Aggregate (Sand) in the various concrete mixes shall consist of natural or

manufactured siliceous sand, clean and free from deleterious substances, and graded within the limits of ASTM C 33.

C. Coarse aggregates shall consist of hard, clean, durable gravel, crushed gravel or crushed

rock. Coarse aggregate shall be size #57 or #67 as graded within the limits given in ASTM C 33 unless otherwise specified.

D. Aggregates shall be tested for gradation by sieve analysis tests in conformance with

ASTM C 136. E. Aggregates shall be tested for soundness in accordance with ASTM C 88. The loss

resulting after five cycles shall not exceed 10 percent for fine or coarse aggregate when using either magnesium sulfate or sodium sulfate.

F. All aggregates shall be evaluated in accordance with ASTM C 1778 to determine potential

reactivity. All aggregates shall be considered reactive unless they meet the requirements below for non-reactive aggregates. Aggregates with a lithology essentially similar to


sources in the same region found to be reactive in service shall be considered reactive regardless of the results of the tests above.

1. Non-reactive aggregates shall meet the following requirements:

A petrographic analysis in accordance with ASTM C295 shall be performed to identify the constituents of the fine and coarse aggregate. Non-reactive aggregates shall meet the following limitations:

(a) Optically strained, microfractured, or microcrystalline quartz, 5.0%,

maximum.

(b) Chert or chalcedony, 3.0%, maximum.

(c) Tridymite or cristobalite, 1.0%, maximum.

(d) Opal, 0.5%, maximum.

e) Natural volcanic glass in volcanic rocks, 3.0%, maximum.

2. Concrete mixed with reactive aggregates shall meet the following requirements:

(a) If aggregates are deemed potentially reactive as per ASTM C-1778 and fly ash or slag cement is included in proposed concrete mix design, proposed concrete mix including proposed aggregates shall be evaluated by ASTM C-1567. Mean mortar bar expansions at 16 days shall be less than 0.08%. Tests shall be made using exact proportion of all materials proposed for use on the job in design mix submitted.

(b) If aggregates are deemed potentially reactive as per ASTM C-1778 and a

straight cement mix without fly ash or slag cement is proposed for concrete mix design, aggregates shall be evaluated by ASTM C-1260. Mean mortar bar expansions at 16 days shall be less than 0.08%.

H. Contractor shall submit a new trial mix to the Engineer for approval whenever a different

aggregate or gradation is proposed. 2.06 ADMIXTURES

A. Air entraining agent shall be added to all concrete unless noted otherwise. The agent shall consist of a neutralized vinsol resin solution or a purified hydrocarbon with a cement catalyst which will provide entrained air in the concrete in accordance with ASTM C 260. The admixture proposed shall be selected in advance so that adequate samples may be obtained and the required tests made. Air content of concrete, when placed, shall be within the ranges given in the concrete mix design.

B. The following admixtures are required or used for water reduction, slump increase, and/or

adjustment of initial set. Admixtures permitted shall confirm to the requirements of ASTM


C 494. Admixtures shall be non-toxic after 30 days and shall be compatible with and made by the same manufacturer as the air-entraining admixtures.

1. Water reducing admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type A and shall contain

no more than 0.05% chloride ions. Acceptable products are “Eucon Series” by the Euclid Chemical Company, “Master Pozzolith Series” by BASF, and “Plastocrete Series” by Sika Corporation.

2. High range water reducer shall be sulfonated polymer conforming to ASTM C 494,

Type F or G. The high range water reducer shall be added to the concrete at either the batch plant or at the job site and may be used in conjunction with a water reducing admixture. The high range water reducer shall be accurately measured and pressure injected into the mixer as a single dose by an experienced technician. A standby system shall be provided and tested prior to each day’s operation of the job site system. Concrete shall be mixed at mixing speed for a minimum of 100 mixer revolutions after the addition of the high range water reducer. Acceptable products are “Eucon 37” or Plastol 5000 by the Euclid Chemical Company, “Master Rheobuild 1000 or Master Glenium Series” by BASF, and “Daracem 100 or Advaflow Series” by W.R. Grace.

3. A non-chloride, non-corrosive accelerating admixture may be used where

specifically approved by the Engineer. The admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type C or E, and shall not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water. The admixture manufacturer must have long-term non-corrosive test data from an independent testing laboratory (of at least a year’s duration) using an acceptable accelerated corrosion test method such as that using electrical potential measures. Acceptable products are “Accelguard 80/90 or NCA” by the Euclid Chemical Company and “Daraset” by W.R. Grace.

4. A water reducing retarding admixture may be used where specifically approved by

the Engineer. The admixture shall conform to ASTM C494, Type D and shall not contain more than 0.05% chloride ions. Acceptable products are “Eucon NR or Eucon Retarder 100” by the Euclid Chemical Company, “Pozzolith Retarder” by BASF, and “Plastiment” by Sika Corporation.

C. Admixtures containing calcium chloride, thiocyanate or more than 0.05 percent chloride

ions are not permitted. The addition of admixtures to prevent freezing is not permitted.

D. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data including the chloride ion content of each admixture and certification from the admixture manufacturer that all admixtures utilized in the design mix are compatible with one another and properly proportioned prior to mix design review.

2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

A. The proportions of cement, aggregates, admixtures and water used in the concrete mixes shall be based on the results of field experience or preferably laboratory trial mixes in conformance with Section 5.3. "Proportioning on the Basis of Field Experience and/or Trial Mixtures" of ACI 318 and ACI 350. When trial mixes are used they shall also conform to Article 3.01 of this Section of the Specifications. If field experience records are used,


concrete strength results shall be from concrete mixed with all of the ingredients proposed for use on job used in similar proportions to mix proposed for use on job. Contractor shall submit verification confirming this stipulation has been followed. Field experience records and/or trial mix data used as the basis for the proposed concrete mix design shall be submitted to the Engineer along with the proposed mix.

B. Structural concrete shall conform to the following requirements. Cementitious materials

refer to the total combined weight of all cement, fly ash, and slag cement contained in the mix.

1. Compressive Strength (28-Day) a. Concrete Class A2 4,000 psi (minimum) b. Concrete Class B 3,000 psi (minimum) 2. Water/cementitious materials

ratio, by weight

Maximum Minimum a. Concrete Class A2 0.45 0.39 b. Concrete Class B 0.50 0.39 3. Slump range 4" nominal unless high range water reducing

admixture is used. 8” max if high range water reducing admixture is

used. 4. Air Content a. Class A2 6% ±1.5% b. Class B 3% Max (non air-entrained)

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 TRIAL MIXES

A. When trial mixes are used to confirm the quality of a proposed concrete mix in accordance with Section 5.3, "Proportioning on the Basis of Field Experience and/or Trial Mixtures" of ACI 318 and ACI 350, an independent qualified testing laboratory designated and retained by the Contractor shall test a trial batch of each of the preliminary concrete mixes submitted by the Contractor. The trial batches shall be prepared using the aggregates, cement and admixtures proposed for the project. The trial batch materials shall be of a quantity such that the testing laboratory can obtain enough samples to satisfy requirements stated below. Tests on individual materials stated in PART 2 -- PRODUCTS should already be performed before any trial mix is done. The cost of laboratory trial batch tests for each specified concrete mix will be borne by the Contractor and the Contractor shall furnish and deliver the materials to the testing laboratory at no cost to the Owner.

B. The independent testing laboratory shall prepare a minimum of fifteen (15) standard test

cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 31 in addition to conducting slump (ASTM C 143),


air content (C 231) and unit weight (C 138) tests. Compressive strength test on the cylinders shall subsequently be performed by the same laboratory in accordance with ASTM C 39 as follows: Test 3 cylinders at age 7 days; test 3 cylinders at age 21 days; test 3 cylinders at age 28 days and test 3 cylinders at 56 days. The cylinders shall be carefully identified as "Trial Mix, Contract No. , Product ." If the average 28-day compressive strength of the trial mix is less than that specified, or if any single cylinder falls below the required strength by more than 500 psi, the mix shall be corrected, another trial batch prepared, test cylinders taken, and new tests performed as before. Any such additional trial batch testing required shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. Adjustments to the mix shall be considered refinements to the mix design and shall not be the basis for extra compensation to the Contractor.

3.02 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE

A. All concrete shall be machine mixed. Hand mixing of concrete will not be permitted. The Contractor may supply concrete from a ready mix plant or from a site mixed plant. In selecting the source for concrete production the Contractor shall carefully consider its capability for providing quality concrete at a rate commensurate with the requirements of the placements so that well bonded, homogenous concrete, free of cold joints, is assured.

B. Ready-Mixed Concrete

1. At the Contractor's option, ready-mixed concrete may be used meeting the

requirements for materials, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing as specified herein and in accordance with ASTM C 94.

2. Truck mixers shall be equipped with electrically-actuated counters by which the

number of revolutions of the drum or blades may be readily verified. The counter shall be of the resettable, recording type, and shall be mounted in the driver's cab. The counters shall be actuated at the time of starting mixers at mixing speeds.

3. Each batch of concrete shall be mixed in a truck mixer for not less than 100 revolutions of the drum or blades at the rate of rotation designated by the manufacturer of equipment. Additional mixing, if any, shall be at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as agitating speed. All materials including mixing water shall be in the mixer drum before actuating the revolution counter for determining the number of revolutions of mixing.

4. Truck mixers and their operation shall be such that the concrete throughout the

mixed batch, as discharged, is within acceptable limits of uniformity with respect to consistency, mix and grading. If slump tests taken at approximately the 1/4 and 3/4 points of the load during discharge give slumps differing by more than one inch when the specified slump is 3 inches or less, or if they differ by more than 2 inches when the specified slump is more than 3 inches, the mixer shall not be used on the work unless the causing condition is corrected and satisfactory performance is verified by additional slump tests. All mechanical details of the mixer, such as water measuring and discharge apparatus, condition of the blades, speed of rotation, general mechanical condition of the unit and clearance of the drum, shall be checked before a further attempt to use the unit will be permitted.


5. Ready-mixed concrete shall be delivered to the site for the work and discharge shall be completed before the drum has been revolved 300 revolutions and within the time requirements stated in Article 3.03 of this Section.

6. Each and every concrete delivery shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket

containing at least the following information:

a. Date and truck number b. Ticket number c. Mix designation of concrete d. Cubic yards of concrete e. Cement brand, type and weight in pounds f. Weight in pounds of fine aggregate (sand) g. Weight in pounds of coarse aggregate (stone) h. Air entraining agent, brand, and weight in pounds and ounces i. Other admixtures, brand, and weight in pounds and ounces j. Water, in gallons, stored in attached tank k. Water, in gallons, maximum that can be added without exceeding design

water/cementitious materials ratio l. Water, in gallons, actually used (by truck driver) m. Time of loading n. Time of delivery to job (by truck driver)

7. Any truck delivering concrete to the job site, which is not accompanied by a delivery

ticket showing the above information will be rejected and such truck shall immediately depart from the job site.

8. The use of non-agitating equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not

be permitted. Combination truck and trailer equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not be permitted. The quality and quantity of materials used in ready-mixed concrete and in batch aggregates shall be subject to continuous inspection at the batching plant by the Engineer.

C. Site Mixed Concrete

1. Scales for weighing concrete ingredients shall be accurate when in use within ±0.4

percent of their total capacities. Standard test weights shall be available to permit checking scale accuracy.

2. Operation of batching equipment shall be such that the concrete ingredients are

consistently measured within the following tolerances:

a. Cement, fly ash, or slag cement ± 1 percent b. Water ± 1 percent c. Aggregates ± 2 percent d. Admixtures ± 3 percent

3. Each batch shall be so charged into the mixer that some water will enter in advance

of the cement and aggregates. Water shall continue for a period which may extend to the end of the first 25 percent of the specified mixing time. Controls shall be


provided to prevent batched ingredients from entering the mixer before the previous batch has been completely discharged.

4. The concrete shall be mixed in a batch mixer capable of thoroughly combining the

aggregates, cement, and water into a uniform mass within the specified mixing time, and of discharging the concrete without harmful segregation. The mixer shall bear a manufacturer's rating plate indicating the rate capacity and the recommended revolutions per minute and shall be operated in accordance therewith.

5. Mixers with a rate capacity of 1 cu.yd. or larger shall conform to the requirements

of the Plant Mixer Manufacturers' Division of the Concrete Plant Manufacturers' Bureau.

6. Except as provided below, batches of 1 cu. yd. or less shall be mixed for not less

than 1 minute. The mixing time shall be increased 15 seconds for each cubic yard or fraction thereof of additional capacity.

7. Shorter mixing time may be permitted provided performance tests made in

accordance with of ASTM C 94 indicate that the time is sufficient to produce uniform concrete.

8. Controls shall be provided to insure that the batch cannot be discharged until the

required mixing time has elapsed. At least three-quarters of the required mixing time shall take place after the last of the mixing water has been added.

9. The interior of the mixer shall be free of accumulations that will interfere with mixing

action. Mixer blades shall be replaced when they have lost 10 percent of their original height.

10. Air-entraining admixtures and other chemical admixtures shall be charged into the

mixer as solutions and shall be measured by means of an approved mechanical dispensing device. The liquid shall be considered a part of the mixing water. Admixtures that cannot be added in solution may be weighed or may be measured by volume if so recommended by the manufacturer.

11. If two or more admixtures are used in the concrete, they shall be added separately

to avoid possible interaction that might interfere with the efficiency of either admixture or adversely affect the concrete.

12. Addition of retarding admixtures shall be completed within 1 minute after addition

of water to the cement has been completed, or prior to the beginning of the last three-quarters of the required mixing, whichever occurs first. Retarding admixtures shall not be used unless approved by the Engineer.

13. Concrete shall be mixed only in quantities for immediate use and within the time

and mixing requirements of ASTM C 94. 3.03 CONCRETE PLACEMENT


A. No concrete shall be placed prior to approval of the concrete mix design. Concrete placement shall conform to the recommendations of ACI 304.

B. Prior to concrete placement, all reinforcement shall be securely and properly fastened in

its correct position. Formwork shall be clean, oiled and form ties at construction joints shall be retightened. All bucks, sleeves, castings, hangers, pipe, conduits, bolts, anchors, wire, and any other fixtures required to be embedded therein shall be in place. Forms for openings to be left in the concrete shall be in place and anchored by the Contractor. All loose debris in bottoms of forms or in keyways shall be removed and all debris, water, snow, ice and foreign matter shall be removed from the space to be occupied by the concrete. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in advance of placement, allowing sufficient time for a concurrent inspection and for any corrective measures which are subsequently required.

C. On horizontal joints where concrete is to be placed on hardened concrete, flowing

concrete containing a high range water reducing admixture or cement grout shall be placed with a slump not less than 8 inches for the initial placement at the base of the wall. Concrete or cement grout shall meet all strength and service requirements specified herein for applicable class of concrete. This concrete shall be worked well into the irregularities of the hard surface.

D. All concrete shall be placed during the daylight hours except with the consent of the

Engineer. If special permission is obtained to carry on work during the night, adequate lighting must be provided.

E. When concrete arrives at the project with slump below that suitable for placing, as

indicated by the Specifications, water may be added to bring the concrete within the specified slump range provided that the design water-cementitious materials ratio is not exceeded. The water shall be incorporated by additional mixing equal to at least half of the total mixing required. Water may be added only to full trucks. On-site tempering shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing a concrete mix that meets all specified requirements.

F. Concrete shall be conveyed as rapidly as practicable to the point of deposit by methods

which prevent the separation or loss of the ingredients. It shall be so deposited that rehandling will be unnecessary. Discharge of the concrete to its point of deposit shall be completed within 90 minutes after the addition of the cement to the aggregates. In hot weather, or under conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete, the time between the introduction of the cement to the aggregates and discharge shall not exceed the requirements stated in Article 3.09 of this Section.

G. Where concrete is conveyed to position by chutes, a practically continuous flow in the

chute shall be maintained. The angle and discharge arrangement of the chute shall be such as to prevent segregation of the concrete ingredients. The delivery end of the chute shall be as close as possible to the point of deposit and in no case shall the free pour from the delivery end of the chute exceed five feet, unless approved otherwise.

H. Special care must be exercised to prevent splashing of forms or reinforcement with

concrete, and any such splashes or accumulations of hardened or partially hardened concrete on the forms or reinforcement above the general level of the concrete already in


place must be removed before the work proceeds. Concrete shall be placed in all forms in such way as to prevent any segregation.

I. Placing of concrete shall be so regulated that the pressure caused by the wet concrete

shall not exceed that used in the design of the forms.

J. All concrete for walls shall be placed through openings in the form spaced at frequent intervals or through tremies (heavy duct canvas, rubber, etc.), equipped with suitable hopper heads. Tremies shall be of variable lengths so the free fall shall not exceed five (5) feet and a sufficient number shall be placed in the form to ensure the concrete is kept level at all times.

K. When placing concrete which is to be exposed, sufficient illumination shall be provided in

the interior of the forms so the concrete, at places of deposit, is visible from deck and runways.

L. Concrete shall be placed so as to thoroughly embed all reinforcement, inserts, and

fixtures.

M. When forms are removed, surfaces shall be even and dense, free from aggregate pockets or honeycomb. To achieve this, concrete shall be consolidated using mechanical vibration, supplemented by forking and spading by hand in the corners and angle of forms and along form surfaces while the concrete is plastic under the vibratory action. Consolidation shall conform to ACI 309.

N. Mechanical vibration shall be applied directly to the concrete, unless otherwise approved

by the Engineer. The bottom of vibrators used on floor slabs must not be permitted to ride the form supporting the slab. Vibration shall be applied at the point of deposit and in the area of freshly placed concrete by a vertical penetration of the vibrator. Vibrators shall not be used to move concrete laterally within the forms.

O. The intensity of vibration shall be sufficient to cause settlement of the concrete into place

and to produce monolithic joining with the preceding layer. It shall be of sufficient duration to accomplish thorough compaction and complete embedment of reinforcement and fixtures with a vibrator transmitting not less than 7,500 impulses per minute. Since the duration of vibration per square foot of surface is dependent on the frequency (impulses per minute), size of vibrator, and slump of concrete, the length of time must therefore be determined in the field. Vibration, however, shall not be continued in any one location to the extent that pools of grout are formed.

P. Care shall be taken to prevent cold joints when placing concrete in any portion of the work. The concrete placing rate shall be such as to ensure that each layer is placed while the previous layer is soft or plastic, so that the two layers can be made monolithic by penetration of the vibrators. Maximum thickness of concrete layers shall be 18 inches. The surface of the concrete shall be level whenever a run of concrete is stopped. Q. To prevent featheredges, construction joints located at the tops of horizontal lifts near

sloping exposed concrete surfaces shall be inclined near the exposed surface, so the angle between such inclined surface and the exposed concrete surface will be not less than 50°.


R. In placing unformed concrete on slopes, the concrete shall be placed ahead of a non-

vibrated slip-form screed extending approximately 2-1/2 feet back from its leading edge. The method of placement shall provide a uniform finished surface with the deviation from the straight line less than 1/8 inch in any concrete placement. Concrete ahead of the slip-form screed shall be consolidated by internal vibrators so as to ensure complete filling under the slip-form. Prior to placement of concrete on sloped walls or slabs, the Contractor shall submit a plan specifically detailing methods and sequence of placements, proposed concrete screed equipment, location of construction joints and waterstops, and/or any proposed deviations from the aforementioned to the Engineer for review and approval.

S. Concrete shall not be placed during rains sufficiently heavy or prolonged to wash mortar

from coarse aggregate on the forward slopes of the placement. Once placement of concrete has commenced in a block, placement shall not be interrupted by diverting the placing equipment to other uses.

3.04 PLACING CONCRETE UNDER PRESSURE

A. Where concrete is conveyed and placed by mechanically applied pressure, the equipment shall have the capacity for the operation. The operation of the pump shall be such that a continuous stream of concrete without air pockets is produced. To obtain the least line resistance, the layout of the pipeline system shall contain a minimum number of bends with no change in pipe size. If two sizes of pipe must be used, the smaller diameter should be used at the pump end and the larger at the discharge end. When pumping is completed, the concrete remaining in the pipelines, if it is to be used, shall be ejected in such a manner that there will be no contamination of the concrete or separation of the ingredients.

B. Priming of the concrete pumping equipment shall be with cement grout only. Use of

specialty mix pump primers or pumping aids will not be allowed. C. No aluminum parts shall be in contact with the concrete during the entire placing of

concrete under pressure at any time.

D. Prior to placing concrete under pressure, the Contractor shall submit the concrete mix design together with test results from a materials testing consultant proving the proposed mix meets all requirements. In addition, an actual pumping test under field conditions is required prior to acceptance of the mix. This test requires a duplication of anticipated site conditions from beginning to end. The batching and truck mixing shall be the same as will be used; the same pump and operator shall be present and the pipe and pipe layouts will reflect the maximum height and distance contemplated. All submissions shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.

E. If the pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory end results, the Contractor shall

discontinue the pumping operation and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods.

F. The pumping equipment must have two cylinders and be designed to operate with one

cylinder only in case the other one is not functioning. In lieu of this requirement, the Contractor may have a standby pump on the site during pumping.


G. The minimum diameter of the hose (conduits) shall be four inches.

H. Pumping equipment and hoses (conduits) that are not functioning properly shall be

replaced.

I. Concrete samples for quality control in accordance with Article 3.10 will be taken at the placement (discharge) end of the line.

3.05 ORDER OF PLACING CONCRETE

A. In order to minimize the effects of shrinkage, the concrete shall be placed in units as bounded by construction joints shown on the Drawings and maximum lengths as indicated on Drawings. Where required on the Drawings and wherever else practical, the placing of such units shall be done in a strip pattern in accordance with ACI 302.1. A minimum of 72 hours shall pass prior to placing concrete directly adjacent to previously placed concrete.

3.06 CONCRETE WORK IN COLD WEATHER

A. Cold weather concreting procedures shall conform to the requirements of ACI 306.

B. The Engineer may prohibit the placing of concrete at any time when air temperature is 40°F. or lower. If concrete work is permitted, the concrete shall have a minimum temperature, as placed, of 55°F. for placements less than 12" thick, 50°F. for placements 12" to 36" thick, and 45°F. for placements greater than 36" thick. The temperature of the concrete as placed shall not exceed the aforementioned minimum values by more than 20°F, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

C. All aggregate and water shall be preheated. Precautions shall be taken to avoid the

possibility of flash set when aggregate or water are heated to a temperature in excess of 100°F. in order to meet concrete temperature requirements. The addition of admixtures to the concrete to prevent freezing is not permitted. All reinforcement, forms, and concrete accessories with which the concrete is to come in contact shall be defrosted by an approved method. No concrete shall be placed on frozen ground.

3.07 CONCRETE WORK IN HOT WEATHER

A. Hot weather concreting procedures shall conform to the requirements of ACI 305.

B. When air temperatures exceed 85°F., or when extremely dry conditions exist even at lower temperatures, particularly if accompanied by high winds, the Contractor and his concrete supplier shall exercise special and precautionary measures in preparing, delivering, placing, finishing, curing and protecting the concrete mix. The Contractor shall consult with the Engineer regarding such measures prior to each day's placing operation and the Engineer reserves the right to modify the proposed measures consistent with the requirements of this Section of the Specifications. All necessary materials and equipment shall be on hand an in position prior to each placing operation.


C. Preparatory work at the job site shall include thorough wetting of all forms, reinforcing steel and, in the case of slab pours on ground or subgrade, spraying the ground surface on the preceding evening and again just prior to placing. No standing puddles of water shall be permitted in those areas which are to receive the concrete.

D. The temperature of the concrete mix when placed shall not exceed 90°F.

E. Temperature of mixing water and aggregates shall be carefully controlled and monitored

at the supplier's plant, with haul distance to the job site being taken into account. Stockpiled aggregates shall, if necessary, be shaded from the sun and sprinkled intermittently with water. If ice is used in the mixing water for cooling purposes, it must be entirely melted prior to addition of the water to the dry mix.

F. Delivery schedules shall be carefully planned in advance so that concrete is placed as

soon as practical after it is properly mixed. For hot weather concrete work (air temperature greater than 85°F), discharge of the concrete to its point of deposit shall be completed within 60 minutes from the time the concrete is batched.

G. The Contractor shall arrange for an ample work force to be on hand to accomplish

transporting, vibrating, finishing, and covering of the fresh concrete as rapidly as possible. 3.08 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field Testing of Concrete

1. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer's project representative the on-site scheduling of the materials testing consultant personnel as required for concrete testing.

2. Concrete for testing shall be supplied by the Contractor at no additional cost to the

Owner, and the Contractor shall provide assistance to the materials testing consultant in obtaining samples. The Contractor shall dispose of and clean up all excess material.

B. Consistency

1. The consistency of the concrete will be checked by the materials testing consultant

by standard slump cone tests. The Contractor shall make any necessary adjustments in the mix as the Engineer and/or the materials testing consultant may direct and shall upon written order suspend all placing operations in the event the consistency does not meet the intent of the specifications. No payment shall be made for any delays, material or labor costs due to such eventualities.

2. Slump tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C 143. Slump tests will be

performed as deemed necessary by the materials testing consultant and each time compressive strength samples are taken.

3. Concrete with a specified nominal slump shall be placed having a slump within 1”

(higher or lower) of the specified slump. Concrete with a specified maximum slump shall be placed having a slump less than the specified slump.


C. Unit Weight

1. Samples of freshly mixed concrete shall be tested for unit weight by the materials

testing consultant in accordance with ASTM C 138. 2. Unit weight tests will be performed as deemed necessary by the Engineer and

each time compressive strength samples are taken. D. Air Content

1. Samples of freshly mixed concrete will be tested for entrained air content by the

materials testing consultant in accordance with ASTM C 231.

2. Air content tests will be performed as deemed necessary by the materials testing consultant and each time compressive strength samples are taken.

3. In the event test results are outside the limits specified, additional testing shall

occur. Admixture quantity adjustments shall be made immediately upon discovery of incorrect air entrainment.

E. Compressive Strength

1. Samples of freshly mixed concrete will be taken by the materials testing consultant

and tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 172, C 31 and C 39, except as modified herein.

2. In general, one sampling shall be taken for each placement in excess of five (5)

cubic yards, with a minimum of one (1) sampling for each day of concrete placement operations, or for each one hundred (100) cubic yards of concrete, or for each 5,000 square feet of surface area for slabs or walls, whichever is greater.

3. Each sampling shall consist of at least five (5) 6x12 cylinders or (8) 4x8 cylinders.

Each cylinder shall be identified by a tag, which shall be hooked or wired to the side of the container. The materials testing consultant will fill out the required information on the tag, and the Contractor shall satisfy himself that such information shown is correct.

4. The Contractor shall be required to furnish labor to the Owner for assisting in

preparing test cylinders for testing. The Contractor shall provide approved curing boxes for storage of cylinders on site. The insulated curing box shall be of sufficient size and strength to contain all the specimens made in any four consecutive working days and to protect the specimens from falling over, being jarred or otherwise disturbed during the period of initial curing. The box shall be erected, furnished and maintained by the Contractor. Such box shall be equipped to provide the moisture and to regulate the temperature necessary to maintain the proper curing conditions required by ASTM C 31. Such box shall be located in an area free from vibration such as pile driving and traffic of all kinds and such that all specimen are shielded from direct sunlight and/or radiant heating sources. No concrete requiring inspection shall be delivered to the site until such storage curing


box has been provided. Specimens shall remain undisturbed in the curing box until ready for delivery to the testing laboratory but not less than sixteen hours.

5. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the temperatures of the curing

box during the initial curing of test specimens with the temperature preserved between 60°F and 80°F as measured by a maximum-minimum thermometer. The Contractor shall maintain a written record of curing box temperatures for each day curing box contains test specimens. Temperature shall be recorded a minimum of three times a day with one recording at the start of the work day and one recording at the end of the work day.

6. When transported, the cylinders shall not be thrown, dropped, allowed to roll, or

be damaged in any way.

7. Compression tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C 39. For 6x12 cylinders, two test cylinders will be tested at seven days and two at 28 days. For 4x8 cylinders, three test cylinders will be tested at seven days, three at 28 days. The remaining cylinders will be held to verify test results, if needed.

F. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete

1. Evaluation and acceptance of the compressive strength of concrete shall be

according to the requirements of ACI 214, ACI 318, and ACI 350.

2. The strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if all of the following conditions are satisfied.

a. Every arithmetic average of any three consecutive strength tests equals or

exceeds the minimum specified 28-day compressive strength for the mix (see Article 2.08).

b. No individual compressive strength test results falls below the minimum

specified strength by more than 500 psi.

3. In the event any of the conditions listed above are not met, the mix proportions

shall be corrected for the next concrete placing operation.

4. In the event that condition 2B is not met, additional tests in accordance with Article 3.08, paragraph H shall be performed.

5. When a ratio between 7-day and 28-day strengths has been established by these

tests, the 7-day strengths shall subsequently be taken as a preliminary indication of the 28-day strengths. Should the 7-day test strength from any sampling be more than 10% below the established minimum strength, the Contractor shall:

a. Immediately provide additional periods of curing in the affected area from

which the deficient test cylinders were taken.

b. Maintain or add temporary structural support as required.


c. Correct the mix for the next concrete placement operation, if required to

remedy the situation.

6. All concrete which fails to meet the ACI requirements and these specifications is subject to removal and replacement at no additional cost to the Owner.

G. When non-compliant concrete is identified, test reports shall be sent immediately to the

Engineer for review. H. Additional Tests

1. When ordered by the Engineer, additional tests on in-place concrete shall be

provided and paid for by the Contractor.

2. In the event the 28-day test cylinders fail to meet the minimum strength requirements as outlined in Article 3.08, paragraph F, the Contractor shall have concrete core specimens obtained and tested from the affected area immediately.

a. Three cores shall be taken for each sample in which the strength

requirements were not met.

b. The drilled cores shall be obtained and tested in conformance with ASTM C 42. The tests shall be conducted by a materials testing consultant approved by the Engineer.

c. The location from which each core is taken shall be approved by the

Engineer. Each core specimen shall be located, when possible, so its axis is perpendicular to the concrete surface and not near formed joints or obvious edges of a unit of deposit.

d. The core specimens shall be taken, if possible, so no reinforcing steel is

within the confines of the core.

e. The diameter of core specimens should be at least 3 times the maximum nominal size of the course aggregate used in the concrete, but must be at least 2-inches in diameter.

f. The length of specimen, when capped, shall be at least twice the diameter

of the specimen.

g. The core specimens shall be taken to the laboratory and when transported, shall not be thrown, dropped, allowed to roll, or damaged in any way.

h. Two (2) copies of test results shall be mailed directly to the Engineer. The

concrete in question will be considered acceptable if the average compressive strength of a minimum of three test core specimens taken from a given area equal or exceed 85% of the specified 28-day strength and if the lowest core strength is greater than 75% of the specified 28-day strength.


3. In the event that concrete placed by the Contractor is suspected of not having

proper air content, the Contractor shall engage a materials testing consultant approved by the Engineer, to obtain and test samples for air content in accordance with ASTM Specification C 457.

3.09 CARE AND REPAIR OF CONCRETE

A. The Contractor shall protect all concrete against injury or damage from excessive heat, lack of moisture, overstress, or any other cause until final acceptance by the Owner. Particular care shall be taken to prevent the drying of concrete and to avoid roughening or otherwise damaging the surface. Care shall be exercised to avoid jarring forms or placing any strain on the ends of projecting reinforcing bars. Any concrete found to be damaged, or which may have been originally defective, or which becomes defective at any time prior to the final acceptance of the completed work, or which departs from the established line or grade, or which, for any other reason, does not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall be satisfactorily repaired or removed and replaced with acceptable concrete at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Areas of honeycomb shall be chipped back to sound concrete and repaired as directed.

C. Concrete formwork blowouts or unacceptable deviations in tolerances for formed surfaces

due to improperly constructed or misaligned formwork shall be repaired as directed. Bulging or protruding areas, which result from slipping or deflecting forms shall be ground flush or chipped out and redressed as directed.

D. Areas of concrete in which cracking, spalling, or other signs of deterioration develop prior

to final acceptance shall be removed and replaced, or repaired as directed. This stipulation includes concrete that has experienced cracking due to drying or thermal shrinkage of the concrete. Structural cracks shall be repaired using an approved epoxy injection system. Non-structural cracks shall be repaired using an approved hydrophilic resin pressure injected grout system, unless other means of repair are deemed necessary and approved. All repair work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Concrete which fails to meet the strength requirements as outlined in Article 3.08,

paragraph F, will be analyzed as to its adequacy based upon loading conditions, resultant stresses and exposure conditions for the particular area of concrete in question. If the concrete in question is found unacceptable based upon this analysis, that portion of the structure shall be strengthened or replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. The method of strengthening or extent of replacement shall be as directed by the Engineer.

- END OF SECTION –


SECTION 03370

CONCRETE CURING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Protect all freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and from the weather elements. The concrete shall be maintained with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for the hydration of the cement and proper hardening of the concrete in accordance with the requirements specified herein.


A. Section 03100 – Concrete Formwork

B. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS


1. ACI 301 – Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings

2. ACI 304 – Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete

3. ACI 305 – Hot Weather Concreting

4. ACI 306 – Cold Weather Concreting

5. ACI 308 – Standard Practice for Curing Concrete

6. ASTM C171 – Standard Specifications for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete

7. ASTM C309 – Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds

for Curing Concrete

8. ASTM C1315 – Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete

1.04 SUBMITTALS


07

01

14

BR


1. Proposed normal procedures for protection and curing of concrete.

2. Proposed special procedures for protection and curing of concrete under hot, cold,

and wet weather conditions.

3. Proposed method of measuring concrete surface temperature changes.

4. Manufacturer's literature and material certification for proposed curing compounds. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 LIQUID MEMBRANE-FORMING CURING COMPOUND

A. Clear curing and sealing compound shall be a clear styrene acrylate type complying with ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A with a minimum solids content of 30%. Moisture loss shall not be greater than 0.40 kg/m2 when applied at 300 sq.ft./gal. Manufacturer’s certification is required. Acceptable products are Super Diamond Clear VOX by the Euclid Chemical Company, MasterKure CC 300 SB by BASF Master Builder Solutions, and Cure & Seal 30 Plus by Symons Corporation.

B. Where specifically approved by Engineer, on slabs to receive subsequent applied finishes,

compound shall conform to ASTM C 309. Acceptable products are “Kurez DR VOX” or “Kurez W VOX” by the Euclid Chemical Company. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.

2.02 EVAPORATION REDUCER

A. Evaporation reducer shall be BASF, "MasterKure ER 50”, or Euclid Chemical "Euco-Bar". PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION AND CURING

A. All freshly placed concrete shall be protected from the elements, flowing water and from defacement of any nature during construction operations.

B. As soon as the concrete has been placed and horizontal top surfaces have received their

required finish, provision shall be made for maintaining the concrete in a moist condition for at least a 5-day period thereafter except for high early strength concrete, for which the period shall be at least the first three days after placement. Horizontal surfaces shall be kept covered, and intermittent, localized drying will not be permitted.

C. Walls that will be exposed on one side with either fluid or earth backfill on the opposite

side shall be continuously wet cured for a minimum of five days. Use of a curing compound will not be acceptable for applications of this type.


D. The Contractor shall use one of the following methods to insure that the concrete remains in a moist condition for the minimum period stated above.

1. Ponding or continuous fogging or sprinkling. 2. Application of mats or fabric kept continuously wet. 3. Continuous application of steam (under 150°F). 4. Application of sheet materials conforming to ASTM C171. 5. If approved by the Engineer, application of a curing compound in accordance with

Article 3.04.

E. The Contractor shall keep absorbent wood forms wet until they are removed. After form removal, the concrete shall be cured by one of the methods in paragraph D.

F. Any of the curing procedures used in Paragraph 3.01-D may be replaced by one of the

other curing procedures listed in Paragraph 3.01-D after the concrete is one-day old. However, the concrete surface shall not be permitted to become dry at any time.

3.02 CURING CONCRETE UNDER COLD WEATHER CONDITIONS

A. Suitable means shall be provided for a minimum of 72 hours after placing concrete to maintain it at or above the minimum as placed temperatures specified in Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete, for concrete work in cold weather. During the 72-hour period, the concrete surface shall not be exposed to air more than 20°F above the minimum as placed temperatures.

B. Stripping time for forms and supports shall be increased as necessary to allow for

retardation in concrete strength caused by colder temperatures. This retardation is magnified when using concrete made with blended cements or containing fly ash or ground granulated blast furnace slag. Therefore, curing times and stripping times shall be further increased as necessary when using these types of concrete.

C. The methods of protecting the concrete shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be

such as will prevent local drying. Equipment and materials approved for this purpose shall be on the site in sufficient quantity before the work begins. The Contractor shall assist the Engineer by providing holes in the forms and the concrete in which thermometers can be placed to determine the adequacy of heating and protection. All such thermometers shall be furnished by the Contractor in quantity and type which the Engineer directs.

D. Curing procedures during cold weather conditions shall conform to the requirements of

ACI 306. 3.03 CURING CONCRETE UNDER HOT WEATHER CONDITIONS

A. When air temperatures exceed 85°F, the Contractor shall take extra care in placing and finishing techniques to avoid formation of cold joints and plastic shrinkage cracking. If ordered by the Engineer, temporary sun shades and/or windbreakers shall be erected to


guard against such developments, including generous use of wet burlap coverings and fog sprays to prevent drying out of the exposed concrete surfaces.

B. Immediately after screeding, horizontal surfaces shall receive an application of evaporation reducer. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Final finish work shall begin as soon as the mix has stiffened sufficiently to support the workmen.

C. Curing and protection of the concrete shall begin immediately after completion of the

finishing operation. Continuous moist-curing consisting of method 1 or 2 listed in paragraph 3.01D is mandatory for at least the first 24 hours. Method 2 may be used only if the finished surface is not marred or blemished during contact with the coverings.

D. At the end of the initial 24-hour period, curing and protection of the concrete shall continue

for at least six (6) additional days using one of the methods listed in paragraph 3.01D.

E. Curing procedures during hot weather conditions shall conform to the requirements of ACI 305.

3.04 USE OF CURING COMPOUND

A. Curing compound shall be used only where specifically approved by the Engineer. Curing compound shall never be used for curing exposed walls with fluid or earth backfill on the opposite side. A continuous wet cure for a minimum of five days is required for these applications. Curing compound shall not be used on surfaces exposed to water in potable water storage tanks and treatment plants unless curing compound is certified in accordance with ANSI/NSF Standard 61.

B. When permitted, the curing compound shall maintain the concrete in a moist condition for

the required time period, and the subsequent appearance of the concrete surface shall not be affected.

C. The compound shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations

after water sheen has disappeared from the concrete surface and after finishing operations. Maximum coverage for the curing and sealing compound shall be 300 square feet per gallon for trowel finishes and 200 square feet per gallon for floated or broom surfaces. Maximum coverage for compounds placed where subsequent finishes will be applied shall be 200 square feet per gallon. For rough surfaces, apply in two directions at right angles to each other.

3.05 EARLY TERMINATION OF CURING

A. Moisture retention measures may be terminated earlier than the specified times only when at least one of the following conditions is met:

1. The strength of the concrete reaches 85 percent of the specified 28-day

compressive strength in laboratory-cured cylinders representative of the concrete in place, and the temperature of the in-place concrete has been constantly maintained at 50 degrees Fahrenheit or higher.


2. The strength of concrete reaches the specified 28-day compressive strength as determined by accepted nondestructive methods or laboratory-cured cylinder test results.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 03400

PRECAST CONCRETE PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall construct all precast concrete items as required in the Contract Documents, including all appurtenances necessary to make a complete installation.


A. Section 02604 - Utility Structures B. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete C. Section 03370 - Concrete Curing


A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of these Specifications, all work specified herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the end of the Bid. 1. ACI 318-Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 2. PCI Standard MNL-116 - Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of

Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products 3. PCI Design Handbook

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit the following for review in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals.

1. Shop drawings for all precast concrete items showing all dimensions, locations,

and type of lifting inserts, and details of reinforcement and joints. 2. A list of the design criteria used by the manufacturer for all manufactured, precast

items. 3. Design calculations, showing at least the design loads and stresses on the item,

shall be submitted. Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

09

11

08

BR


4. Certified reports for all lifting inserts, indicating allowable design loads. 5. Information on lifting and erection procedures.


A. All manufactured precast concrete units shall be produced by an experienced manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such items. All manufactured precast concrete and site-cast units shall be free of defects, spalls, and cracks. Care shall be taken in the mixing of materials, casting, curing and shipping to avoid any of the above. The Engineer may elect to examine the units at the casting yard or upon arrival of the same at the site. The Engineer shall have the option of rejecting any or all of the precast work if it does not meet with the requirements specified herein or on the Drawings. All rejected work shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications

The precast concrete manufacturing plant shall be certified by the Prestressed Concrete Institute, Plant Certification Program, prior to the start of production. Certification is only required for plants providing prestressed structural members such as hollow core planks, double-T members, etc.

C. Plant production and engineering must be under direct supervision and control of an

Engineer who possesses a minimum of five years experience in precast concrete work. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE

A. Concrete materials including portland cement, aggregates, water, and admixtures shall conform to Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. For non-prestressed concrete items, minimum compressive strength of concrete at 28

days shall be 4000 psi unless otherwise specified. 2.02 GROUT

A. Grout for joints between panels shall be a cement grout. B. Cement grout shall be composed of Portland Cement and sand in the proportion specified

in the Contract Documents and the minimum amount of water necessary to obtain the desired consistency. If no proportion is indicated, cement grout shall consist of one part Portland Cement to three parts sand. Water amount shall be as required to achieve desired consistency without compromising strength requirements. White Portland Cement shall be mixed with the Portland Cement as required to match color of adjacent concrete.

C. The minimum compressive strength at 28 days shall be 4000 psi.

D. For beds thicker than 1-1/2 inch and/or where free passage of grout will not be obstructed by coarse aggregate, 1-1/2 parts of coarse aggregate having a top size of 3/8 inch should


be added. This stipulation does not apply for grout being swept in by a mechanism. These applications shall use a plain cement grout without coarse aggregate regardless of bed thickness.

E. Sand shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C144.

2.03 REINFORCING STEEL

A. Bar reinforcing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 615 for Grade 60 Billet Steel reinforcing. All reinforcing steel shall be from domestic mills and shall have the manufacturer's mill marking rolled into the bar which shall indicate the producer, size, type and grade. All reinforcing bars shall be deformed bars. Smooth reinforcing bars shall not be used unless specifically called for on Drawings.

B. Welded wire fabric reinforcing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 1064 and the

details shown on the Drawings. C. Field welding of reinforcing steel will not be allowed. D. Use of coiled reinforcing steel will not be allowed. E. Use of mechanical couplers will not be allowed.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION AND CASTING

A. All precast members shall be fabricated and cast to the shapes, dimensions and lengths shown on the Drawings and in compliance with PCI MNL-116. Precast members shall be straight, true and free from dimensional distortions, except for camber and tolerances permitted later in this clause. All integral appurtenances, reinforcing, openings, etc., shall be accurately located and secured in position with the form work system. Form materials shall be steel and the systems free from leakage during the casting operation.

B. All cover of reinforcing shall be the same as detailed on the Drawings. C. Because of the critical nature of the bond development length in prestressed concrete

panel construction, if the transfer of stress is by burning of the fully tensioned strands at the ends of the member, each strand shall first be burned at the ends of the bed and then at each end of each member before proceeding to the next strand in the burning pattern.

D. The Contractor shall coordinate the communication of all necessary information

concerning openings, sleeves, or inserts to the manufacturer of the precast members. E. Curing of precast members shall be in accordance with Section 03370, Concrete Curing.

Use of a membrane curing compound will not be allowed. F. The manufacturer shall provide lifting inserts or other approved means of lifting members.


3.02 CONCRETE FINISHES

A. All fins, burrs, offsets, marks and all other projections left by the forms shall be removed. Projections, depressions, etc. below finished grade required to be removed will only be those greater than ¼-inch. All holes left by removal of ends of ties, and all other holes, depressions, bugholes, air/blow holes or voids shall be filled solid with cement grout after first being thoroughly wetted and then struck off flush. The only holes below grade to be filled will be tie holes and any other holes larger than ¼-inch in any dimension. Honeycombs shall be chipped back to solid concrete and repaired as directed by the Engineer. All holes shall be filled with tools, such as sponge floats and trowels, that will permit packing the hole solidly with cement grout. Cement grout shall consist of one part cement to three parts sand, epoxy bonding agent (for tie holes only) and the amount of mixing water shall be as little as consistent with the requirements of handling and placing. Color of cement grout shall match the adjacent wall surface.

3.03 HANDLING, TRANSPORTING AND STORING

A. Precast members shall not be transported away from the casting yard until the concrete has reached the minimum required 28 day compressive strength and a period of at least 5 days has elapsed since casting, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.

B. No precast member shall be transported from the plant to the job site prior to approval of

that member by the plant inspector. This approval will be stamped on the member by the plant inspector.

C. During handling, transporting, and storing, precast concrete members shall be lifted and

supported only at the lifting or supporting points as indicated on the shop drawings. D. All precast members shall be stored on solid, unyielding, storage blocks in a manner to

prevent torsion, objectionable bending, and contact with the ground. E. Precast concrete members shall not be used as storage areas for other materials or

equipment. F. Precast members damaged while being handled or transported will be rejected or shall be

repaired in a manner approved by the Engineer. 3.04 ERECTION

A. Erection shall be carried out by the manufacturer or under his supervision using labor, equipment, tools and materials required for proper execution of the work.

B. Contractor shall prepare all bearing surfaces to a true and level line prior to erection. All

supports of the precast members shall be accurately located and of required size and bearing materials.

C. Installation of the precast members shall be made by leveling the top surface of the

assembled units keeping the units tight and at right angles to the bearing surface.


D. Grouting between adjacent precast members and along the edges of the assembled precast members shall be accomplished as indicated on the drawings, care being taken to solidly pack such spaces and to prevent leakage or droppings of grout through the assembled precast members. Any grout which seeps through the precast members shall be removed before it hardens.

E. In no case shall concentrated construction loads, or construction loads exceeding the

design loads, be placed on the precast members. In no case shall loads be placed on the precast members prior to the welding operations associated with erection, and prior to placing of topping (if required).

F. No Contractor, Subcontractor or any of his employees shall arbitrarily cut, drill, punch or

otherwise tamper with the precast members. G. Precast members damaged while being erected will be rejected or shall be repaired in a

manner approved by the Engineer.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 05531

ACCESS HATCHES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide all gratings, floor plates, and hatches in accordance with the Contract Documents.



1. International Building Code 2. Aluminum Association Specifications for Aluminum Structures 3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Complete fabrication and erection Drawings of all access hatches specified herein.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL MATERIALS

A. All stainless-steel fabrications exposed to underwater service shall be Type 316. All other stainless-steel fabrications shall be Type 304, unless noted otherwise.

B. All aluminum shall be alloy 6061-T6, unless otherwise noted or specified herein.

06

05

15

BR


C. Material types and ASTM designations are listed below:

1. Structural Shapes ASTM B308

2. Castings ASTM B26, B85, or B108

3. Extruded Bars ASTM B221 - Alloy 6061

4. Extruded Rods, Shapes and Tubes ASTM B221 - Alloy 6063

5. Plates ASTM B209 - Alloy 6061

D. All aluminum shall be provided with mill finish unless otherwise noted.

E. Where bolted connections are indicated, aluminum shall be fastened with stainless steel

bolts.

F. Dielectric isolation shall be installed wherever dissimilar metals are connected.

2.02 METAL FASTENING

A. Electrodes for welding aluminum shall comply with the Aluminum Association Specifications and AWS D1.2.

B. Where bolted connections are indicated, aluminum shall be fastened with stainless steel bolts.

2.03 ACCESS HATCHES

A. Access hatches shall be aluminum unless noted otherwise.

B. All access hatches shall be checker plate with an approved raised pattern, non-skid surface.

C. Access hatches shall be designed to carry a minimum live load of 150 psf, or a concentrated load of 300 pounds at the center, whichever produces the greatest stress.

D. Access hatches shall not exceed an allowable fiber stress of 16,000 psi. Live load deflection shall be limited to L/240 of the span, but not more than 1/4-inch.

E. All access hatches shall be fabricated from 1/4" plate, minimum and shall be stiffened as required to maintain allowable stress and deflection requirements specified herein. Stiffeners shall consist of angles or bars welded to the bottom of the plate.

F. Hinges, where indicated on the Drawings, shall be insulated, heavy-duty, cadmium plated bronze with stainless steel pins and fasteners.

G. All access hatches as indicated on the Drawings shall be provided with recessed handles. Handle material shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings.

H. Air-tight and water-tight access hatches shall be provided with a 1/8 inch thick neoprene gasket between the checkered plate and the support frame. Gasket material shall be


bonded to the support frame and access hatches shall be bolted to the structural support frame with countersunk stainless steel flathead screws.

2.04 FALL THROUGH PREVENTION SYSTEM

A. All access hatches and access doors covering openings measuring 12 inches or more in its least dimension through which persons may fall shall be equipped with a fall through prevention system, except where noted on the Contract Drawings. Access hatches and access doors shall be provided with a permanent installed fall through prevention grate system that provides continuous safety assurance in both its closed and open positions. The grate system shall be made with 6061-T6 aluminum or FRP and be designed for a 300 psf minimum liveload, unless noted otherwise.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION

A. All measurements and dimensions shall be based on field conditions and shall be verified by the Contractor prior to fabrication. Such verification shall include coordination with adjoining work.

B. All fabricated work shall be shop fitted together as much as practicable, and delivered to the field, complete and ready for erection. All miscellaneous items such as stiffeners, fillets, connections, brackets, and other details necessary for a complete installation shall be provided.

C. All work shall be fabricated and installed in a manner that will provide for expansion and contraction, prevent shearing of bolts, screws, and other fastenings, ensure rigidity, and provide a close fit of sections.

D. Finished members shall conform to the lines, angles, and curves shown on the Drawings and shall be free from distortions of any kind.

E. All shearings shall be neat and accurate, with parts exposed to view neatly finished. Flame cutting is allowed only when performed utilizing a machine.

F. All shop connections shall be welded unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. Bolts and welds shall conform to Section 2.02, Metal Fastening. All fastenings shall be concealed where practicable.


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Assembly and installation of fabricated system components shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. All access hatches shall be erected square, plumb and true, accurately fitted, adequately anchored in place, and set at proper elevations and positions. Embedded support frames shall be set level and square.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 05540

CASTINGS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide all castings in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.


A. Section 02604 – Utility Structures 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS


1. International Building Code - 2000

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Complete fabrication and erection drawings of all castings specified herein. 2. Other submittals as required in accordance with Section 05010, Metal Materials,

and Section 05050, Metal Fastening. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 IRON CASTINGS

A. General - Iron Castings shall include, but not be limited to frames, covers, and grates for trench drains, catch basins, and inlets.

1. Castings shall be of gray iron according to ASTM A48 Class 30B of uniform quality,

free from defects, smooth and well cleaned by shotblasting. 2. Catalog numbers on the Drawings are provided only to show required types and

configuration. All covers shall be cast with raised letters as designated on the Drawings.

04

13

10

BR


3. Castings shall be as manufactured by Dewey Brothers, or Neenah Foundry Company.

B. Covers and Grates

1. Covers and grates shall be provided with matching frames. Cover shall fit flush

with the surrounding finished surface. The cover shall not rock or rattle when loading is applied.

2. Round covers and frames shall have machined bearing surfaces. 3. Design loadings:

a. Where located within a structure, a minimum design loading of 300 psf shall be used, unless noted otherwise.

b. At all locations not within a structure, the design loading shall be a standard

AASHTO H-20 truck loading, unless otherwise noted.

C. Watertight gasketing, bolting, locking devices, patterns, lettering, pickholes, vents, or self-sealing features shall be as detailed on the Drawings.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION

A. All measurements and dimensions shall be based on field conditions and shall be verified by the Contractor prior to fabrication. Such verification shall include coordination with adjoining work.

B. All fabricated work shall be shop fitted together as much as practicable, and delivered to

the field, complete and ready for erection. All miscellaneous items such as stiffeners, fillets, connections, brackets, and other details necessary for a complete installation shall be provided.

C. Finished members shall conform to the lines, angles, and curves shown on the Drawings

and shall be free from distortions of any kind. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Assembly and installation of fabricated system components shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. All castings shall be erected square, plumb and true, accurately fitted, adequately

anchored in place, and set at proper elevations and positions.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 09900

PAINTING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for complete execution of Work shown on Drawings and Specified herein.

B. Section Includes:

1. Paint Materials

2. Shop Painting

3. Field Painting

a. Surface Preparation

b. Piping and Equipment Identification

c. Schedule of Colors

d. Work in Confined Spaces

e. OSHA Safety Colors


A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications the Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents:

1. SSPC – The Society for Protective Coatings Standards

a. SSPC-Vis 1 Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for

Painting Steel Structures b. SSPC-SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning c. SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning d. SSPC-SP5 White Metal Blast Cleaning e. SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning f. SSPC-SP10 Near-White Metal Blast

05

15

17

BR


g. SSPC-SP13/NACE6 Surface Preparation of Concrete

2. NACE - National Association of Corrosion Engineers

3. ASTM D1737 - Test Method for Elongation of Attached Organic Coatings

with Cylindrical Mandrel Apparatus

4. ASTM B117 - Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing

5. ASTM D4060 - Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coating by the Taber Abraser

6. ASTM D3359 - Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01330 - Submittals, submit the following:

1. Manufacturer's literature and Material Safety Data Sheets for each product.

2. Painting schedule identifying surface preparation and paint systems proposed.

Cross-reference with Tables 9-1 and 9-2. Provide the name of the paint manufacturer, and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer's representative who will inspect the work. Submit schedule for approval as soon as possible following the Award of Contract, so approved schedule may be used to identify colors and specify shop paint systems for fabricated items.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Work shall include surface preparation, paint application, inspection of painted surfaces and corrective action required, protection of adjacent surfaces, cleanup and appurtenant work required for the proper painting of all surfaces to be painted. Surfaces to be painted are designated within the Painting Schedule and may include new and existing piping, miscellaneous metals, equipment, buildings, exterior fiberglass, exposed electrical conduit and appurtenance.

B. Perform Work in strict accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations and

instructions, unless the Engineer stipulates that deviations will be for the benefit of the project.

C. Paint surfaces which are customarily painted, whether indicated to be painted or not, with

painting system applied to similar surfaces, areas and environments, and as approved by Engineer.

D. Piping and equipment shall receive color coding and identification. Equipment shall be

the same color as the piping system.



A. Painting operations shall be accomplished by skilled craftsman and licensed by the state to perform painting work.

B. Provide a letter indicating that the painting applicator has five years of experience, and 5

references which show previously successful application of the specified or comparable painting systems. Include the name, address, and the telephone number for the Owner of each installation for which the painting applicator provided services.

1.06 STORAGE AND DELIVERY

A. Bring materials to the job site in the original sealed and labeled containers.

B. Container label to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and

a maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 -- MATERIALS 2.01 GENERAL INFORMATION

A. The term "paint" is defined as both paints and coatings including emulsions, enamels, stains, varnishes, sealers, and other coatings whether organic or inorganic and whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats.

B. Purchase paint from an approved manufacturer. Manufacturer shall assign a

representative to inspect application of their product both in the shop and field. The manufacturer's representative shall submit a report to the Engineer at the completion the Work identifying products used and verifying that surfaces were properly prepared, products were properly applied, and the paint systems were proper for the exposure and service.

C. Provide primers and intermediate coats produced by same manufacturer as finish coat.

Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and only within manufacturer's recommended limits.

D. Ensure compatibility of total paint system for each substrate. Test shop primed equipment

delivered to the site for compatibility with final paint system. Provide an acceptable barrier coat or totally remove shop applied paint system when incompatible with system specified, and repaint with specified paint system.

E. Use painting materials suitable for the intended use and recommended by paint

manufacturer for the intended use.


F. Require that personnel perform work in strict accordance with the latest requirements of OSHA Safety and Health Standards for construction. Meet or exceed requirements of regulatory agencies having jurisdiction and the manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations. Maintain a copy of all Material Safety Data Sheets at the job site of each product being used prior to commencement of work. Provide and require that personnel use protective and safety equipment in or about the project site. Provide respiratory devices, eye and face protection, ventilation, ear protection, illumination and other safety devices required to provide a safe work environment.

2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with the Specifications, provide products from one of the following manufacturers:

1. Tnemec Company Inc. 2. Ameron 3. CARBOLINE 4. Sherwin-Williams 5. International

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 SHOP PAINTING

A. Shop prime fabricated steel and equipment with at least one shop coat of prime paint compatible with finish paint system specified. Prepare surface to be shop painted in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations and as specified. Finish coats may be shop applied, if approved by the Engineer. Package, store and protect shop painted items until they are incorporated into Work. Repair painted surfaces damaged during handling, transporting, storage, or installation to provide a painting system equal to the original painting received at the shop.

B. Identify surface preparation and shop paints on Shop Drawings. Verify compatibility with

field applied paints. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General

1. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and dry, and free of dust, rust, scale, and foreign matter. No solvent cleaning, power or hand tool cleaning shall be permitted unless approved by the Engineer.

2. Protect or remove, during painting operations, hardware, accessories, machined

surfaces, nameplates, lighting fixtures, and similar items not intended to be painted


prior to cleaning and painting. Reposition items removed upon completion of painting operations.

3. Examine surfaces to be coated to determine that surfaces are suitable for specified

surface preparation and painting. Report to Engineer surfaces found to be unsuitable in writing. Do not start surface preparation until unsuitable surfaces have been corrected. Starting surface preparation precludes subsequent claim that such surfaces were unsuitable for the specified surface preparation or painting.

4. Surface preparation shall be in accordance with specifications and manufacturer's

recommendations. Provide additional surface preparation, and fill coats where manufacturer recommends additional surface preparation, in addition to requirements of specification.

5. Touch-up shop or field applied coatings damaged by surface preparation or any

other activity, with the same shop or field applied coating; even to the extent of applying an entire coat when required to correct damage prior to application of the next coating. Touch-up coats are in addition to the specified applied systems, and not considered a field coat.

6. Protect motors and other equipment during blasting operation to ensure blasting

material is not blown into motors or other equipment. Inspect motors and other equipment after blasting operations and certify that no damage occurred, or where damage occurred, the proper remedial action was taken.

7. Field paint shop painted equipment in compliance with Color Coding and as

approved by Engineer.

B. Metal Surface Preparation

1. Conform to current The Society for Protective Coatings Standards (SSPC) Specifications for metal surface preparation. Use SSPC-Vis-1 pictorial standards or NACE visual standards TM-01-70 or TM-01-75 to determine cleanliness of abrasive blast cleaned steel.

2. Perform blast cleaning operations for metal when following conditions exist:

a. Moisture is not present on the surface.

b. Relative humidity is below 80%.

c. Ambient and surface temperatures are 5°F or greater than the dew point

temperature.

d. Painting or drying of paint is not being performed in the area.

e. Equipment is in good operating condition.


f. Proper ventilation, illumination, and other safety procedures and equipment are being provided and followed.

3. Sandblast ferrous metals to be shop primed, or component mechanical equipment

in accordance with SSPC-SP5, White Metal Blast.

4. Sandblast field prepared ferrous metals in accordance with SSPC-SP10, Near White Metal Blast, where metal is to be submerged, in a corrosive environment, or in severe service.

5. Sandblast field prepared ferrous metals in accordance with SSPC-SP6

Commercial Blast, where metal is to be used in mild or moderate service, or non-corrosive environment.

6. Clean nonferrous metals, copper, or galvanized metal surfaces in accordance to

SSPC-SP1, Solvent Cleaning, or give one coat of metal passivator or metal conditioner compatible with the complete paint system.

7. Prime cleaned metals immediately after cleaning to prevent rusting.

8. Clean rusted metals down to bright metal by sandblasting and immediately field

primed.

3.03 APPLICATION OF PAINT

A. Apply paint by experienced painters with brushes or other applicators approved by the Engineer, and paint manufacturer.

B. Apply paint without runs, sags, thin spots, or unacceptable marks. C. Apply at rate specified by the manufacturer to achieve at least the minimum dry mil

thickness specified. Apply additional coats, if necessary, to obtain thickness.

D. Special attention shall be given to nuts, bolts, edges, angles, flanges, etc., where insufficient film thicknesses are likely. Stripe paint prior to applying prime coat. Stripe painting shall be in addition to coats specified.

E. Perform thinning in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and with the full

knowledge and approval of the Engineer and paint manufacturer.

F. Allow paint to dry a minimum of twenty-four hours between application of any two coats of paint on a particular surface, unless shorter time periods are a requirement by the manufacturer. Longer drying times may be required for abnormal conditions as defined by the Engineer and paint manufacturer. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended drying time between coats.

G. Suspend painting when any of the following conditions exist:

1. Rainy or excessively damp weather.


2. Relative humidity exceeds 85%.

3. General air temperature cannot be maintained at 50F or above through the drying period, except on approval by the Engineer and paint manufacturer.

4. Relative humidity will exceed 85% or air temperature will drop below 40F within 18 hours after application of paint.

5. Surface temperature of item is within 5 degrees of dewpoint.

6. Dew or moisture condensation are anticipated.

7. Surface temperature exceeds the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.04 INSPECTION

A. Each field coat of paint will be inspected and approved by the Engineer or his authorized

representative before succeeding coat is applied. Tint successive coats so that no two coats for a given surface are exactly the same color. Tick-mark surfaces to receive black paint in white between coats.

B. Use magnetic dry film thickness gauges and wet fiber thickness gauges for quality control.

Furnish magnetic dry film thickness gauge for use by the Engineer.

C. Coatings shall pass a holiday detector test.

D. Determination of Film Thickness: Randomly selected areas, each of at least 107.5 contiguous square feet, totaling at least 5% of the entire control area shall be tested. Within this area, at least 5 squares, each of 7.75 square inches, shall be randomly selected. Three readings shall be taken in each square, from which the mean film thickness shall be calculated. No more than 20 percent of the mean film thickness measurements shall be below the specified thickness. No single measurement shall be below 80 percent of the specified film thickness. Total dry film thickness greater than twice the specified film thickness shall not be acceptable. Areas where the measured dry film thickness exceeds twice that specified shall be completely redone unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. When measured dry film thickness is less than that specified additional coats shall be applied as required.

E. Holiday Testing: Holiday test painted ferrous metal surfaces which will be submerged in

water or other liquids, or surfaces which are enclosed in a vapor space in such structures. Mark areas which contain holidays. Repair or repaint in accordance with paint manufacturer's printed instructions and retest.

1. Dry Film Thickness Exceeding 20 Mils: For surfaces having a total dry film

thickness exceeding 20 mils: Pulse-type holiday detector such as Tinker & Rasor Model AP-W, D.E. Stearns Co. Model 14/20, shall be used. The unit shall be adjusted to operate at the voltage required to cause a spark jump across an air gap equal to twice the specified coating thickness.


2. Dry Film Thickness of 20 Mils or Less: For surfaces having a total dry film thickness of 20 mils or less: Tinker & Rasor Model M1 non-destructive type holiday detector, K-D Bird Dog, shall be used. The unit shall operate at less than 75-volts. For thicknesses between 10 and 20 mils, a non-sudsing type wetting agent, such as Kodak Photo-Flow, shall be added to the water prior to wetting the detector sponge.

F. Paint manufacturer or his representative shall provide their services as required by the

Engineer. Services shall include, but not be limited to, inspecting existing paint, determination of best means of surface preparation, inspection of completed work, and final inspection of painted work 11 months after the job is completed.

3.05 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT PAINT AND FINISHED SURFACES

A. Use covers, masking tape, other method when protection is necessary, or requested by Owner or Engineer. Remove unwanted paint carefully without damage to finished paint or surface. If damage does occur, repair the entire surface adjacent to and including the damaged area without visible lapmarks and without additional cost to the Owner.

B. Take all necessary precautions to contain dispersion of sandblasting debris and paint to

the limits of the work. Take into account the effect of wind and other factors which may cause dispersion of the sandblasting debris and paint. Suspend painting operations when sanding debris or paint cannot be properly confined. Assume all responsibilities and cost associated with damage to adjacent structures, vehicles, or surfaces caused by the surface preparation and painting operations.

3.06 SCHEDULE OF COLORS

A. Match colors indicated. Colors which are not indicated shall be selected from the manufacturer's full range of colors by the Engineer. No variation shall be made in colors without the Engineer's approval. Color names and numbers shall be identified according to the appropriate color chart issued by the manufacturer of the particular product in question.

3.07 WORK IN CONFINED SPACES

A. Provide and maintain safe working conditions for all employees. Supply fresh air continuously to confined spaces through the combined use of existing openings, forced-draft fans and temporary ducts to the outside, or direct air supply to individual workers. Exhaust paint fumes to the outside from the lowest level in the contained space. Provide explosion-proof electrical fans, if in contact with fumes. No smoking or open fires will be permitted in, or near, confined spaces where painting is being done. Follow OSHA, state and local regulations at all times.

3.08 OSHA SAFETY COLORS

A. Paint wall around wall-mounted breathing or fire apparatus with the appropriate safety red color; area not exceed 2-feet wide by 3-feet high, unless apparatus covers the area. Fire apparatus include fire hoses, extinguisher, and hydrants.


B. Paint hazardous areas and objects in accordance with OSHA regulations.

TABLE 9-1 PAINTING SCHEDULE

SURFACE APPLICATION PAINTING SYSTEM &

NO. OF COATS

PRODUCT REFERENCE (TABLE 9.2)

TOTAL MIN. DRY FILM

THICKNESS (MILS)

Metals

Submerged water All metal piping, and mechanical equipment, etc.

2 coats NSF approved epoxy polyamide

105

4-6/coat

Steel doors, windows and door frames, steel stairs, monorails, structural steel, misc. metals (steel)

1 coat epoxy polyamide 1 coat aliphatic polyurethane

102

115

5-8 3-4

Aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete

2 coats coal tar 107 26


TABLE 9-2

PRODUCT LISTING

PRODUCT

REF. SYSTEM PURPOSE Tnemec Series PPG/AMERON CARBOLINE Sherwin-Williams

101 Acrylic filler Primer-sealer 130-6601 BLOXFIL 4000 Sanitile 100 Cement-Plex 875

102 Epoxy polyamide Finish coat semi-gloss or gloss

N69 AMERLOCK 2 Carboguard 890 Dura-Plate 235

103 Acrylic latex Sealer 1028/1029 PITT TECH PLUS Carbocrylic 3359DTM

DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish

104 Epoxy Polyamide – metal

Primer 66 AMERCOAT 385 Carboguard 893SG Macropoxy 646

105 Epoxy Primer/Finish 20 AMERLOCK 2 Carboguard 561/56LT

Macropoxy 646 PW

106 Coal tar epoxy Finish high-coat build 46H-413 AMERCOAT 78HB Bitumastic 300M Hi-Mil Sher Tar Epoxy

107 Coal tar Sealer 46-465 AMERCOAT 78HB Bitumastic 300M Hi-Mil Sher Tar Epoxy

108 Alkyd-medium oil Finish coat 2H DEVGUARD 4308 Carbocoat 8215 Industrial Enamel

109 Alkyd-long oil Finish coat 1029 DEVGUARD 4308 Carbocoat 8215 Industrial Enamel

110 Epoxy polyamide Primer 66-1211 AMERCOAT 385 Carboguard 893SG Macropoxy 646

112 Epoxy polyamide Sealer 66-1211 AMERCOAT 385 Carboguard 893SG Macropoxy 920 Pre-Prime

113 Urethane Barrier coat 530 AMERLOCK SEALER Rustbond --

114 Polyamine Epoxy Intermediate coat 27 AMERLOCK 385 Carboguard 893SG --

115 Aliphatic Polyurethane Finish coat 1074 or 1075 AMERCOAT 450 HS Carbothane 134HG Acrolon 218HS

116 Acrylic epoxy Finish coat 113 or 114 AQUAPON WB Sanitile 255 Water-Based Catalyzed Epoxy

117 Epoxy block filler Sealer 1254 AMERLOCK 114 Sanitile 600 Kem Cati-Coat HS Epoxy Filler

118 Catalyzed epoxy Finish coat 84 AMERLOCK 2/400 Carboguard 890 Macropoxy 646

119 High solids epoxy Finish coat 104 AMERLOCK 400 Carboguard 890 Dura-Plate 235

120 Epoxy Top coat N69 AMERLOCK 2/400 Carboguard 890 --

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 15000

BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install to the required line and grade, all piping together with all fittings and appurtenances, required for a complete installation. All piping located outside the face of structures or building foundations and all piping embedded in concrete within a structure or foundation shall be considered exterior piping.

B. The Contractor shall furnish and install fittings, couplings, connections, sleeves, adapters,

harness rods and closure pieces as required to connect pipelines of dissimilar materials and/or sizes herein included under this Section and other concurrent Contracts for a complete installation.

C. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services required

for the furnishing, installation and testing of all piping as shown on the Drawings, specified in this Section and required for the Work. Piping shall be furnished and installed of the material, sizes, classes, and at the locations shown on the Drawings and/or designated in this Section. Piping shall include all fittings, adapter pieces, couplings, closure pieces, harnessing rods, hardware, bolts, gaskets, wall sleeves, wall pipes, hangers, supports, and other associated appurtenances for required connections to equipment, valves, or structures for a complete installation.

E. The Contractor shall provide taps on piping where required or shown on the Drawings. Where pipe or fitting wall thicknesses are insufficient to provide the required number of threads, a boss or pipe saddle shall be installed.

F. The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Tie-ins to existing pipelines.

2. Exploratory excavations necessary to locate or verify existing pipe and

appurtenances.

3. Installation of all new pipe and materials required for a complete installation. 4. Pipe tapping and performing of linestops

5. Cleaning, testing and disinfecting as required.

1.02 TIE-INS

05

14

18

BR


A. Development of an approved tie-in plan and schedule is required prior to making each tie-in to existing piping. Tie-ins shall be performed within the constraints described in Section 01745 and indicated on the Drawings.

B. Prior to submitting the tie-in plans and the shop drawings for associated products specified

in this Section, Contractor shall perform exploratory excavation to expose existing pipe at all tie-in locations and at all linestop locations as shown on the Drawings to identify the pipe material, measure the outer diameter, determine the depth of cover, identify the location of the nearest existing joint, take photographs showing the pipe condition, and submit the results to the Engineer.

C. Contractor shall submit a detailed plan for each tie-in to existing pipe, including, but not

limited to, pipe cutting procedures, pipe dewatering methods, transition coupling type and restraint system, flushing and cleaning procedures, disinfection procedures, personnel, and daily work schedule. The tie-in plan shall be reviewed by the Owner and Engineer and revised by the Contractor until an acceptable plan is developed.


A. Division 1, General Requirements B. Division 2, Sitework D. Division 9, Finishes

1.04 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner (through the Engineer) a Material Certification stating that the pipe materials and specials furnished under this Section conform to all applicable provisions of the corresponding Specifications. Specifically, the Certification shall state compliance with the applicable standards (ASTM, AWWA, etc.) for fabrication and testing.

B. Shop Drawings for major piping (2-inches in diameter and greater) shall be prepared and

submitted in accordance with Section 01300 – Submittals. In addition to the requirements of Section 01300 – Submittals, the Contractor shall submit laying schedules and detailed Drawings in plan and profile for all piping as specified and shown on the Drawings.

C. Shop Drawings shall include, but not be limited to, complete piping layout, pipe material,

sizes, class, locations, necessary dimensions, elevations, supports, hanger details, pipe joints, and the details of fittings including methods of joint restraint. No fabrication or installation shall begin until Shop Drawings are approved by the Engineer.

D. Contractor shall submit a detailed plan for temporary bypass piping, including fittings,

couplings, supports, provisions for expansion/contraction, and other appurtenances needed for a complete and functional bypass system.

E. For each crossing of utilities 12-inch diameter and larger, Contractor shall submit a

detailed design signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the


Commonwealth of Virginia for temporary support of the existing utility to be exposed during trenching and pipe installation.

1.04 LINESTOP INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

A. The linestop installer must have performed prior successful pressure taps and linestops on cast iron pipe with a diameter of at least 36 inches.

B. The linestop installer shall be actively engaged in linestop installation for a minimum of 5 years, with at least 5 projects in the last 3 years of similar size and type including cast iron pipe materials.

C. Field supervisory personnel for linestops and tapping shall be experienced in the

performance of similar work and a minimum of 3 years.

D. Submit qualifications statement for linestop installer including: 1. List of similar experience in the last 5 years, including owner/reference name, address,

telephone number, contact person, date, location, pipe material, size, and service.

2. Resumes for supervisory field personnel to be on site when linestop operations are in progress listing similar experience in the last 3 years.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. All specials and every length of pipe shall be marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark, size, class, and the date of manufacture. Special care in handling shall be exercised during delivery, distribution, and storage of pipe to avoid damage and unnecessary stresses. Damaged pipe will be rejected and shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Pipe and specials stored prior to use shall be stored in such a manner as to keep the interior free from dirt and foreign matter.

B. Testing of pipe before installation shall be as described in the corresponding ASTM or

AWWA Specifications and in the applicable standard specifications listed in the following sections. Testing after the pipe is installed shall be as specified in Section 3.09.

C. Joints in piping shall be of the type as specified in the appropriate Piping System Schedule

in Section 15390, Schedules.

D. ALL BURIED EXTERIOR PIPING SHALL HAVE RESTRAINED JOINTS FOR THRUST PROTECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED OR SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. ALL EXPOSED PIPING SHALL HAVE FLANGED JOINTS, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED OR SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS.

E. The Drawings indicate work affecting existing piping and appurtenances. The Contractor

shall excavate test pits as required of all connections and crossings which may affect the


Contractor's work prior to ordering pipe and fittings to determine sufficient information for ordering materials. The Contractor shall take whatever measurements that are required to complete the work as shown or specified.

2.02 SLEEVES

A. Unless shown otherwise, all piping passing through walls and floors shall be installed in sleeves or wall castings accurately located before concrete is poured, or placed in position during construction of masonry walls. Water stop flanges are required on all sleeves.

B. Sleeves shall be cast iron, black steel pipe, or fabricated steel in accordance with details

shown on the Drawings. If not shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the details of sleeves he proposes to install; and no fabrication or installation thereof shall take place until the Engineer's approval is obtained. Steel sleeves shall be fabricated of structural steel plate in accordance with the standards and procedures of AISC and AWS. Steel sleeve surfaces shall receive a commercial sandblast cleaning and then be shop painted in accordance with Section 09900 – Painting.

C. When shown on the Drawings or otherwise required, the annular space between the

installed piping and sleeve shall be completely sealed against a maximum hydrostatic pressure of 20 psig. Seals shall be mechanically interlocked, solid rubber links, trade name "Link-Seal", as manufactured by Garlock Pipeline Technologies (GPT) or equal. Rubber link, seal-type, size, and installation thereof, shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. For non-fire rated walls and floors, pressure plate shall be glass reinforced nylon plastic with EPDM rubber seal and 304 stainless steel bolts and nuts.

D. Cast iron mechanical joint adapter sleeves shall be Clow # 1429, as manufactured by the

Clow Corp., or equal. Mechanical joint adapter sleeves shall be provided with suitable gasket, follower ring, and bolts to effect a proper seal. In general, sleeves installed in walls, floors, or roofs against one side of which will develop a hydrostatic pressure, or through which leakage of liquid will occur, shall be so sealed. If welded waterstop flanges are employed, welds shall be 360 degree continuous on both sides of flange.

2.03 TRANSITION COUPLINGS (FOR BURIED SERVICE)

A. Solid sleeve couplings shall be used to connect buried piping unless existing pipe conditions or outer diameter necessitate an alternate transition coupling type.. Solid sleeves shall be ductile iron, long body and shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A21.10 (AWWA C110). Unless otherwise shown or specified, solid sleeve couplings shall be Style A11760 as manufactured by American Cast Iron Pipe Co., or equal. Solid sleeve couplings shall be restrained with wedge-type restraining glands to meet the pressures specified in Section 15390.

B. If necessary based on existing pipe conditions or the outer diameter of existing buried

pipe, a fabricated steel coupling shall be used to connect to existing pipe. Steel transition couplings shall consist of one steel middle ring, two follower flanges, two compounded wedged gaskets, and bolts to compress the gaskets. Steel shall meet ASTM A36 standard. Gaskets shall be NBR and bolts shall be corrosion resistant high strength alloy.


Couplings shall have fusion bonded epoxy coating. Couplings shall have 250 PSI working pressure. Couplings shall meet the AWWA C219 standard. Transition couplings shall be JCM 203 or equal. Transition couplings shall include integral restraint lugs and shall be restrained with tie-rods to wedge-type restraint couplings on both sides of the transition coupling to meet the pressures specified in Section 15390.

2.09 TAPPING SLEEVES AND TAPPING SADDLES

A. Tapping saddles may be used on mains sixteen (16) inches and larger where the required

tap size does not exceed one-half the size of the main (i.e. 8-inch tapping saddle for use on a 16-inch main). Tapping saddles shall be manufactured of ductile iron providing a factor of safety of at least 2.5 at a working pressure of 250 psi. Saddles shall be equipped with a standard AWWA C-110-77 flange connection on the branch. Sealing gaskets shall be "O" ring type, high quality molded rubber having an approximate seventy durometer hardness, placed into a groove on the curved surface of the tapping saddles. Straps shall be of alloy steel. The tapping saddle shall be the American tapping saddle, U.S. Pipe tapping saddle, or equal. All taps shall be machine cut, no burned taps will be allowed.

2.06 LINESTOPS

A. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to properly install and perform linestops at the locations shown on the Drawings. Linestops shall include an integral bypass as shown on the Drawings.

B. The entire linestop operation from installation to final product shall be completed while

the line is in service and pressurized. At no time shall each existing water main be shutdown.

C. Linestops shall be hydraulically operated and of the folding head type and shall provide pressure tight seal within existing buried pipe during flowing or non-flowing conditions with pipe working pressure of 30 psi and maximum pressure of 100 psi.

D. All permanent materials associated with the linestop that are to remain in place shall be new.

E. Linestops shall be continuously attended and monitored 24 hours per day throughout each application.

F. Tapping Sleeves for Linestops

a. Tapping sleeves for linestops shall be epoxy coated fabricated steel per ASTM

with stainless steel bolts and NBR gasket. Coating shall be fusion bonded epoxy per AWWA C213.

b. Tapping sleeve shall be customized for the material and outer diameter of existing buried pipe at linestop installation locations to be determined by the Contractor.


c. Gaskets butt against existing pipie ensuring a watertight seal.

d. Flanged outlet shall be per AWWA C207 Class D and shall be suitable for connection of tapping valve.

e. Tapping sleeves shall be JCM 412, or equal.

G. Linestops shall be installed by Rangeline, Garrison Enterprises, or equal, including pipe

cutting/tapping, insertion of the plugging device, continuous monitoring of the linestop, removal and sealing.

H. Contractor shall clean pipe exterior prior to installation of linestop tapping sleeve to ensure a positive seal.

I. Contractor is responsible for dewatering any leakage from linestop into work area at no additional cost to the Owner.

J. All linestop materials in contact with potable water shall be cleaned and disinfected prior to installation.

K. Following each linestop, a completion plug shall be installed. A blind bland shall be installed to seal the tapping saddle assembly.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All piping shall be installed by skilled workmen and in accordance with the best standard practice for piping installation as shown on the Drawings, specified or recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Proper tools and appliances for the safe and convenient handling and installing of the pipe and fittings shall be used. Great care shall be taken to prevent any pipe coating from being damaged on the inside or outside of the pipe and fittings. All pieces shall be carefully examined for defects, and no piece shall be installed which is known to be cracked, damaged, or otherwise defective. If any defective pieces should be discovered after having been installed, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound one in a satisfactory manner by the Contractor and at his own expense. Pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before they are installed and shall be kept clean until they are accepted in the complete work. All piping shall be erected to accurate lines and grades with no abrupt changes in line or grade and shall be supported and braced against movement, temporary, or permanent.

C. All excavation shall be made in such a manner and to such widths as will provide ample

room for properly installing the pipe and permit thorough compaction of backfill around the pipe. All excavation and trenching shall be done in strict accordance with these specifications and all applicable parts of the OSHA Regulations, 29CFR 1926, Subpart P.


D. ALL EXCAVATION REQUIRED BY THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE UNCLASSIFIED. NO ADDITIONAL PAYMENT WILL BE MADE FOR ROCK EXCAVATION REQUIRED FOR THE INSTALLATION OF PIPE OR STRUCTURES SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS.

E. Enlargements of the trench shall be made as needed to give ample space for operations

at pipe joints. The width of the trench shall be limited to the maximum dimensions shown on the Drawings, except where a wider trench is needed for the installation of and work within sheeting and bracing. Except where otherwise specified, excavation slopes shall be flat enough to avoid slides which will cause disturbance of the subgrade, damage to adjacent areas, or endanger the lives or safety of persons in the vicinity.

F. Hand excavation shall be employed wherever, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is

necessary for the protection of existing utilities, poles, trees, pavements, or obstructions.

G. No greater length of trench in any location shall be left open, in advance of pipe laying, than shall be authorized or directed by the Engineer and, in general, such length shall be limited to approximately one hundred (100) feet. The Contractor shall excavate the trenches to the full depth, width and grade indicated on the Drawings including the relevant requirements for bedding. The trench bottoms shall then be examined by the Engineer as to the condition and bearing value before any pipe is laid or bedding is placed.

H. No pressure testing shall be performed until the pipe has been properly backfilled in place.

All pipe passing through walls shall be provided with wall pipes or sleeves in accordance with the specifications and the details shown on the Drawings.

I. JOINT DEFLECTION SHALL NOT EXCEED 50 PERCENT OF THE MANUFACTURERS

RECOMMENDED DEFLECTION. Excavation and backfilling shall conform to the requirements of Section 02200 - Earthwork, and as specified herein. Maximum trench widths shall conform to the trench width excavation limits shown on the Drawings. Trench width shall be maintained to an absolute minimum, especially when trenching within 20 feet of proposed thrust collars or linestop encasement to maintain undisturbed soils, and at utility crossings to minimize exposure of existing utilities. All exposed utilities at crossing shall be adequately supported and braced by means of hangers, concrete piers, pipe supports, or otherwise as may be required by the location.

J. Following proper preparation of the trench subgrade, pipe and fittings shall be carefully

lowered into the trench so as to prevent dirt and other foreign substances from gaining entrance into the pipe and fittings. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL ANY OF THE MATERIALS BE DROPPED OR DUMPED INTO THE TRENCH.

K. Water shall be kept out of the trench until jointing and backfilling are completed. When

work is not in progress, open ends of pipe, fittings, and valves shall be securely closed so that no water, earth, or other substance will enter the pipes, fitting, or valves. Pipe ends left for future connections shall be valved, plugged, or capped, and anchored as required.

L. All piping shall be installed in such a manner that it will be free to expand and/or contract

without injury to itself or to structures and equipment to which it is connected. All piping shall be erected to accurate lines and grades with no abrupt changes in line or grade and shall be supported and braced against movement, temporary, or permanent.


M. The full length of each section of pipe shall rest solidly upon the bed of the trench, with

recesses excavated to accommodate bells, couplings, joints, and fittings. Before joints are made, each pipe shall be well bedded on a solid foundation; and no pipe shall be brought into position until the preceding length has been thoroughly bedded and secured in place. Pipe that has the grade or joint disturbed after laying shall be taken up and relaid by the Contractor at his own expense. Pipe shall not be laid in water or when trench conditions are unsuitable for work.

N. Proper and suitable tools and appliances for the safe convenient handling and laying of

pipe shall be used and shall in general agree with manufacturer's recommendations.

O. AT THE CLOSE OF EACH WORK DAY THE END OF THE PIPELINE SHALL BE TIGHTLY SEALED WITH A CAP OR PLUG SO THAT NO WATER, DIRT, OR OTHER FOREIGN SUBSTANCE MAY ENTER THE PIPELINE, AND THIS PLUG SHALL BE KEPT IN PLACE UNTIL PIPE LAYING IS RESUMED.

P. During the laying of pipe, each pipe manufacturer shall provide his own supervisor to

instruct the Contractor's pipe laying personnel in the correct procedure to be followed.

Q. Ordinarily only full lengths of pipe (as furnished by the pipe manufacturer) shall be used , except for closure pieces, at manholes/structures, and areas where joint deflection is required.

S. ALL PIPING SHALL HAVE TYPE "C" BEDDING AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS,

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED HEREIN OR INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS.

U. AT THE CLOSE OF WORK EACH DAY PIPELINE TRENCHES SHALL BE COMPLETELY BACKFILLED. IN PAVED AREAS THE SURFACE SHALL BE RESTORED AS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 02510, PAVING AND SURFACING, TO ALLOW FOR TRAFFIC OVER THE TRENCH DURING NON-WORKING HOURS. UNDER NO CONDITIONS SHALL ANY PIPELINE TRENCH BE LEFT OPEN DURING NON-WORKING HOURS.

3.04 DUCTILE IRON PIPE

A. Ductile iron pipe (DIP) shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the Ductile Iron Pipe Handbook published by the Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association, and AWWA C600.

B. Where it is necessary to cut ductile iron pipe in the field, such cuts shall be made carefully

in a neat workmanlike manner using approved methods to produce a clean square cut. The outside of the cut end shall be conditioned for use by filing or grinding a small taper, at an angle of approximately 30 degrees.

C. UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER, FIELD WELDING OF

DUCTILE IRON WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. 3.09 JOINTS IN PIPING


A. RESTRAINED JOINTS SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR ALL PIPE JOINTS. . Restrained

joints shall be made up similar to that for push-on joints.

B. Push-on joints include a single rubber gasket which fits into the bell end of the pipe. The gasket shall be wiped clean, flexed and then placed in the socket. Any bulges in the gasket which might interfere with the entry of the plain end of the pipe shall be removed. A thin film of lubricant shall be applied to the gasket surface which will come into contact with the spigot end of the pipe. The lubricant shall be furnished by the pipe manufacturer. The plain end of the pipe, which is tapered for ease of assembly, shall be wiped clean and a thick film of lubricant applied to the outside. The pipe shall be aligned and carefully entered into the socket until it just makes contact with the gasket. The joint assembly shall be completed by entering the pipe past the gasket until it makes contact with the bottom of the socket. The pipe shall be pulled "home" with an approved jack assembly as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. If assembly is not accomplished by reasonable force, the plain end shall be removed, and the condition corrected.

C. Flanged joints shall be brought to exact alignment and all gaskets and bolts or studs

inserted in their proper places. Bolts or studs shall be uniformly tightened around the joints. Where stud bolts are used, the bolts shall be uniformly centered in the connections and equal pressure applied to each nut on the stud. Pipes in all lines subject to temperature changes shall be cut short and cold sprung into place to compensate for expansion when hot.

D. Mechanical joints shall be made up with gaskets, glands and bolts. When a joint is to be

made up, the bell or socket and plain end shall be cleaned and washed with a solution of mild soap in water; the gland and gasket shall be slid onto the plain end and the end then entered into the socket until it is fully "home" on the centering ring. The gasket shall then be painted with soapy water and slid into position, followed by the gland. All bolts shall be inserted and made up hand tight and then tightened alternately to bring the gland into position evenly. Excessive tightening of the bolts shall be avoided. All nuts shall be pulled up using a torque wrench which will not permit unequal stresses in the bolts. Torque shall not exceed the recommendations of the manufacturer of the pipe and bolts for the various sizes. Care shall be taken to assure that the pipe remains fully "home" while the joint is being made. Joints shall conform to the applicable AWWA Specifications.

3.10 FLUSHING AND TESTING

A. All piping shall be properly flushed and tested unless specifically exempted elsewhere in the Specifications or otherwise approved by the Engineer. Water pipelines shall be flushed and tested with water. The Contractor shall furnish and install all means and apparatus necessary for getting the water into the pipeline for flushing and testing including pumps, compressors, gauges, and meters, any necessary plugs and caps, and any required blow-off piping and fittings, etc., complete with any necessary reaction blocking to prevent pipe movement during the flushing and testing. All pipelines shall be flushed and tested in such lengths or sections as agreed upon among the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor. Test pressures shall be as specified in Section 15390 – Schedules, and shall be conducted to ensure that the specified test pressure is achieved at the highest point in the pipe segment being tested. The Contractor shall give the Owner


and Engineer reasonable notice of the time when he intends to test portions of the pipelines. The Engineer reserves the right, within reason, to request flushing and testing of any section or portion of a pipeline.

B. Only potable water shall be used for flushing and testing the potable water system.

D. At the conclusion of the installation work, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all new liquid conveying pipe by flushing with water or other means to remove all dirt, stones, pieces of wood, etc., which may have entered the pipe during the construction period. If after this cleaning any obstructions remain, they shall be corrected by the Contractor, at his own expense, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

H. During flushing the piping shall show no leakage. Any leaks or defective piping disclosed

by the leakage test shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor, at his own expense, and the test repeated until all such piping shows tight.

K. After flushing, all liquid conveying pipelines shall be hydrostatically tested at the test

pressure specified in the appropriate Piping System Schedule in Section 15390 – Schedules. The procedure used for the hydrostatic test shall be in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600. Each pipeline shall be filled with water for a period of no less than 24 hours and then subjected to the specified test pressure for 2 hours. During this test, exposed piping shall show no leakage. Allowable leakage in buried piping shall be in accordance with AWWA C600.

L. Any leaks or defective pipe disclosed by the hydrostatic test shall be repaired or replaced

by the Contractor, at his own expense, and the test repeated until all such piping shows tight.

3.11 DISINFECTION

A. All pipe and fitting connected to and forming a part of a potable water supply shall be disinfected in accordance with the procedures described in AWWA C 651. Disinfection shall also be in accordance with the requirements of the Virginia Department of Health and the Owner. The Contractor shall furnish and install, at his own expense, all means and apparatus necessary for performing the disinfection.

B. Dispose of highly chlorinated water in accordance with applicable local, state, and federal regulations. Disposal is the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be in such a manner as to cause no adverse environmental effects. Disposal of chlorinated water into ditches, creeks, storm or combined sewers, canals or rivers will not be permitted.

C. Disinfection Procedures for New Mains: a. Disinfection shall be accomplished after the pipe has been flushed and passed the

hydrostatic test. Disinfect by the continuous feed method, as specified in AWWA C651, using sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite solution. Provide and install a City portable water meter and backflow preventer in the water supply line between the chlorination equipment and the existing water system. Then add


chlorinated water containing not less than 50 mg/L free available chlorine at one end of the section being disinfected and discharged at the far end.

b. Add the chlorinated water until the water coming from each downstream blowoff has a residual of not less than 25 mg/L of chlorine. Operate and flush all hydrants and valves. Water from the existing distribution system or other approved sources of supply shall be made to flow at a constant, measured rate into the newly-laid pipeline. The water shall receive a dose of chlorine, also fed at a constant, measured rate. The two rates shall be proportioned so that the chlorine concentration in the water in the pipe is maintained at a minimum of 50 mg/L available chlorine. To assure that this concentration is maintained, the chlorine residual shall be measured at intervals not exceeding 2,000 feet in accordance with the procedures described in the current edition of Standard Methods and AWWA Manual M12 – Simplified Procedures for Water Examination. In the absence of a meter, the rate may be determined either by placing a pilot gage at the discharge or by measuring the time to fill a container of known volume.

c. Close the pipelines and allow the solution to remain in the lines for at least 24 hours. Recheck the chlorine residual in the pipeline. If the free chlorine residual is less than 10 mg/L after 24 hours, disinfect the pipelines again with more concentrated chlorinated water. The Contractor shall obtain certificates of satisfactory bacteriological tests and furnish them to the Owner before the request is made for acceptance of the work.

d. After meeting the previous requirements in this subsection and after a 24-hour holding period, thoroughly flush out the pipelines and equipment and fill with clean water. Do not permit flushing water to discharge into existing water mains. Chlorine residual tests will be made after flushing to assure that residual is not in excess of 1 ppm at any point in system.

D. Disinfection Procedures for Final Connections to Existing Mains a. The requirements of AWWA C651 for “Final Connections to Existing Mains” shall

be followed. b. Sequence construction to maximize the extent of new pipe that can be disinfected

and tested prior to making final connections to existing mains. For connections to existing mains with a length equal to or less than one pipe length between the existing main and the new main, the new pipe and fittings required for the connection may be spray disinfected or swabbed with a minimum 1 percent solution of chlorine just before being installed.

c. If field conditions require a final connection to an existing main with a length greater than one pipe length, the total length of the connection from the end of the new main to the existing main must be setup aboveground, disinfected, and bacteriological samples taken. After satisfactory bacteriological samples have been received for the pre-disinfected pipe ,the pipe can be used in connected the new main to the distribution system.

E. Disinfection Procedures for Cutting into Existing Mains: a. The requirements of AWWA C651 for “Disinfection Procedures When Cutting Into

or Repairing Existing Pipe” for a “controlled pipe repair with depressurization after shutdown” shall be followed.

b. The interior of all pipe and fittings (particularly couplings and sleeves) used in making the repair/connection shall be swabbed or sprayed with a 1% hypochlorite solution before they are installed. The existing main at the repair site and any


accessible upstream and downstream interior of the existing pipe shall be cleaned and disinfected by spraying or swabbing with a minimum 1 percent chlorine solution

c. Thorough flushing is the most practical means of removing contamination introduced during repairs/connections. If valve and hydrant locations permit, flushing toward the work location from both directions is recommended. Flushing shall be started as soon as the repairs/connections are completed and shall be continued until discolored water is eliminated. In accordance with AWWA C651, existing pipe depressurized during the shutdown shall be thoroughly flushed with a minimum of an equivalent of 3 pipe volumes or until the water runs clear and until a consistent combined chlorine residual typical of the distribution system is achieved.

F. Verification of Disinfection: a. Bacteriological samples will be taken and tested on two successive days at each

sampling point. At least three sampling points shall be tested. Sampling points shall be spaced at regular intervals along the pipeline. If the samples are not satisfactory, repeat the entire disinfection procedure.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 15006

DUCTILE IRON PIPE PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. All ductile iron pipe and specials shall be marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark, size, weight, thickness class, the date of manufacture, and the word "Ductile".

B. Ductile iron pipe (DIP) of the sizes shown or specified shall conform to ANSI A21.51

(AWWA C151), Grade 60-42-10 for ductile iron pipe centrifugally cast in metal molds or sand-lined molds. All ductile iron pipe shall conform to ANSI A21.50 (AWWA C150) for thickness design and shall be supplied in 18 or 20 foot nominal lengths or as required to meet the requirements of the Drawings. Fittings and specials shall be cast iron or ductile iron, conforming to the requirements of ANSI A21.10 (AWWA C110) or ANSI A21.53 (AWWA C153).

C. Reference Section 15000, Basic Mechanical Requirements D. Reference Section 15390, Schedules, for pressure rating requirements for specific

applications. PART 2 -- PRODUCT 2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. All pipe and fittings shall be cement mortar lined. Linings shall conform to American Standard Specifications for Cement Mortar Lining for Cast Iron Pipe and Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings, ANSI A21.4 (AWWA C104) and shall be standard thickness. The mortar lining shall be protected with the bituminous seal coat. All buried DIP and fittings shall have a bituminous coating on the exterior surfaces in accordance with ANSI A21.51 (AWWA C151). All exposed DIP and fittings shall have a shop applied prime coat in accordance with Section 09900 - Painting.

D. Requirements for various types of joints are described in the following paragraphs. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED HEREIN OR ON THE DRAWINGS, ALL EXPOSED DUCTILE IRON PIPING SHALL HAVE FLANGED JOINTS.

E. Flanged joints and fittings shall have a minimum pressure rating of 250 psi with 125 lb.

American Standard flanges. All flanges and fittings shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B16.1. Flanges shall be ductile iron and shall be of the threaded or screw on type. The face of the flanges shall be machined after installation of the flange to the pipe. No raised surface shall be allowed on flanges. Flanged pipe shall conform to the requirements of ANSI Specification A21.15, (AWWA C115). Pipe lengths shall be fabricated to meet the requirements of the Drawings.

11

28

16

BR


F. Gaskets shall be the "Ring Gasket" type, 1/8-inch minimum thickness, cloth inserted rubber, red rubber or neoprene and shall be suitable for the service intended. Gaskets for glass lined pipe shall be TORUSEAL flange gasket, or equal. Bolts shall be of the size and length called for and in accordance with the "American Standard" and comply with the requirements of the ANSI/AWWA Standards. The bolts for flanged joints shall be a minimum ASTM A307; Grade B carbon steel and be in accordance with ANSI A21.10, (AWWA C110). The bolts shall have hexagonal heads and nuts, no washers shall be used.

G. Bell and spigot pipe shall be provided with push on, O-ring rubber gasket, compression

type joints and shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A21.11 (AWWA C111). Fittings and specials shall be supplied with mechanical joints as specified for mechanical joint pipe. If required by installation conditions, pipe shall have cast-on lugs for adequately tying it together.

H. Mechanical joints and fittings shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A21.11,

(AWWA C111). Joints shall be made employing a tapered rubber gasket forced into a tapered groove with a ductile iron follower ring. If required by installation conditions, pipe and fittings shall have cast-on lugs for adequately tying the pipe and fittings together. These shall be in conformance with standard practice and as outlined under the appropriate AWWA Specifications.

I. Bolts for mechanical joints shall be high strength corrosion resistant low-alloy steel tee-

head bolts with hexagonal nuts.

J. Restrained joint pipe shall consist of factory manufactured bolted retainer rings, ductile iron locking segments held in place by rubber retainers, or ductile iron retaining rings that lock over the bell of the joint and are secured to prevent rotation, and factory welded retainer beads or rings on the spigot of the pipe. All components of the bolted or snap ring assemblies shall be constructed of corrosion-resistant, high strength, low-alloy steel. Restrained joint pipe shall be Flex-Ring or Lock-Ring type joints as manufactured by American Cast Iron Pipe Company, HP LOK or TR Flex as manufactured by US Pipe, Bolt-Lok or Snap-Lok as manufactured by Griffin Pipe Products, TR Flex or Super Lock as manufactured by Clow Water Systems Co., or approved equal.

K. Restrained fittings for piping systems 16-inches in diameter and greater shall have factory

restraint systems identical to the factory restrained joint pipe specified in Item K above. All fittings shall be minimum pressure Class 250 unless otherwise specified.

L. The manufactured systems for thrust restraint indicated above shall be used where

restrained joint ductile iron pipe and fittings are specified or indicated on the drawings. Gripping gaskets are not an acceptable form of restraint. Thrust restraint and harnessing systems such as threaded-rods, friction clamps, retainer glands shall be used only where specifically specified herein, indicated on the drawings or if allowed by the Engineer in isolated applications where conditions warrant and necessitate their use. Concrete thrust collars shall be used as indicated on the Drawings.

- END OF SECTION -



SECTION 15020

PIPE SUPPORTS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish all equipment, labor, materials, and design calculations required to provide pipe supports in accordance with the Contract Documents.


A. Division 3, Concrete – Appropriate and Related Sections B. Section 15000 – Basic Mechanical Requirements

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Applicable and associated cut sheets and drawings for materials and support components shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings in accordance with or in addition to the submittal requirements specified in Section 01330 – Submittals, Section 15000 – Basic Mechanical Requirements, and other referenced Sections above.

1. Catalog cut information on all system components such as pipe supports, hangers,

guides, anchors, and channel type supports. 2. Drawings of the piping support systems, locating each support, brace, hanger,

guide, component and anchor. Identify support, hanger, guide and anchor type by catalog number and Shop Drawing detail number.

3. With each piping support system Shop Drawing, the Contractor shall attach

calculations prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State where the project is located showing that the piping support system complies with the specified requirements, including all building code and seismic code requirements pertaining to support of piping and other non-structural components.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of all piping support systems, unless noted otherwise herein. The absence of pipe supports and details on the Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of providing a pipe support design sealed by a Professional Engineer. Standard Details for pipe supports have been included on the Drawings to define minimum requirements as to the types of Contractor designed pipe supports that will be acceptable.

11

16

18

BR



B. Where a specific location or type of support is shown on the Drawings, the location and

type shall be incorporated in the Contractor’s pipe support design. The Contractor may submit an alternate pipe support design for review by the Engineer.

D. Design Criteria for Piping Support Systems:

1. Design pipe supports for dead loads imposed by the weight of the pipes filled with

water, except for air and gas pipelines, plus the weight of insulation, valves, equipment, and other appurtenances connected to the pipe. If applicable by location, ice loads per code shall be applied as indicated in the governing building code.

2. Design for the thermal expansion and contraction of the piping and its associated

pipe support and pipe expansion systems and couplers. 3. Design the pipe supports for all seismic loading requirements and conditions as

specified in the governing building code and referenced seismic design codes. 4. A minimum safety factor of 2 or as approved by the Engineer, based upon the yield

strength of the support material, shall be used for pipe supports, braces, hangers, and guides as well as for beam and column members used in channel-type support systems.

5. The horizontal pipe hanger and/or floor support spacing shall be as recommended

by the pipe and/or hanger manufacturer, but shall not exceed 10 feet on center unless indicated otherwise herein or on the Drawings.

6. Seismic and sway bracing shall be provided at maximum 10-foot centers. 7. The design, sizing and spacing of anchor bolts, including concrete anchors, shall

be based on withstanding shear and pullout loads imposed by loading at each particular support. The minimum anchor bolt size shall be ½ inches in diameter.

8. Pipe support design shall not utilize process equipment for thrust restraint or

support of piping loads.

2.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. All piping shall be adequately supported and braced by means of steel hangers and/or supports, concrete piers, supplemental lateral bracing components, pre-fabricated brackets, or otherwise as may be required by the location and forces applied per governing code, including gravity and lateral forces from earthquake and/or wind (if exterior). Generally, concrete supports shall be used where pipe centerline is less than 3 feet above floor, and hangers above 6 feet unless specified or shown otherwise. Supports shall be not more than 10 feet on center for steel and cast iron, 5 feet on center for plastic unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or required by the specific manufacturer. All necessary inserts or appurtenances shall be furnished and installed in the concrete or structures for adequately securing hangers and supports to the structure. Refer to Standard Detail Drawings.



1. Metal pipe support materials, where carbon steel, ductile or other ferrous pipe is supported, shall be galvanized carbon steel.

2. Metal pipe supports indicated as standard type pipe hangers are designed and detailed for gravity loading only. Resulting lateral loads from wind, earthquake, or other lateral loads per code, or special loading conditions during construction, shall be applied to the pipe in accordance with the governing building code. Supplemental lateral stiffening members (when necessary) shall be provided along pipe or at gravity supports using appropriate supplemental members and connections when required by calculations. The Contractor shall include design calculations and details with all pipe hangar and support submissions for review by the Engineer. The main structure and structural components that will support the pipe hangers and other appurtenant components of the facility have been designed to resist all resulting secondary lateral loading from pipe hangers and other non-structural members for gravity and resulting lateral loads.

B. Hangers and supports shall conform to the following requirements:

1. All fabricated metal hangers and supports shall be capable of adjustment after

installation. Different types of hangers and supports along a pipe length, including bends, shall be kept to a minimum.

2. Hanger rods shall be straight and vertical. Chain, wire, strap, or perforated bar

hangers shall not be used. Hangers shall not be suspended from other piping. 3. Vertical piping shall be properly supported at each floor and between floors by

stays or braces to prevent rattling and vibration.

4. Supports and hangers for plastic and FRP piping shall include wide saddles or bands as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer to distribute load and thus avoid localized deformation of the pipe.

5. Hanger and supports shall prevent contact between dissimilar metals by use of copper plated, rubber, vinyl coated or stainless-steel hangers.

6. Ferrous pipes to be painted shall be painted in accordance with Section 09900 -

Painting. Ferrous pipes that require painting or galvanizing shall be supported by galvanized hangers and supports. Stainless steel piping shall be supported by stainless steel saddles and straps (if required).

7. Copper piping shall be supported by plastic coated or copper plated steel hangers

and supports. 8. Plastic piping shall be supported by plastic coated steel hangers and supports. 9. Hangers and supports shall provide for thermal expansion throughout the full

operating temperature range. 10. Expansion and adhesive type anchors used for pipe hangers and supports shall

be Type 304 stainless steel.



C. Metallic hangers and supports may be standard make by Anvil International, Inc., "Witch" by Carpenter & Paterson, Ltd., B-Line Systems, Inc., or equal; and data on the types and sizes to be used shall be furnished to the Engineer for approval. Metallic support system brackets, rods, support clips, clevis hangers, hardware, etc. shall be cast iron or welded steel construction. All gravity type hangers and supports shall be restrained laterally to resist seismic loading and other loading as required by the governing code.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Support piping connections to equipment by pipe support and not by the equipment. B. Support large or heavy valves, fittings, flow meters and appurtenances independently of

the connected piping. C. Support no pipe from the pipe above it. D. Support piping at changes in direction or in elevation, adjacent to flexible joints, expansion

joints, and couplings, and where shown. E. The Contractor shall not install piping supports and hangers in equipment access areas

or bridge crane runs. F. Brace hanging pipes against horizontal movement by both longitudinal and lateral sway

bracing. G. Install pipe anchors (fixed supports and/or guides) where shown and/or as may otherwise

be required to withstand expansion thrust loads and to direct and control thermal expansion. The Contractor may install additional pipe anchors and flexible couplings to facilitate piping installation, provided that complete details describing location, pipe supports and hydraulic thrust protection are submitted.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 15095

VALVES, GENERAL PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install, complete with all assemblies and accessories, all valves shown on the Drawings and specified herein including all fittings, appurtenances and transition pieces required for a complete and operable installation.

B. All valves shall be constructed of first quality materials which have strength, wearing, and

corrosion resistance characteristics entirely suitable for the types of service for which the individual valves are designated. Except where noted otherwise, valves designated for water service shall conform to pertinent sections of the latest revision of AWWA C500 Specifications.

C. All valves shall be NSF/ANSI 372 Certified Lead Free compliant. Cast iron valve bodies

and parts shall meet the requirements of the latest revision of ASTM Designation A-126, "Standard Specifications for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, Class B."

D. All valve body castings shall be clean, sound, and without defects of any kind. No

plugging, welding, or repairing of defects will be allowed.

E. Valves shall have flanged ends for exposed service and mechanical joint ends for buried service, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein. Flanged ends shall be flat-faced, 125 lb. American Standard unless otherwise shown or specified in accordance with ANSI B16.1. All bolt heads and nuts shall be hexagonal of American Standard size. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating connecting piping.

F. Operating force: Fabricate valves to limit the maximum force required to operate all

manual valves, including but not limited to valves with wrench operated nuts, to 40 pounds. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with the latest revision of AWWA C500.

B. Shop Drawings conforming to the requirements of Section 01330, Submittals, are required

for all valves, and accessories. Submittals shall include all layout dimensions, size and materials of construction for all components, information on support and anchoring where necessary, pneumatic and hydraulic characteristics and complete descriptive information to demonstrate full compliance with the Documents. Shop Drawings for pneumatically operated/controlled valves shall include all details, notes, and diagrams which clearly identify required coordination with the compressed air (service air) system and electrical controls.


C. Operation and maintenance manuals and installation instructions shall be submitted for

all valves and accessories in accordance with the Specifications. The manufacturer(s) shall delete all information which does not apply to the equipment being furnished.

1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified representative of the manufacturer(s) of the equipment named below to check out and certify the installation(s), to supervise the initial operation, and to instruct the Owner's operating personnel in proper operation and maintenance procedures in accordance with the following schedule:

Item Valve/Operator Type Minimum On-Site Time Requirements

1. Swing Check Valves One (1) 8-hour day

2. Gate Valves One (1) 8-hour day

3. Butterfly Valves One (1) 8-hour day

B. Any additional time required to achieve successful installation and operation shall be at

the expense of the Contractor.

C. A written report covering the representative's findings and installation approval shall be mailed directly to the Engineer covering all inspection and outlining in detail any deficiencies notes.

D. The times specified are exclusive of travel time to and from the facility and shall not be

construed as to relieve the manufacturer of any additional visits to provide sufficient service to place the equipment in satisfactory operation.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE BOXES

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install valve boxes as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

B. All valve boxes shall be placed so as not to transmit shock or stress to the valve and shall

be centered and plumb over the operating nut of the valve. The distance from grade to the top of operating nuts shall be 48” maximum. Provide extension if top of operating nut is greater than 48” below grade. Equip all direct burial valves with adjustable type, cast-iron, valve boxes and extended shafts to grade. Equip all valve boxes with ground level valve position indicators unless otherwise shown or specified. The ground in the trench upon which the valve boxes rest shall be thoroughly compacted to prevent settlement. The boxes shall be fitted together securely and set so that the cover is flush with the finished grade of the adjacent surface. A concrete pad shall be provided around the valve box, sloped outwards.


C. All valve boxes shall be 2-piece cast iron, sliding type, 5-1/4" shaft, with heavy duty traffic weight collar and the lid marked with the appropriate carrier product (i.e.: WATER). Boxes shall be as manufactured by James B. Clow & Sons, Kennedy Valve Mfg. Co., Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company, or equal.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Except where noted otherwise herein, all valves shall be installing and tested in accordance with the latest revision of AWWA C500. Before installation, all valves shall be lubricated, manually opened and closed to check their operation and the interior of the valves shall be thoroughly cleaned. Valves shall be placed in the positions shown on the Drawings. Joints shall be made as directed under the Piping Specifications. The valves shall be so located that they are easily accessible for operating purposes, and shall bear no stresses due to loads from the adjacent pipe. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating connecting piping.

B. All valves shall be tested at the operating pressures at which the particular line will be

used. Any leakage or "sweating" of joints shall be stopped, and all joints shall be tight.

C. Provide valves in quantity, size, and type with all required accessories as shown on the Drawings.

D. Install all valves and appurtenances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Install suitable corporation stops at all points shown or required where air binding of pipe lines might occur. Install all valves so that operating handwheels or wrenches may be conveniently turned from operating floor but without interfering with access, and as approved by Engineer. Unless otherwise approved, install all valves plumb and level. Valves shall be installed free from distortion and strain caused by misaligned piping, equipment or other causes.

E. Valve boxes shall be set plumb, and centered with the bodies directly over the valves so

that traffic loads are not transmitted to the valve. Earth fill shall be carefully tamped around each valve box to a distance of 4 feet on all sides of the box, or to the undisturbed trench face, if less than 4 feet.

3.02 SHOP AND FIELD TESTING

A. Shop and field testing of valves shall be as follows:

1. Certified factory testing shall be provided for all components of the valve and operator system. Valves and operators shall be shop tested in accordance with the requirements in the latest revision of AWWA C500, including performance tests, leakage test, hydrostatic tests, and proof-of-design tests. The manufacturer through the Contractor shall submit certified copies of the reports covering the test for acceptance by the Engineer.


2. Shop testing shall be provided for the operators consisting of a complete functional check of each unit. Any deficiencies found in shop testing shall be corrected prior to shipment.

3. The Contractor shall conduct field tests to check and adjust system components, and to test and adjust operation of the overall system. Preliminary field tests shall be conducted prior to start-up with final field tests conducted during start-up. The factory service representative shall assist the Contractor during all field testing and prepare a written report describing test methods, and changes made during the testing, and summarizing test results. The service representative shall certify proper operation of the valve operator system upon successful completion of the final acceptance field testing.

4. Preliminary and final field tests shall be conducted at a time approved by the Engineer. The Engineer shall witness all field testing.

5. All costs in connection with field testing of equipment such as energy, light, lubricants, water, instruments, labor, equipment, temporary facilities for test purposes, etc. shall be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim for damage which may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner formally takes over the operation thereof.

6. Preliminary field tests shall be conducted prior to start-up and shall include a

functional check of the entire valve operator system and all system components. Preliminary field tests shall demonstrate that the valve operator system performs according to specifications. The preliminary field test report must be approved by the Engineer prior to conducting final field acceptance tests. Based on results of preliminary field tests, the Contractor shall make any adjustments required to settings, etc., to achieve the required valve closing time and operation specified or otherwise directed by the Engineer.

7. Field tests shall be conducted for the full range of operating modes and conditions

specified and as directed by the Engineer. Each of the valves shall be tested at minimum, maximum, and normal head/flow conditions, and under all specified conditions of opening and closing. Performance of pneumatic valves and compressed air system under normal operating conditions and during simulated power failures shall be checked.

8. The Contractor shall provide the means for accurate measurement of pipeline

pressures as directed by the Engineer.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 15100

VALVE OPERATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Equipment shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 15000 –

Basic Mechanical Requirements.

B. Reference Section 15390 – Schedules for additional information on valves and operators. C. Valve operators shall be designed to unseat, open or close, and seat the valve under the

most adverse operating condition to which the valves will be subjected. D. Operator mounting arrangements shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by

the Engineer. E. The valve operators shall be the full and undivided responsibility of the valve manufacturer

in order to ensure complete coordination of the components and to provide unit responsibility.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Manual operators shall be provided on all valves. Manual operator type shall be as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.

B. Quarter turn valves shall have geared operators. Gate valves shall have geared operators.

2.02 MANUAL OPERATORS

A. Buried valves shall be equipped with nut operators, extended stems, and valve boxes. Where the depth of the operating nut is more than 4 feet below finish grade, a valve operator extension shall be provided to bring the operating nut to within 18-24 inches of the surface.

B. Manual operators shall be rigidly attached to the valve body unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings.

C. All operators shall turn counter-clockwise to open and shall have the open direction clearly

and permanently marked.

03

07

16

BR


D. Nut operators shall have standard 2-inch square AWWA operating nuts designed in accordance with AWWA C504-94.

G. Geared manual operators shall be of the worm gear, traveling nut or scotch yolk type

except manual operators for butterfly valves which shall be worm gear, unless otherwise indicated in the individual valve specification. Gear operators shall be of the worm gear or bevel gear type. Gear box designs incorporating end of travel stops in the housing shall be equipped with AWWA input stops. Each gearbox shall require a minimum of 10 turns for 90 degree rotation or full valve stem travel and shall be equipped with a mechanical valve position indicator.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING

A. Valve operator testing shall be integral to valve testing and shall be as described in Section 15095 – Valves, General.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 15101

BUTTERFLY VALVES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Reference Section 15000, Basic Mechanical Requirements. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 BUTTERFLY VALVES (WATER SERVICE)

A. Butterfly valves (water service) shall be of the rubber-seated, tight-closing type conforming to the latest revision of AWWA C504 Specifications. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in manufacturing butterfly valves of the sizes required in accordance with AWWA C504 Specifications. All butterfly valves shall be the product of one manufacturer. Butterfly valves shall be as manufactured by Pratt, Mueller Co., DeZurik, or equal. Each valve shall be performance and leak tested as specified in AWWA C504 revised as follows: In addition to the testing requirements of AWWA C504, each butterfly valve shall be thoroughly cleaned and opened and closed at least three (3) times prior to testing. Certified copies of the test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to shipment of the valve.

B. Butterfly valves shall be Class 150B, unless otherwise indicated in the valve schedules,

and of the short body design with mechanical joint ends. Butterfly valves shall be suitable for direct bury installation.

C. Valve bodies shall be epoxy coated cast iron conforming to ASTM A-126, Grade B, ASTM

A-48, Class 40 or Ductile Iron ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. Where required to meet design operating conditions, valve bodies shall be manufactured of higher strength materials. Valve bodies shall have integral hubs for housing shaft bearings and seals.

D. Butterfly valves shall be of the concentric or eccentric shaft types. Valve discs shall be

constructed of epoxy coated ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. Disks shall be of the "offset" design to provide a full 360 degree seating surface with no external ribs transverse to flow, and shall comply with the latest revision of AWWA C504 Specifications. The valve manufacturer shall furnish Shop Drawings which include end clearance dimensions when the disc is in the full open position.

E. The resilient valve seat shall be synthetic rubber designed to seat against a pressure

differential of 150 psi on either side of the valve, unless otherwise indicated. The resilient seat shall be mechanically attached to the valve disc or valve body. Any required seat attachment hardware shall be stainless steel. The resilient seat shall be capable of being adjusted or replaced in the field without moving the valve disc along the shaft axis, or removing the valve from the line. The mating seat surface shall be stainless steel or monel.


The seats shall be factory tested as per AWWA C504 at a test pressure of 150 psig, unless otherwise indicated, and post adjusted for differential pressures indicated herein.

F. Valve shafts shall be one-piece or two-piece units of stainless steel construction suitably sized to transmit the torques required to operate the valves under the conditions listed in the valve schedule with appropriate safety factor. Shafts shall be securely attached to valve disc by means of conservatively sized corrosion-resistant taper pins, threaded at one end and secured with lockwashers and nuts (i.e.: mechanically attached). Provide O-ring seal on taper pin if required to prevent leakage. Shaft key shall be constructed of corrosion-resistant material.

G. Shaft bearings shall be contained in the integral hubs of the valve body and shall be the

permanently self-lubricated, corrosion resistant, sleeve type of teflon or heavy-duty bronze. The valve assembly shall be furnished with a factory set two-way thrust bearing designed to center the valve disc in the valve seat at all times. End cover bolts shall be of stainless steel construction.

H. The shaft seal shall be either the bronze cartridge type with at least two O-rings, monolithic

V-Type, or pull down packing type. If monolithic V-Type or pull down packings are utilized, it shall be self-adjusting, self-compensating type. Packing shall be as manufactured by Chevron, or equal. Butterfly valves with pull down packings shall be designed with an extension bonnet so that repacking can be done without removal of the actuator. For buried valves with pull down packing the packing gland cover assembly shall be heavy duty, soil and water resistant. Stuffing boxes for pull down packing shall have a depth sufficient to accept at least four rings of self-compensating type packing specifically selected for the operating pressures to be encountered. Stuffing box bolts, studs and nuts shall be stainless steel.

I. The "O" ring type shaft seal shall be contained in a removable bronze cartridge. The

bronze cartridge shall be manufactured from ASTM B505 copper alloy UNS #C93200 and shall meet the requirements of AWWA C504 for bronze, Grade E. The "O" ring material shall be nitrile, BUNA-N rubber, as intended for use with potable water or wastewater and per ASTM D-2000 with a hardness of 70 Shore A Durometer.

J. Manual operators for butterfly valves 18-inches in diameter or larger shall be the worm

gear type conforming to AWWA C504. Operators shall be equipped with adjustable AWWA limit stops, shall be sized according to Table IV for Class 150B, and shall require a minimum of 15 turns for 90 degrees or full stem valve travel. The capacity of the manual operator shall be adequate to drive the valve under the differential pressure and maximum anticipated flow indicated in the appropriate valve schedule.

K. The manufacturer shall certify that the butterfly valves are capable of operating in

continuous duty service under these pressures and flow conditions.

L. Each valve shall by hydrostatically tested and tested for bubble tightness after the operator has been mounted and adjusted. Copies of the hydrostatic and leakage test certification and certification of conformance shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to shipment.

M. All internal and external ferrous components and surfaces of the valves, with the exception

of stainless steel and finished or bearing surfaces, shall be shop painted with two coats (10 mils min. dry film thickness) of the manufacturer's premium epoxy for corrosion


resistance. Damaged surfaces shall be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 15105

CHECK VALVES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Reference Section 15000, Basic Mechanical Requirements.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 SWING CHECK VALVES (WATER SERVICE)

A. Check valves shall be swing check valves rated for a minimum working pressure of 150

psi and shall be of the "Swing-Flex Check Valve" type as manufactured by Val-Matic, “Rubber Flapper Swing Check Valve” type as manufactured by DeZurik or equal.

B. The valves shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with AWWA C508. C. Valve body and cover discs shall be constructed of ductile iron fully conforming to the

latest revision of ASTM A-126 Class B. Valve ends shall be Standard American 125 pound flat-faced flanged, in accordance with ANSI B16.1.

D. The seating surface shall be a 45 degree angle to minimize disc travel.

E. The top access port shall be full size, allowing removal of the disc without removing the valve from the line.

F. The disc shall be of one-piece construction, precision molded with an integral o-ring type

sealing surface and contain alloy steel and nylon reinforcement in the flexible hinge area.

G. The exterior and interior of the valve shall be coated with an ANSI/NDF 61 approved fusion bonded epoxy coating.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 15108

GATE VALVES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Reference Section 15000, Basic Mechanical Requirements. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 GATE VALVES

A. Gate valve body and bonnet shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A126, Class B with resilient wedge gate and O-ring seals. The gate shall be ductile iron with a vulcanized rubber coating with no metal to metal contact when in the fully closed position and a smooth unobstructed waterway when in the fully opened position. Gate valves 18 inches and larger shall fully comply with the requirements of AWWA C515 for resilient-seated gate valves, shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 250 psi, shall have zero leakage, and shall be single-gate construction and spur or bevel gears, unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. Valves shall be manufactured by American, Mueller, US Pipe and Foundry, Kennedy, or equal.

B. Valves shall be mechanical joint as shown on the Drawings, with non-rising stems, and

with a 2-inch square standard AWWA operating nuts unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein.

C. Gate valves shall be manufactured by American, US Pipe and Foundry, Mueller, or equal.

F. All internal ferrous components and surfaces of the valves, with the exception of stainless

steel and finished or bearing surfaces, shall be shop painted with two coats (10 mils min. dry film thickness) of the manufacturer's premium epoxy for corrosion resistance. Damaged surfaces shall be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

- END OF SECTION -

01

18

05

BR


SECTION 15390

SCHEDULES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Reference Section 15000, Basic Mechanical Requirements. 1.02 PIPING SYSTEM SCHEDULES

A. Piping requirements for this Section are outlined on the Drawings and in the Piping System Schedule. All water pipes shall have restrained joints.

PIPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE

PIPE DESIGNATION

MATERIAL TYPE OF

JOINT CLASS/DESIGN

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

DESIGN (1)

PRESSURE

TEST PRESSURE

Water Ductile Iron

(Buried)

Restrained Push On Joint; Restrained Mechanical Joint

Class 52 40 psi 30 psi

Water Ductile Iron (Exposed) Flanged Class 53 40 psi 30 psi

1.03 VALVE SCHEDULES A. Valve requirements for this Section are outlined on the Drawings and in the Valve Schedule.

VALVE SCHEDULE

VALVE TYPE JOINT SIZE

(in) FLOW (MGD)

MAX DIFFERENTIAL

PRESSURE

(psi)

CLASS / PRESSURE

RATING

GATE Mechanical Joint 24, 30, 36 N/A 20 250

BUTTERFLY Mechanical Joint 24,30 N/A 20 150B

CHECK Flanged 24 4 15 Refer to Section 15095 CHECK Flanged 30 10 20

- END OF SECTION -

12

23

13

BR

Project Manual For Project No. 31297-000 BYRD PARK ...€¦ · Project Manual For Project No....

Documents

Transcript of Project Manual For Project No. 31297-000 BYRD PARK ...€¦ · Project Manual For Project No....